dkctweet

Patho Micro Made Easy

Dr K Chaudhry

FIRST Author of Jaypee Brothers


 

Content

 

 

Page

01

Clinical Pathology

3

02

Haematology

58

03

Inflammation and Repair

93

04

Circulatory Disturbances

127

05

Nutritional Disturbances

141

06

Granulomata

170

07

Tumours

177

08

Cardiovascular System

185

09

Urinary System

205

10

Respiratory System

226

11

Alimentary System

247

12

Miscellaneous Topics

267

13

General Bacteriology

277

14

Systematic Bacteriology

295

15

Virology

350

16

Parasitology

366

 


 

Chapter 1 : Clinical Pathology

BLOOD EXAMINATION

Bleeding Time

Duke's method: Prick the ear lobe or palmar surface of a finger tip sufficiently to induce a free flow of blood. It should be practised to produce a blot of 1-2 cms at the end of a minute. At the end of every half a minute blot with a piece of filter paper, making a row of blots, till the blood flow ceases. Bleeding time in minutes is number of blots divided by two.

The normal bleeding time is 1-3 minutes. It is enhanced in platelet deficiency and fibrinogen deficiency, but not in hemophilia.

Bleeding & coagulation time : Duke method

Coagulation Time

1. With capillary blood: A wound is pricked as above and the blood is flown into a capillary tube, about 1.5 mm in diameter. Short sections of tube are then broken off every minute until fibrin thread appears between the broken ends. The coagulation time is the interval between the start of blood flow and the last break point.

The normal coagulation time with this method is 3-5 minutes

2. With Venous Blood (i)  Lee & White method: This can be combined  with serum separation for biochemistry and immunological tests. Blood is drawn through a hypodermic needle into an 8 mm diameter glass tube. It is tilted every minute till it can be inverted without displacing the clot. Time is counted from the point at which blood starts flowing out of the needle.

The normal coagulation time with this method is 5-10 minutes. It increases with tube diameter.

(ii) Howell's method: It is similar to Lee & White method except the treatment of syringe before use. Fill the syringe alongwith needle with ether-petrolatum mixture. Force the mixture out and draw air into the syringe a few times. Ether will evaporate leaving petrolatum coating. Draw 2-4 ml blood into the syringe and empty it into glass tube about 2 cms in diameter. Proceed as in preceding method.

Normal coagulation time with this method is 10-30 minutes.

Prothrombin Time

Quick's method: Mix 0.4 ml sodium oxalate 0.1 M with 1.6 ml fresh blood. Invert 2-3 times to mix thoroughly. Centrifuge to obtain clear plasma.

Mix 0.1 ml plasma with 0.1 ml thromboplastin suspension. Incubate at 37şC for about 5 minutes. Add quickly 0.1 ml calcium chloride M/14 solution and start the stop-watch. The end point is one at which the tube can be tilted to horizontal position without displacing the clot.
The normal prothrombin time depends upon the type of thromboplastin. It is 12-14 seconds with vacuum dried preparation and 17-19 seconds with air-dried one. A normal control should be run for comparison.

Prothrombin time chart

Haemoglobin

Haemoglobin may be estimated as acid hematin, oxyhemoglobin or cynmethemoglobin. Acid hematin method with Sahli's hemoglobinometer is most suitable for bed side diagnosis. Cynmethemoglobin method is most widely used with colorimeter. However, both the reagent and the standard are poorly stable. The acceptable proposal for cynmethemoglobin method would be to use manufacturer's standard first week and to use carboxyhemoglobin (final solution) prepared from first sample of every week, as a standard during the week. Thus a chain of fresh standards may work for the kit life.

Sahli's method 

Sahli’s Haemoglobinometer

Place hydrochloric acid N/10 in hemometer tube upto mark 10. Pour into it, 0.02 ml fresh or oxalated whole blood from Sahli's pipette. Mix with the glass rod. Place the tube in the frame. After a minute, dilute the mixture with water drop by drop, mixing after each addition, until the colour shade matches exactly with the standard shade on the frame. The reading corresponding to the surface of final solution gives hemoglobin concentration in the blood, both as g% and as percentage of normal.

Haemocytometer
 


Neubauer counting slide


RBC pipette


WBC pipette

Hemocytometer comprises a thick counting slide (Neubauer counting slide) with two pipettes, and is used for erythrocyte and leucocyte counting.

Erythrocyie pipette, with red identification bead bears three marks 0.5, 1 and 101. Presuming the capillary part upto mark 1 as unmixed with blood, the pipette is used to dilute the blood 1:100 or 1:200 with erythrocyte diluting fluid. 

Leucocyte pipette, with white identification bead bears 0.5, 1 and 11 marks. This can be used for 1:10 and 1:20 dilutions of blood with leucocyte diluting fluid. The dilution can be more conveniently made with ordinary pipettes. 

Neubauer counting slide has two counting areas, for two samples at a time with a separating groove. The counting areas, each comprising 9 large squares of 1 square mm area are slightly depressed. A specially ground coverslip placed over the counting area gives a depth of 0.1 mm. Thus each one of the 9 large squares covered with the coverslip holds a volume of 0.1 cu.mm.

Total erythrocyte count
Either of the following two fluids, may be used.

 

Toison's Fluid

Sodium chloride 1g 

Sodium sulphate (anh.) 8g 
Glycerine 30g 
Distilled water 160 ml 
Methyl violet 5B 1% 2 ml

Hayem's fluid

Mercuric chloride 0.5g 
Sodium sulphate (anh.) 5g 
Sodium chloride 1g 
Distilled water 200 ml 

The fluids develop molds with time and have to be filtered frequently. The author overcame this problem by using benzoic acid 0.1% in place of distilled water.

Total leucocyte count

Turk's leucocyte diluting fluid is prepared as follows:

Acetic acid glacial 1 ml
Gentian violet 1% 1 ml
Distilled water 100 ml

This fluid develops moulds and has to be filtered frequently. Moulds can be prevented by using benzoic acid 0.1% in place of distilled water.

Neubauer counting slide

Central large square of Neubauer counting slide, intended for erythrocyte counting, is divided into  25 sets of 16 small squares each. Erythrocytes in four corner sets and the central set are counted. The volume of the counted space is 0.02 cu mm.

Erythrocyte Counting

1.     Suck up the capillary blood from finger tip or  car lobe to the mark 0.5.
2.  Then suck up the erythrocyte diluting fluid to the  mark 101.
3.  Rotate the pipette in horizontal position for  1-2 minutes to mix.
4. Discard the first few drops. Touch the pipette tip under the projecting surface of the cover slip in position over counting slide. The solution will seep under the cover slip by capillary action.
5. Under high power lens of the microscope count the total number of erythrocytes in five sets of 16 small squares in erythrocyte counting area (Fig. 1.5).

 

The erythrocytes lying over upper and left edges of small square should be counted; those or right and lower edges should be ignored.

Calculation

                                           1
Erythrocyte count = C x  ----------- x 200 per cu. mm
                                        0.02

                           = C x 10,000 per cu. mm

Where C is the count in 5 x 16 squares, 0.02 the volume of counted space and 200 the dilution factor.

Leucocyte Counting

Proceed as with erythrocyte counting, using Turk's fluid. Take blood to mark 0.5 and dilute to mark 11.
 
 



Count the leucocytes in four large squares at the corners and divide with 4 to get the average.

Calculation

                                        1
Leucocytes count = C x ---------  x 20 per cu. mm
                                      0.1

                            = C x 200 per cu. mm.

where C is the average count in one large square (16 small squares), 0.1 the volume covered and 20 the dilution used.
 

Differential leucocyte count

Differential leucocyte counting is done on a stained peripheral blood smear.

The slides used should be cleaned and defatted. Used slides should be cleaned by boiling in sodium carbonate 1% solution. The slides should then be rinsed with distilled water, kept under a stream of running water for a few hours and finally stored in ethanol-ether mixture (1 + 1). Before using, the slides should be dried and then wiped with linen cloth.

In order to prepare a blood smear, touch the slide surface with the blood welling up from the finger tip or ear lobe. Take a clean polished coverslip (square shape), hold it between thumb and index finger, and press its edge gently over the droplet until the droplet runs along the edge. Then holding the coverslip at an angle of 45ş, spread the blood with a motion to give a uniform even smear. Make two or three smears and stain one at a time.

Leishman Staining

The staining solution is prepared by dissolving 1.5g powdered stain in a litre of methanol. The solution should be shaken vigorously during the first 24 hours.

The blood smear is covered with 10 drops of Leishman stain for 30-60 seconds, making sure that the smear remains wet. More stain may be poured, if necessary. 20 drops of distilled water are then poured over the stain. The slide is rocked gently in order to mix the stain well with distilled water. After 10 minutes, the smear is rinsed with running tap water, dried in air, and examined under oil immersion lens.

Types of Leucocytes

At least one hundred leucocytes should be differentiated into neutrophils (polymorphonuclears), lymphocytes, monocytes, eosinophils, basophils and abnormal cells.
 
 

White blood cells

Thrombocyte Counting

Any of the following solutions may be used as platelet diluting fluid.

1.  Ammonium oxalate 1%.

2. Sodium citrate 3.8%     100 ml
    Formaldehyde 40%       0.2 ml
    Brilliant cresyl blue         0.1 g

3.  Sodium oxalate           1.6 g
     Formaldehyde 40%       6 ml
     Crystal violet              0.05 g
     Distilled water                94 ml

The first solution is preferred by experienced technicians whereas the latter 2 solutions are more suitable for freshers.

The blood is diluted 1:10 with diluting fluid with the help of leucocyte pipette. Further procedure is same as for erythrocyte counting. Multiplication factor is 1,000 in place of 10,000.

URINE EXAMINATION

Collection of Specimen

A. For routine examination. Spontaneous urine sample should be collected in a clean jar. Time of passing urine sample should be such that urine is most likely to contain the pathological constituent being sought viz.

1.  Inflammatory disease. Morning sample.
2.  Orthostatic proteinuria. Before and after  the patient gets up.
3.  Glycosuria. Two hours after meals.
4.  Urobilinogen tests. Afternoon.

Only fresh urine should be used to study the urinary sediments.

B. For bacteriological examination. Preferably a morning specimen should be collected in a clean sterile flask. A catheter specimen is essential in female patients and desirable in male patients. In males, an inferior alternative is mid-stream urine. Glans penis and urethral meatus are cleaned with several swabs soaked in normal saline. The first portion of urine is discarded and mid-stream sample is collected in a sterile flask. The last portion is also discarded.

C. For chorionic gonadotrophin test. For UCG  pregnancy test, a morning specimen is desirable. Patient should not take water in the morning till specimen is collected. Drugs such as salicylates, barbiturates should not be taken for at least two days prior to collection.

D. For quantitative estimations. A 24 hour collection of urine should be pooled in a sterile (or hot water washed) glass vessel. At the beginning of the stipulated 24 hour period, the bladder must be emptied and the urine collected discarded. At the end of 24 hour period, the hladder should again be emptied and urine included in the pool; 5 mI of 10% thymol should be added to preserve 24 hour pool. Alternatively 3-4 drops of toluene should be added to form a thin film on the surface.

General tests

Urine output.

24 hour urine output varies with:

(i) Fluid intake
(ii). Fluid loss in sweating
(iii). Substances excreted

Nonnal Values

Adults

1000 - 1600 ml

8-14 years

800 - 1400 ml

5-8 years

650 - 1000 ml

3-5 years

600 - 700 ml

1-3 years

500 - 600 ml

2-12 months 

400 - 500 ml

10-60 days

250 - 450 ml 

3-10 days

100 - 300 ml

1-2 days 

30-60 ml

The day time output is 2-4 times the night time output. The reverse (nycturia) is an early sign of.
(i) Pyelitis                                     (ii) Nephrosclerosis.

Oliguria. Urine output less than 500 ml/24 hours.

Observed in:

Rascal

(i) Renal diseases

Careless

(ii) Cardiac insufficiency

Flirty

(iii) Fever

Duffer

(iv) Diarrhoea and vomiting

Senti

(v) Severe sweating

Fool

(vi) Fluid deprivation

Pissing

(vii) Prostatic hypertrophy

On

(viii). Organic nervous disorders

Plot

(ix) Psychopathic disorders

Polyuria. Urine output more than 2500 ml/24 hours.

Observed in:

Every

(i) Excessive fluid intake

Critical

(ii) Cold atmosphere

Dying

(iii) Diuretic therapy

Patient

(iv) Pituitary tumours

Has

(v) Hydronephrosis

Received

(vi) Renal tuberculosis

Caring

(vii) Chronic nephritis (compensation stage)

Doctor’s

(viii) Diabetes insipidus and mellitus

Prescription

(ix) Paroxysmal tachycardia

 Urine Colour
 
 

(i) Pale yellow to golden yellow

Normal

(ii)    Colourless to pale yellow

(a)   Chronic interstitial nephritis 

(b)   Diabetes mellitus 
(c)   Untreated diabetes insipidus 
(d)   Chronic Glomerulonephritis 
(e)    Diuretic therapy.

(iii)   Orange yellow

(a)  Fluid losses - Sweating, diarrhoea, vomiting, fever 

(b)  Low fluid intake 
(c)  Urobilin, pyrazolone derivatives, carotenes.

(iv)   Red

High concentration. of uroerythrin, blood, hemoglobin, myoglobin, porphyrins, aminopyrine, antipyrine, aniline dyes.

(v)   Brown

Hemoglobin, melanin, salicylic  acid.

(vi)   Greenish

Biliverdin, methylene blue, indigo carmine, carbolic acid, following long  period of standing up.

(vii)   Blue

Methylene blue, indigo carmine.

(viii)    Milky. 

Fats, pus.

Urine turbidity.

Normal urine, when passed is clear. On standing for some time, a flocculent sediment (nubecula) settles down. Turbidity of urine can be assessed with the following scheme.

Heat a few ml of urine in a water bath or over a flame
 
 

1. Turbidity disappears

Uric acid salts or uric acid

2. Turbidity intensifies

Protein, carbonates or phosphates.

3. Turbidity does not clear

(i) Add a few drops of 10% acetic acid

clearance of turbidity indicates phosphates or carbonates. 

(ii)  Add a few ml of 12.5% hydrochloric acid

Clearance of  turbidity indicates oxalates, leucine, tyrosine or cystine. 

(iii)  Add a few ml of 20% sodium hydroxide. 

(a)  Red colouration of precipitated  phosphates indicates blood. 


(b)  Gelatinous coagulation indicates  pus.

(iv)  Shake with ethanol/ether mixture.

Milky  appearance indicates fat.

Specific gravity.

The specific gravity is conventionally measured as milligrams per cubic centimetre. Thus a specific gravity of 1.015 is written as 1015. It is measured with a urinometer having callibrations of 1000-1040. The urinometer is made to float in a glass container (flask or wide tube) so that it does not touch the bottom or sides of the container. The normal value is 1015-1025. Sugar and protein increase the density of urine. To make specific gravity an index of renal function, the following allowances should be made.,

1. Add 0001 for every 3şC above callibration temperature (usually 15şC) of the urinometer. Subtract 0001 for every 3şC below the callibration temperature.

2. Subtract 0003.7 for every 1% glucose and 0002.6 for every 1 % protein.

Reaction.

Normal urine is acidic (pH 4.8 - 7.4).

Strongly acidic in:

(i)               Malignancy

(ii)              Fever

(iii)            Severe diarrhoea

(iv)            Diabetic and metabolic acidosis.

Alkaline in:

(i) Urinary infections
(ii) Respiratory and metabolic alkalosis.

Chemical Tests  

People

Protein

Sitting

Sugar

Away

Acetone bodies

Bit

Bile salts

Back

Bile pigment

Under

Urobilin

Balcony

Blood

Have

Haemosiderin

Praised

Porphobilinogen

My

Melanin

Dance

Diazo substances

 

1.     Protein

Normally the urine contains very little amount of proteins with low molecular weight. In pathological conditions, the permeability of glomeruli changes thus increasing the protein content of urine, mainly of serum albumin. The proteins excreted in urine may be of following types:

Send

1.       Serum albumin

A

2.       Albumoses

Paper

3.       Peptones

Boat

4.       Bence-Jones proteins.

Detection of proteins may be made with the following tests

1 Purdy's heat test. Check the reaction of urine and if alkaline, add 10% acetic acid drop by drop until the litmus paper shows just acidic reaction. Incline at an angle and boil the top 2 cm over a flame, holding the bottom of the test tube. Examine against a dark background. A cloudy appearance indicates protein or phosphates. Add a few drops of 10% acetic acid and boil again. If cloud disappears, it indicates phosphates; a persistent cloud indicates protein. False positive results may be observed in patients receiving tolbutamide, high doses of penicillin or radiographic contrast media.

2. Robert's test. Place 2-3 ml Robert's reagent in a test tube and gently layer a few drops of urine over it. Albumin gives a white ring which varies in density with the amount of albumin present.

3. Heller's test. The procedure is the same as for Robert's test. Concentrated nitric acid is used in place of Robert's reagent.

4. Sulphosalicylic acid test. Take 5 ml urine in a test tube. Add 0.5 ml sulphosalicylic acid 20%. Albumin gives white precipitate.

Esbach’s Albuminometer

Quantitative test for protein

Fill up the albuminometer to mark U with urine. Add Esbach's reagent to mark R. Close the tube with a rubber stopper, invert it slowly several times, and set it aside in a cold place. At the end of 24 hours read the height of the precipitate in grams/ litre. Divide it with 10 to get percentage.

Causes of Proteinuria

 

1. Functional or physiological:

P

(i) Postural or orthostatic

E

(ii) Exertion

M

(iii) Mental strain

P

(iv) Prolonged exposure to cold

P

(v) Pregnancy and premenstrual period

F

(vi) First week of neonatal period

 

2. Organic or pathological

 

(i) Pre-renal

Came

(a) Cardiac decompensation

From

(b) Fever

Taranagar

(c)  Toxemia

And

(d)  Ascites and intraabdominal tumours

Has

(e)  Heavy metals, e.g., bismuth, mercury

Died

(f)  Drugs, e.g., salicylic acid

 

(ii) Renal

Could

(a) Chronic glomerulonephritis

Not

(b) Nephrotic syndrome 

Read

(c) Renal tuberculosis

Important

(d) Infarction of the kidney 

Messages

(e) Malignancy

 

(iii) Post-renal

 

(a) Pyelitis

 

(b) Cystitis

 

(c) Urethritis

 

Bence-Jones Proteins

Bence-Jones proteins are paraproteins rich in carbohydrates and lipids. These are present in patients with:

My

(i) Multiple myeloma

Son

(ii) Sarcomatosis

Has

(iii) Hypernephroma

Low

(iv) Leukemia

Backache

(v) Bronchogenic carcinoma

These proteins produce milky turbidity at 45oC, which clears on further heating to 60oC.

2. Sugar.

Normal urine contains minute quantity of glucose not detected by ordinary tests. A detectable concentration of glucose in urine is termed glycosuria. The usually employed method of detection is Benedict's test.

Benedict's test. To 5 ml of Benedict's qualitative reagent add 8 drops of urine. Boil for 2 minutes and allow to cool. Note the change in colour or precipitate formation. The result may be interpreted as under:  

L

(i) Light green turbidity 

0.5%

G

(ii) Green precipitate

1% 

Y

(iii) Yellow precipitate

1.5%

R

(iv) Red precipitate

over 2%

False positive results maybe given by the presence of reducing agents, e.g., uric acid, creatinine, ascorbic acid, glucuronic acid, penicillin, tetracycline, paraaminosalicylic acid, salicylates.

Causes of Glycosuria 

 

(a) Glycosuria with hyperglycemia  

Do

(i) Diabetes mellitus

Try

(ii) Thyrotoxicosis

General

(iii) Grave's disease

Recruitment

(iv) Raised intracranial tension

Entrance

(v) Ether anesthesia

Exam

(vi) Emotional upset

 

(b) Glycosuria without hyperglycemia  

Rosy

(i) Renal glycosuria

Ended

(ii) Excessive carbohydrate intake

Party

(iii) Pregnancy

Meeting

(iv) Myocardial infarction

3. Acetone bodies. Presence of acetone bodies such as acetone, diacetic (acetoacetic) acid and beta­oxybutyric acid is always abnormal. It occurs in diabetes mellitus and starvation due to neoglucogenesis after glycogen stores in the liver have been depleted

Tests for Acetone

(i) Rothera's test. Place about 5 ml urine in a test tube and add about 1 g ammonium sulphate followed by 2-3 drops of concentrated sodi­um nitroprusside solution. Add 1 ml con­centrated ammonium hydroxide solution. A permanganate coloured ring indicates the presence of acetone.

(ii) Lange's test. As above but adding 5 drops of glacial acetic acid in place of ammonium sul­phate.

(iii) Frommer's test. Add 2-3 ml sodium hydro­xide 10 N to 10 ml urine. Add 10-12 drops of 10% salicylaidehyde (alcoholic). Heat the upper portion to about 700C without reaching boiling point for at least 5 minutes. A yellow, orange, red or brown colour indi­cates acetone.

Tests for Diacetic Acid
1. Gerhardt's test. Add 10% ferric chloride solution to about 5 m] urine drop by drop until phosphates are precipitated. Filter and to the filtrate add more ferric chloride solution. Diacetic acid produces a red colour.

The test should be confirmud, if positive, on urine diluted with equal volume of water and boiled off to original volume. Colour due to diacetic acid will not appear in confirmatory test. Colour in confirm­atory test is due to other substances such as phenol ' salicylates, antipyrine and sodium bicarbonate. Lindematin's test should be performed in such cases.

2. Lindemann's test. To 10 in] urine, add 5 drops of 30% acetic acid and 5 drops of 5% iodine solution (in 10% potassium iodide). Then add 2-3 drops of chloroform. In the presence of diacetic acid, chlo­roform will not become reddish violet.

Tests for Beta-oxybutytic Acid
Mix 800 ing ammonium sulphate, 3 drops of con­ce,ntrated ammonium hydroxide solution and two drops of sodium nitropresside 5% (freshly prepared). Add 1 ml urine and after 5-6 minutes, 5 ml water. A deep blue colour indicates beta-oxy­
butyric acid.

4. Bile salts.
Hay's test. Fill half the test tube with urine. Sprinkle finely powdered dry sulphur over the surface. In normal urine the particles will float on the surface, if bile salts are present, particles will sink.

False positive results may be given by high concentrations of urobilin or if thymol is used as preservative.

Causes

(i) Obstructive jaundice.
(ii) Parenchymal liver damage.

5. Bile pigment.
(a) Fouchet's test. If the urine is alkaline or neutral, acidify it with a few drops of 2% acetic acid. Take 10 mI of acidic (or acidified) urine in a test tube. Add half this quantity of 10% barium chloride. Mix well, filter, and add a drop of Fouchet's reagent on the filter paper. A green or blue colour indicates bilirubin.

(b) Gmefin's test. Take 3 ml of concentrated nitric acid in a test tube. Add an equal amount of urine. A green or blue ring indicates bilirubin.

6. Urobilin (urobilinogen)
Elirlich's test. To about 5 mI urine add 1 ml Elirlich's reagent. A cherry red colour indicates abnormal urobilin. A light red colour appears with normal urine.

7. Blood. Benzidine test. Dissolve a pinch of benzidine in glacial acetic acid. Add 2 ml of urine, previously boiled and cooled, to 1 ml benzidine solution. Mix and add 1 ml of 3% hydrogen peroxide. Wait for 5 minutes. A green or blue colour
indicates blood.

Causes of Haematuria

 

(a)  In the kidney

 

A

 

(i) Acute glomerulonephritis

Senior

 

(ii) Subacute bacterial endocarditis

Nurse

 

(iii) Nephrolithiasis

Privately

 

(iv) Polycystic kidney

Enters

 

(v) Embolic nephritis

Retiring

 

(vi) Renal infarcts

Room

 

(vii) Renal tuberculosis

To

 

(viii) Tumours of kidney and pelvis

Meditate

 

(ix) Malignant nephrosclerosis

 

(b) In the lower urinary tract

I

 

(i) Inflammation or calculus in ureter

I

 

(ii) Inflammation or calculus in bladder

T

 

(iii) Tumours.

 

(c) Others

 

People

 

(i) Purpura

Like

 

(ii) Leukemia

Pens

 

(iii) Polyarteritis nodosa

8. Hemosiderin
Rous'test. Centrifuge a fresh sample of urine and pour off the supernatant.-Add a mixture of 5 ml 2% potassium ferrocyanide plus 5 ml 1% hydrochloric acid. After 10 minutes, centrifuge and discard the supernatant. Examine the sediment covered with cover-glass, under the microscope. Hemosiderin will appear as blue granules.

9. Porphobilinogen
Watson & Schwares test. Mix 2 ml urine with 2 ml Ehrlich's reagent. Add 2 ml saturated Zinc ace­tate solution followed by 2 ml chloroform. Mix thoroughly. A red colour in the bottom layer (chloroform) indicates urobilinogen whereas red colour in upper portion indicates porphobilino­gen.

10. melanin
(i) Add a few drops of 10% ferric chloride to 10 in] urine. A gray precipitate turning black on standing, indicates melanin.
(ii) Mix equal volumes of urine and bromine water. A yellow precipitate, which gradually turns black, indicates melanin.

11. Diazo substances

Prepare diazo reagent by mixing 10 ml 0.5% sulphanilic acid solution with 0.1 ml 0.5% sodium nitrite solution. Mix 5 ml -each of urine and diazo reagent by inversidn. Add 1-2 ml liquid ammonia. If the reaction is positive, garnet ring will appear at the junction and on shaking the foam will be coloured deep red. Yellow or orange colour should be ignored.

The reaction becomes positive on 4-5th day of typhoid fever and fades during third week. An early fading is a favourable sign. It may also be positive in pulmonary tuberculosis and measles.

Microscopic Examination

A sample of urine is centrifuged at 1000-1500 rpm for about 3 minutes. The upper clear portion is discarded as much as possible and the centrifuge tube is then  shaken to form homogenous suspen­sion of the sediment. A drop is placed on the slide and covered with a cover slip. The slide is examined under high power objective of the microscope and a search is made for the following:

1. Erythrocytes. Normal urine shows upto one erythrocyte per high power field. Excess blood in urine is termed haematuria.

Causes of hematuria are enumerated above in this chapter.  

2. Leucocytes. A few leucocytes or pus cells are present in normal urine. Upto 5 cells per high power field may be considered as normal. Abnormal amount of leucocytes in urine is seen in inflammatory conditions of the uri­nary tract, renal tuberculosis and following catheterisation.

3. Casts. Hyaline casts result from precipita­tion of mucoprotein in the renal tubules. On hyaline casts materials such as erythrocytes, leucocytes, epithelial cells may be deposited. On microscopic examination casts are recog­nised as cylinderical bodies with sharply defined outline and rounded ends one of which may be 'broken'. Casts of following types may be detected:

 

(i) Hyaline casts

 

Someone

 

(a) Subacute glomerulonephritis

Can

 

(b) Chronic glomerulonephritis

Crack

 

(c) Chronic venous congestion

Nuts

 

(d) Nephrosclerosis

 

(ii)  Finely granular casts

 

Come

 

(a) Chronic glomerulonephritis

From

 

(b) Fever

Adjacent

 

(c) After exercise

Door

 

(d) Diuretic therapy

 

(iii)  Densely granular casts

Great

 

(a) Glomerulonephritis

Daring

 

(b) Diabetic nephropathy

Robust

 

(c) Renal amyloidosis

Man

 

(d) Malignant hypertension

 

(iv) Fatty casts

 

 

 

Nephrotic syndrome

 

(v) Waxy casts

 

 

 

Amyloidosis

 

(vi) Cellular casts

 

Read

 

(a)Renal failure

Gharam

 

(b) Glomerulonephritis

Msaala

 

(c) Malignancy

Daily

 

(d) Pyelonephritis

  

4. Crystals

(a) In acid urine:

(i) Calcium oxalate

(ii) Uric acid

(iii) Urates.

(b) In Alkaline urine:

(i) Amorphous phosphates

(ii) Ammonium urate.

STOOL EXAMINATION

Gross Examination

Congress

Colour

Opposes

Odour

Madhya

Mucus

Pradesh

Pus

Chief

Concretions

Polling

pH

Officer

Occult blood

 

1.       Colour

Lazy

 

(i)Light brown

 

 

 

Normal

Guy

 

(ii)Green

 

 

 

Infantile diarrhea

Can

 

(iii)  Clay

 

Only

 

(a) Obstructive jaundice

 

Educated

 

(b) Excess of fat

 

Teachers

 

(c) Tuberculous peritonitis

 

Attend

 

(d) Achylia pancreatica

Derail

 

(iv)  Dark brown or bright red

 

Baby

 

(a) Bleeding from distal colon

 

Has

 

(b) Hemorrhoids

 

First

 

(c) Fissure

 

Class

 

(d) Carcincnaa rectum

Business

 

(v)  Black

 

 

G

 

(a) Gastrointestinal bleeding

 

T

 

(b) Tuberculosis of large bowel

 

Mall

 

(c) Malignancy of large bowel

 

Inside

 

(d) Iron intake

2.       Odour

(i) Odourless.

 

 

Antibiotic therapy

(ii) Foul smelling

 

 

(a) Acute enteritis

 

(b) Malignant ulcer in rectum and distal colon

(iii)  Foul, frothy and buk

 

 

Malabsorption syndrome

3.     Mucus

(i)  Small in amount and mixed intimately

 

 

 

Lesion in small intestine

 

(ii)  Large amounts not well mixed

 

 

 

Lesion in large intestine

 

 

(iii)  Large aniount streaked with blood

 

 

 

(a) Dysentery

 

 

(b) lleocolitis

 

 

(c) Intussception

4. Pus. (with blood and mucus)
(i) Ulcerative colitis
(ii) Bacillary dysentery
(iii) Regional enteritis.

5. Concretions. Gallstones.

6. pH. Normal pH is 6.8 - 7.3. Excess of carbohydrate produces acidity and excess of protein alkalinity.

7. Occult blood

(i) Benzidine test. Already described.

(ii) Orthotoluidine test. Prepare thick suspen­sion of feces. Add 1 mJ, of orthotoluidine reagent and 1 mI of 3% hydrogen per­oxide. Observe for a minute. Bluish green colour indicates occult blood.

Microscopic Examination

Transfer one drop of thick stool suspension (in normal saline) onto a slide. Cover with coverslip and examine first under low power objective and then under high power objective. One more slide should be prepared and examined in the same way adding a drop of weak iodine solution.

Concentration Methods

1. De Riva's inethod. Place about 1 g stool in a test tube. Add 5 ml 5% acetic acid. Close the tube and shake vigorously for half a minute. Keep still for half a minute coarse particles will sink rapidly to the bottom. Pipette out homogeneous supernatant into a centrifuge tube. Add an equal volume of ether. Close the tube and shake vigorously for half a minute. Centrifuge for 5 minutes. The contents will differentiate into four layers:

(i) Ethereal layer (for occult blood)
(ii) Detritus plug comprising bile, soap and protein matter
(iii) Acetic acid
(iv) Bottom sediment with ova and cysts. Pi­pette and the sediment for examination and detection of ova and cysts.
2. Zinc sulphate method. Dilute about 5 g stool with 4 times its volume of warm water. Strain the mixture through a cloth into a centrifuge tube. Centrifuge for a minute at top speed. Pour off the supernatant. Add more water and centrifuge. Simi­larly wash the sediment with water 3-4 times till the supernatant is clear. Pour off the last supernatant and add 3-4 ml 33% zinc sulphate solution. Break up the sediment and fill up the zinc sulphate solution upto 2 cm from the rim. Centrifuge at top speed for a minute. Examine the top floating mate­rial with a drop of iodine for ova and cysts.

Findings

Cysts of protozoa viz.
(i) Entamoeba histolytica

Cyst of Entamoeba histolytica

(ii) Entamoeba coli

Cyst of Entamoeba coli

(iii) Giardia intestinalis

Ova of helminths viz.
(i) Ascaris lumbaricoides



(ii) Enterobius vermicularis


(iii) Ankylostoma duodenale


(iv) Taenia saginata and Taenia solium


(v) Hymenolepsis nana


(vi) Trichuris trichura

 

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

 

Quiet

 

1. Quantity

 

 

 

A. Slight

 

 

 

 

Incipient tuberculosis

 

 

 

B. Small

 

 

 

 

(i) Acute bronchitis

 

 

 

 

(ii) Lobar pneumonia

 

 

 

C Large

 

Andhra

 

 

(i) Advanced tuberculosis

 

Pradesh

 

 

(ii) Pulmonary oedema

 

Boys

 

 

(iii) Bronchiectasis

 

Rising

 

 

(iv) Ruptured lung abscess

 

Excellently

 

 

(v) Empyema

Calm

 

2. Colour

 

 

 

Yellowish green

 

 

 

 

(i) Advanced tuberculosis

 

 

 

 

(ii) Chronic bronchitis

 

 

 

Bright green

 

Jolly

 

 

(i) Jaundice

 

Lovely

 

 

(ii) Lobar pneumonia

 

Cameraman

 

 

(iii) Caseous pneumonia

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Red

 

 

 

 

- Hemoptysis

 

 

 

Rusty red

 

 

 

 

(i) Lobar pneumonia

 

 

 

 

(ii) Pulmonary infarction

 

 

 

Brown

 

 

 

 

- Chronic venous congestion

 

 

 

Grayish black

 

 

 

 

(i) Coal depot workers

 

 

 

 

(ii) Smokers

Composed

 

3. Consistency

 

 

 

Tenacious

 

 

 

 

- Lobar pneumonia

 

 

 

Mucoid

 

 

 

 

(i) Early acute bronchitis

 

 

 

 

(ii) After asthmatic attack

 

 

 

Serous, bloody

 

 

 

 

- Pulmonary oedema

Ladies

 

4. Layer formation. When placed in tall glass vessel, sputum separates into three layers

 

Big

 

Bronchiectasis

 

Large

 

Lung abscess

 

Gate

 

Gangrene

Do

 

5. Dittrich's plugs. Yellowish or gray masses, a few millimetres in diameter; may be exporated alone or in sputum. They may be passed by normal persons or may be found in :-

 

 

 

Bronchitis

 

 

 

Bronchiectasis

Play

 

6. Pneumoliths. These are mostly calcified no­dules of tuberculous tissue. Some foreign bodies such as gun-shots may be passed out as pneumoliths.

Better

 

7. Bronchial casts. Branching (tree-like) fibri­nous structures, upto 15 cm long. May appear like a ball and can be recognized only by floating over water.

 

Little

 

Lobar pneumo­nia

 

Fat

 

Fibrinous bronchitis

 

Doll

 

Diphtheria

 

B.  Microscopic Examination (unstained)

1.  Elastic fibres
(i) Pulmonary tuberculosis

(ii) Lung abscess

(iii) Gangrene.

2.  Curschmann’s spirals - Bronchial asthma

3.  Charcot-Leydon crystals- Bronchial asthma

4.  Pigmented cells
(i) Hemosiderin cells - Venous congestion (ii) Carbon-laden cells
(a) Coal depot works (b) Smokers.

5.  Myeline globules - No significance

6.  Molds, yeasts and parasites.

C. Microscopic Examination (stained)

Several smears should be stained with AJFB stain, Gram stain and for capsules.

1. AFB Staining
A thin smear should be fixed by heating the slide, smear up, over the flame. The slide should be pass­ed slowly over the fidme thrice and brought to room temperature. It may subsequently be stained with either hot or cold method.

a. Hot method. Cover the smear with carbol fuchsin (strong). Heat it over flame till it steams for 3 minutes. Stain should not dry out; add more staining solution as necessary. Rinse with water and pour sulphuric acid 20% or, preferably, hydro­chloric acid 3% in ethanol till pink stain ceases to flow out. Rinse with water and counterstain with Loffier's methylene blue for two minutes.

b. Cold method. The smear slide is air dried on a warming plate. The slide is prefixed in a Coplin jar of absolute methanol for 5 to 10 s, stained in carbol fuchsin-DMSO solution in a Coplin jar for 5 min, and rinsed individually in gently running tap water until excess solution no longer ran off (10 to 30 s per slide). Slide is then placed in the decolorizer-counterstain for 1 min or until a green background appeared and then is rinsed under running tap water for 10 s, drained, blotted, and placed on a warming plate until thoroughly dry (5 or 10 min). A thin film of immersion oil is applied over smear with an applicator stick. 
 

For the carbol fuchsin-DMSO stain, 4 g of basic fuchsin crystals is dissolved in 25 ml of 99% ethyl alcohol. 12 grams of phenol crystals liquefied in a water bath (or 12 ml of liquefied phenol) is added and mixed well with a glass stirring rod. Then, 25 ml of glycerol, chemically pure, 25 ml of DMSO  and 75 ml of distilled water are added and mixed well. The solution is allowed to stand for 30 min and then filtered, The stain may be used immediately or kept indefinitely at room temperature in an amber glass bottle. For the decolorizer-counterstain solution, 220 ml of a 2% aqueous solution of malachite green is prepared; 30 ml of glacial acetic acid (99.5%) and 50 ml of glycerol, chemically pure, are added and mixed well. Filtration is unnecessary. This solution keeps indefinitely in a closed container at room temperature. 

The smear examined with either method should be examined under oil-immersion lens. The tubercle bacilli appear as dark-red dots in a blue or green background. 
 

Concentration Method

Mix equal volumes of sputum and sodium hypo­chlosite 5.25%. Centrifuge the mixture at high speed for 10 minutes. Pour off the supernatant and drain the tube for 2 minutes.

Transfer the sediment to the slide, fix and stain the smear with AFB stains.

2. Gram's staining
Cover the heat-fixed smear with crystal violet stain for half a minute. Rinse with water and cover with Lugol's iodine for half a minute. Decolorize with acetone (or 95% ethanol) till the purple colour ceases to come off. Counterstain with safranin 0.5%.

3. Capsule staining

(i) Smith's method
(a) For Gram-positive bacteria. Dip the heat-fixed smear into 10% phosphomolybdic acid for 4-5 seconds. Rinse in water. Cover with aniline-gentian violet and steam gently for 15-30 seconds. Rinse in water cover with Lugol's iodine and steam gently fw 15-30 seconds. Decolorize with 95% ethamol as in Gram's method. Rinse in water. Cover with eosin 2% and gently warm for 30~60 seconds. Rinse in water and dry by blotting.
(b) For gram-negative bacteria. Stain with phos­phomolybdic acid as above. Cover with eosin 2% and gently warm for 30-60 second. Rinse in water, Cover with Loffler's methylene blue solution and warm gently for 15-30 seconds. Rinse in water.

(ii) Hiss' method
Dry the film in air without heating cover with crystal violet solution for two minutes. Wash with 20% copper sulphate solution. Dry by blotting.

The organisms frequently encountered are myco­bacterium tuberculosis, staphylococci, strepto­cocci, Diplococcus pneumonie, Mebsiella pneumoniae Haernephillus influenzae, Haemophillus pertussis, and neisseria.
Wrights stain preparation should be examined for leucocytes, epithelial cells and erythrocytes.

LIVER FUNCTION TESTS

Indications
(i) To determine the type of jaundice
(ii)  To confirm the suspected liver disease
(iii)  To estimate hepatic function as a guide to  progress and prognosis
(iv)  To detect the occult hepatic damage prior to surgery.

Shortcomings
(i) Due to great functional reserve of liver, slight damage may fail to give positive result.

(ii)  Some tests may be positive in extra hepa tic lesions.
(iii)  Tests indicate the nature and extent of the disease but not the cause.
(iv)  Results have no relation with the extent of anatomical damage.
(v) Certain tests are based on functions occurring m other organs also, e.g., conversion of glucose into glycogen in muscles.

Classification

B

I. Tests based on bile pigment metabolism

 

 

 

1. Serum bilirubin estimation

 

 

 

2. Bile pigment and salt in urine

 

 

 

3. Estimation of urobilinogen in urine

 

E

II. Test based on excretory functions of liver

 

 

 

-          Bromsulphthalein retention test

-           

D

III. Test based on detoxication

 

(Ed)

 

-          Benzoic acid conjugation test

-           

Me

IV. Tests based on metabolism

 

 

 

1. Carbohydrate metabolism

 

 

 

 

-          Estimation of blood sugar

-           

 

 

2. Protein metabolism

 

 

 

(i)  Estimation of total proteins

 

 

 

(ii)  Detection of relatively raised globulin (Seroflocculation tests)

 

 

 

 

(a) Cephalin cholesterol flocculation test

 

 

 

 

(b) Thymol turbidity test

 

 

 

 

(c) Zinc sulphate turbidity test

 

 

 

(iii) Estimation of serum prothrombin level

 

 

3. Serum Cholesterol

Easy

V. Tests based on enzyme synthesis

 

 

1. Serum alkaline phosphatase

 

 

2.  Serum glutamic oxaloacetic transaminase  (SGOT)

 

 

3. Serum  glutamic pyruvic transaminase (SGPT)

Hai

VI. Test based on hormonal regulation

 

 

-          Urine Ketosteroid Estimation

Admission

VII. Test based on absorption and storage of iron

 

 

-          Estimation of Serum Iron

 I. Tests based on bile pigment metabolism:
1. Serum bilirubin estimation:
Normal liver   0.14.0 mg%
Latent Jaundice   1.0-3.0 mg%
Manifest jaundice   above 4 mg%

Bilirubin may be present in conjugated or unconjugated form. The two types of bilirubin can be distinguished by van den Bergh's test. Ehrlich's diazoreagent is added to serum of the patient. Red colour indicates directpositive test (conjugated). If this red colour deepens on addition of alcohol, the test is biphasic (mixed). If the colour appears only on addition of alcohol the test is indirect positive (unconjugated).
Direct positive   Post-hepatic jaundice.
Indirect positive Pre-hepatic jaundice.
Biphasic   Hepatic jaundice.

2. Bile pigment and salt in urine:
Appear in post-hepatic (obstructive) jaundice.

3. Estimation of urobilinogen in urine:

Normal              0.5 - 3.0 mg/day
Increased in       Pre-hepatic jaundice
                         Hepatic jaundice
Absent in           Post hepatic jaundice

II. Test based on excretory functions of liver:

Bromsulphthalein retention test:
The dye is injected intravenously (5 mg/kg. body weight). It is taken up by liver and excreted in bile. After 45 minutes the retained dye is estimated. The normal value is 0.5 per cent. It is raised in hepatic (b) 7hymol turbidity test: and post-hepatic jaundice.

III. Test based on detoxication:

Benzoic acid conjugation test.
Benzoic acid, taken orally, is conjugated in the liver by lysine forming hippuric acid. The latter is excre­ted in urine. If liver is damaged, hippuric acid in the urine remains low.

IV. Tests based on metabolism:

1. Carbohydrate metabolism:
The test is based upon values in serial blood sugar determinations following the oral or intravenous administration of glucose or galactose, normally converted into glycogen. While this test is used in the detection of galactosaemia, rare inborn error of metabolism in infants, it has been superseded by other methods which are more sensitive for liver functions.

2. Protein metabolism:

(i)  Estimation of total proteins:
All the serum proteins are manufactured in the liver. Liver damage results in lowered level of serum proteins. Other causes of hypoproteinaemia, however, should be excluded.
(ii)  Detection of relatively raised globulin
(Seroflocculation tests):
The tests are based upon the precipitation of globulin by certain chemical agents. Albumin prevents this precipitation. The positive tests indicate hepatoceflular damage in which globulin is relatively raised in comparison with albumin.

(a) Cephalin cholesterolflocculation test.

The result is expressed as:

Normal :    0, +

Positive :   ++, +++, ++++

(b) Thymol turbidity test
1-4 units  normal
above 4 units  positive.

(c) Zinc sulphate turbidity test:
2-12 units  normal
above12units   Hepaticjaundice

Caution. These tests may also be positive in other conditions with hyperglobulinaemia, e.g., kala­azar, malaria, multiple myelosis, sarcoidosis and collagen diseases.

(iii) Estimation of serum prothrombin level. A low serum prothrombin level, not im­proving after administration of vitamin K, shows liver damage.

3. Serum Cholesterol
Normal

150 - 250 mg/100 ml.

Raised in obstructive jaundice (exclude
other causes):
Lowered in   Haemolytic jaundice.

V. Tests based on enzyme synthesis:

1. Serum alkaline phosphatase:

Produced by liver osteoblasts.
Normal 3-13 King Armstrong units.
Raised in

(i) Obstructive jaundice. (ii) Space occupying lesions of the liver.

Lowered in  Severe liver damage.

2.  Serum glutamic oxaloacetic transaminase (SGOT)

Normal   5-40 units.

Raised in
(i) Liver damage,
(ii) Myocardial damage.

The level is raised in proportion to the extent of damage. However, myocardial damage should be .excluded.

3. Serum  glutamic pyruvic transaminase (SGPT).

Normal  120-500 units

Importance of Enzyme Tests:
(i) Early detection of infective hepatitis
(ii) Detection of mild damages due to drugs.

VI. Test based on hormonal regulation:

Urine Ketosteroid Estimation:
Sex hormones are metabolised in the liver and excreted in the urine as 17-ketosteroids. In liver damage, ketosteroids are diminished in urine.

VII. Test based on a absorption and storage of iron.

Estimation of Serum Iron:

Normal  80-140 mg. per 100 ml.
Raised in
(i) Acute hepatic injury (ii) Haemolysis (iii) Abnormal absorption.

Selection of Tests

Jaundice:

Serum bilirubin estimation with van den Bergh reaction Serum alkaline phosphatase Sero-flocculation test (iv) Serum cholesterol (v) Urinary and faecal urobifinogen (vi) Bile salts and pigment in urine.

Hepatitis

(a) Pre-icteric:

(b) Icteric:

(i)  Bile pigment in urine
(ii)  S.G.O.T. and other enzymes.

(i)  Bile pigment and urobilinogen in
urine
(ii)  Enzymes
(ifi)  Sero-flocculation tests.
(c) Chronic:
(i) Serum proteins (ii) Bromsulphthalein test.

Liver Cirrhosis.,

(i) Seroflocculation
(ii) Serum proteins
(iii) Bromsulphthalein.

Neoplasms and space occupying lesions:

- Serum enzymes.

RENAL FUNCTION TESTS

 

I. Tests based on observing the response to a load

 

 

1. By naturally occurring substances

Distilled

 

 

(i)  Diurnal variations

Water

 

 

(ii)  Water clearance test

Unpacked

 

 

(iii)  Urea concentration test

 

 

2. By foreign substances

 

 

 

(i)  Phenylsulphonephthalic acid (PSP) test

 

 

 

(ii)  Congo red test

 

II. Clearance tests

Union

 

 

(i) Urea clearance test

Carbide

 

 

(ii) Creatinine clearance test

India

 

 

(iii) Inulin clearance test

 

III. Based on composition of blood

Non

 

1. Non-protein nitrogen (NPN)

 

 

 

(i) Urea

 

 

 

(ii) Creatinine

 

 

 

(iii) Uric acid

Paying

 

2. Plasma protein

Clients

 

3. Cholesterol

 Diurnal Variations

The patient should not take water after 6 PM. Urine is collected between 10 PM and 6 AM and specific gravity measured. In normal persons, the specific gravity is 1023 or above. In kidney diseases, specific gravity is lowered and the amount of urine passed during night may approximate to that during the day. Other conditions to be differentiated are:

(i) Diabetes insipidus
(ii) Enlarged prostate
(iii) Urinary tract infections
(iv) Addison's disease
(v) Excessive intake of tea, coffee, etc.

Water Clearance Test

First, take a sample of urine emptying the bladder completely. After one hour ask the patient to take one pint of water. Collect the urine hourly for 3 hours. Measure the amount and specific gravity of every sample. In normal persons, there is quick diuresis; within 4 hours, most of the water passes out. Damaged kidneys cannot remove the extra load of water.

Urea Concentration Test

The patient is not given water for 10 hours. Then he is given 15 G of urea dissolved in 150 ml. of water and flavoured with suitable agent. Urea is esti­mated in the urine every hour for 3 hours. In normal persons at least one sample should contain minimum 2.5 G of urea per 100 ml.

PSP Test

The advantage is that inefficiency of single kidney can be tested. The substance is harmless, non-irri­tant, excreted freely by the kidneys, and easily detected in urine.

300 ml. water is given and bladder emptied. One mi. of dye solution containing 6 mg. of PSP is in­jected intramuscularly. Urine is collected in a test tube containing some alkali. If two separate catheters are used, the function of individual kidneys can be tested. Appearance of dye in the urine manifests by red colour. In normal persons, the dye appears within 10 minutes; 40-60 per cent of the dye is excreted in first hour, and 20-25 per cent in second hour. Total excretion of less than 50 per cent indicates renal damage.

Congo Red Test

In normal persons, only 40 per cent of the dye disappears from the blood in an hour. In renal amyloidosis, the dye disappears very quickly.

Urea Clearance Test

Urine is collected and measured for a period of 2 hours, with or without loading the urine. Sample of blood is taken at the mid-point of collection pe­riod. Amount of urine passed per minute is calculated. Urea clearance is calculated as follows:.

             UxV
Cm =  --------
               B

           U x V
Cs =  ----------
               B

Where Cm. or Cs is the urea clearance, U the amount of urea in the urine, V the volumeof urine passed per minute, and B the blood urea. If the volume per minute is more than 2 ml. maximum urea clearance (Cm) is calculated the normal value being 65.85. If the volume per minute is less than 2 ml., standard urea clearance (Cs) is calculated; the normal value being 44.64.
The urea clearance is lowered in impaired renal function. Fall in urea clearance is gradual in chronic nephritis.

Creatinine Clearance Test

The excretion of urea is the resultant of glomerular filtration and tubular reabsorption. Creatinine, however, is not reabsorbed by tubules and thus has an advantage in the clearance studies. Normal value is 90-100 per cent.

Inulin Clearance Test

Inulin is completely filtered off and completely un­changed by the tubules. Normal value is 100 per cent.

Blood Urea Estimation

Normal blood urea level is 20-40 mg per 100 ml. It is unaltered in the early stages of chronic nephritis but later, there is a marked rise. In terminal stages, it frequently exceeds 500 mg. per 100 ml. The extrarenal conditions to be differentiated are:

He

(i) Heavy metal poisoning

Pays

(ii) Prostatic obstruction

Every

(iii) Eclampsia of pregnancy

Coming

(iv) Cardiac failure

Orphan

(v) Oligovolaemia

 

Blood Creatine Estimation

Normal 0.8-1.0 mg per ml. Not affected by protein intake.

Blood Uric Acid Estimation

Normal –

Female :  2.4-6.0 mg/dl

Male : 3.4-7.0 mg/dl

Raised in
(i) Renal insufficiency
(ii) Chronic myeloid leukaemia

(iii) Gout.

Plasma Proteins

Normal serum protein 6-7.5 G/100 ml. (Albumin 3.3-5.5 G; globulin 2.3-3.0 G).

Serum albumin below 2.5 G1/100 ml. leads to oedema; Albumin: globulin ratio is reversed.

Serum Cholesterol

Normal - 150-250 mg/100 ml.
Raised in
  (i) Renal failure
(ii) Nephrotic syndrome
(iii) Diabetes mellitus
(iv) Myxoedema.

CSF EXAMINATION

Components of CSF examination

Punjab

 

1. Physical examination

 

 

 

(i) Pressure

 

 

 

(ii) Appearance

Congress

 

2. Chemical examination

 

Punjab

 

(i) Proteins

 

Civil

 

(ii) Chlorides

 

Service

 

(iii) Sugar

Committee

 

3. Cell count

 

 

 

(i) Total cell count

 

 

 

(ii) Differential cell count

Begins

 

4.  Bacteriology

 

Session

 

5. Special investigations

 

 

 

(i) Colloidal gold test

 

 

 

(ii) Pandy's test

Physical examination

 1. Pressure:
Normal - 60-150 mm. of water (Lying)
  200-250 mm of water (Sitting)

 

Raised in :

 

Indian

 

(a) Intracranial tumours

Ministeries

 

(b) Meningitis

Have

 

(c) Hydrocephalus

Demons

 

(d) General paralysis of insane (GPI)

 

Lowered in:

 

Human

 

(a) Head injury

Rerource

 

(b) Repeated lumbar puncture

Service

 

(c) Subarachnoid block

 

2.  Appearance:
Normal - clear and colourless

Turbid in pyogenic meningitis

Cob-web coagulum in tuberculous meningitis.

Blood:

(a) Trauma of needle

(b) Intracranial haemorrhage

(c) Subarchnoid haemorrhage.

Xanthochromia:

(a) Spinal block

(b) Auditory nerve tumour

(c) Chronic jaundice

(d) Polyneuritis.

Chemical Examination

1.  Proteins
Normal 20-30 mg/100 ml.

 

Raised in

 

My

 

(a) Meningitis

Enemies

 

(b) Encephalitis

Not

 

(c) Neurosyphilis

Coming

 

(d) Cerebral arteriosclerosis

 

Cyto-albumin dissociation seen in

Post

 

(a) Poliomyelitis (early stage)

Natal

 

(b) Neurosyphilis

Depression

 

(c) Disseminated sclerosis

 

5.     Chlorides:
Normal 700-750 mg/100 ml

Raised in: Uraemia.

Lowered in:

(a) Purulent meningitis

(b) Tuberculous meningitis.

3. Sugar:

Normal 50-80 mg/100 ml

Absent in: Pyogenic meningitis

Reduced in: Tuberculous meningitis

Normal in: Viral infections.

Cell-Count

Normal 0.5 cells/cu. mm. (usually lymphocytes).

5-100 cells/cu. mm. in:

(a) Neurosyphilis

(b) Encephalitis

(c) Poliomyelitis.

100-500 cells/cu. mm. in:

(a) Tuberculous meningitis

(b) Syphilitic meningitis

(c) Aseptic meningitis.

Beyond 500 cells/cu mm. in:

-         Purulent meningitis.

Causes of lymphocytosis in CSF:

(a) Neurosyphilis
(b) Poliomyelitis
(c) Encephalitis

(d) Tuberculous meningitis

(e) Cerebral tumour

(f) Lymphatic leukaemia

(g) Chloroma.

Causes of Polymorphonuclear leukocytosis in CSF:

(a) Pyomeningitis

(b) Poliomyelitis (early stages).

Bacteriology

Gram positive cocci : Pyogenic meningitis
Acid fast bacilli  : Tuberculous meningitis

Special Investigations

(i)               Colloidol gold test:

Depends upon propor­tion of α-globulin and other proteins.  α-globulin precipitates colloidal gold whereas albumin and β-globulin inhibit it.

Serial dilutions of CSF are prepared with a solu­tion of colloidal gold and allowed to stand over­night. Normal CSF does not show precipitation. Precipitation indicates three types of patterns :-

(a) Paretic pattern. Maximum precipitation in the tubes containing high concentration of CSF
Seen in   G.P.I.

(b)   Leutic pattern. Precipitation in the tubes with relatively less concentration of CSF
Seen in   Tabes dorsalis.

(c)  Meningitic pattern. Precipitation in tubes with least concentration of CSF
Seen in   Meningitis.

(ii)  Pandy's test. Depends upon the precipitation of globulin by aqueous phenol.

Positive in meningitis

Slightly positive in neurosyphilis.

 


 

 

Chapter 2 : Haematology

BLOOD FORMATION (HAEMOPOIESIS)

Blood formation takes place from primitive tissue or mesenchyme. From the early foetal life till late adult stage the location of blood forming mesen­chyme, changes with regular transition.

1. The earliest site of blood formation is area vasculosa which comprises islands within the mesenchyme of yolk sac. The intravascular primi­tive cells are termed haemocytoblasts or haemo­histioblasts. This phase continues to 9th week of intrauterine life.

2. In the second month of intrauterine life blood is formed predominantly in the liver. During 5th month, blood formation begins also in spleen and thymus. The splenic activity subsides shortly and during the last three months of foetal fife only hepatic activity continues slowly giving way to bone marrow as blood forming organ.

3. During the last trimester of intrauterine life, blood formation starts in the bone marrow; by the time of birth, bone marrow takes up this function completely.

4. During adult life haernopoiesis gets gradually restricted to red bone marrow in vertebrae, ribs, sternum,  skull, pelvis and proximal epiphyseal regions of the humerus and femur. Till puberty all the marrow in all the bones is red and blood forming; later it becomes yellow, fatty and inactive blood forming sites.

Under conditions of stress as in haemolytic anaemias when excessive blood formation is imperative, the fat in the yellow bone marrow disappears rendering it red and active again; haemopoietic activity of liver and spleen also revives but not of thymus.

Development of Red Blood Cells

The common precursor of red blood cells,'polymorphs, eosinophils, monocytes and platelets is stem cell. Whether stem cell is also the precursor of lymphocytes is disputed. Under the influence of enzymes erythropoietin, granulopoetin and thrombopoietin, the stem cells get differentiated into erythroblast (normoblast), granulocytoblast and thrombocytoblast. There are four stages in the development of red blood cell:

1.  Pronormoblast
(i) Round or oval.
(5) 13-19µ in diameter.
(iii) Dark-purple nucleus with thick strands of chromatin showing tendency of clumping; occupies 3/4 of the cellular space; 2-3 nucleoli.
(iv) Dark blue homogeneously opaque cytoplasm
(v) Haemoglobin absent.

2.  Basophilic normoblast (Early normoblast)
(i) Round in shape.
(ii) 11-17µ in diameter.
(iii)  Nucleus, without neocleoli, with wheel spoke arrangement.
(iv)  Cytoplasm more basophilic and increased in amount.

Polychromatic  normoblast (Intermediate normoblast)

(i) Irregular outline.
(fl)  10-14µ in diameter.
(iii)  Nucleus small without nucleoli, with bluish black nuclear chromatin.
(iv)  Cytoplasm polychromatic.
(v) Mitochondrea abundant initially, dec­reased later, as pink spots of haemo­globin start appearing.

4. Orthochromatic normoblast (Late normoblast)

(i)  Spherical in shape.
(ii)  7-10µ in diameter.
(iii) Nucleus further smaller, represented by dark blue spot; later it undergoes pykno­sis and finally vanishes.
(iv)  Cytoplasm yellowish red with complete haemoglobinization.
(v)  Mitochondria absent.

Orthochromatic normoblast, after complete disappearance of nucleus is termed reticulocyte or juvenile red blood cell. It still has the remnants of basophilic RNA.

The stages of erythropoiesis described above appear in the bone-marrow and it is the mature red blood cells which appear in the peripheral blood. However, normoblasts can be observed in peri­pheral blood smears in cases of severe anaemias and leukaemias.

Reticulocytosis

The normal reticulocyte count is 0.5-2.0% of the red blood cell count. High reticulocyte count (reti­culocytosis) indicates excessive generation of red blood cells as seen in:

1. Physiological

(i)  Foetal life
(ii) Neonatal period

(iii) Spring season

(iv) Pregnancy.

Pathological
(i)  Anaemias, particularly haemolytic anaemia
(ii)  Following haemorrhage
(iii)  Haematinic therapy.


CLASSIFICATION OF ANAEMIAS

I. On the basis of size of red blood cells:
1. Microcytic
2. Normocytic
3. Macrocytic.

Il.  On the basis of mean corpuscular haemo­
globin concentration:

1. Hypochromic
2. Normochromic.

III. On the basis of etiology:

A. Excessive loss or destruction
1. Extravascular (post-haemorrhagic) (i) Acute (ii) Chronic.

2. Intravascular (Haemolytic) (i) Congenital (ii) Acquired.

B. Failure of output
1. Dyspoietic (i) Pernicious anaemia (ii) Iron deficiency anaemia.

2. Hypoplastic or aplastic (i) Primary (ii) Secondary.


MEGALOBLASTIC ANAEMIA

Maturation of red blood cells depends upon extrinsic factors viz. vitamin B,,, folic acid and an intrinsic factor in the gastric juice, believed to be an enzyme, haemopoietin. The intrinsic factor helps in absorption of the extrinsic factor. The deficiency of intrinsic factor is often hereditory the condition being known as pernicious anaemia.

Causes of Megaloblastic Anaemia

Inadequate intake of vitamin B12 and folic acid.

Defective absorption:
(i) Atrophy of gastric mucosa (pernicious anaemia).
(ii) Gastrectomy (total or subtotal).
(iii) Intestinal diseases. (a) Tuberculosis (b) Crolin's disease (regional ileitis) (c) Malabsorption syndrome.
(iv) Helmithiasis, e.g., Diphylobothrium latum.
(v) Drugs such as antimalarials, anticoagulants and folic acid antagonists.

3.  Excessive demand
(i) Pregnancy
(ii) Haemolytic anaemias.

The Megaloblasts
Vitamin B12 and folic acid play an important role in the maturation of erythrocytes as may be seen in the following chart :-

Chart : Erythropoiesis

In the deficiency of vitamin B12 and folic acid the blast stages of red blood cells are abnormally larger and are termed megaloblasts (cf, normoblasts). Just as normoblast, megaloblast also develops in four stages viz.
1. Promegaloblast
(i) Spherical in shape.
(ii) 19-27µ in diameter.
(iii)  Large nucleus occupying most of the cell size; with chromatin reticular and uniformly distributed; 3-5 nucleoli.
(iv)  No granules.

2.     Basophilic megaloblast

(i)               13-22µ in diameter

(ii)              Chromatin reticular without nucleoli

(iii)            Cytoplasm intensely basophilic.

3.     Polychromatic megaloblast

(i)               12-20µ in diameter

(ii)              Chromatin reticular

(iii)            Cytoplasm polychromatic or eosinophilic.

4.     Orthochromatic megaloblast

(i)               10-17 µ in diameter with distorted shape

(ii)              Nucleus small and eccentric

(iii)            Nucleus shows clumping

(iv)            Cytoplasm abundant and eosinophilic.

The orthochromatic orlate megaloblasts appear in peripheral blood smears in pernicious (and other megaloblastic) anaemia.

Pernicious Anaemia

Pernicious anaemia is a type of megaloblastic anaemia in which absorption of vitamin B12 is hampered due to chronic atrophic gastritis and the resultant failure of release of intrinsic factor.
 
 

Blood Picture
1. Haemoglobin, 3-10 g%
2. Red cell count less than 3.5 millions/cu. mm
3. Colour index, 1.2-1.5
4. Mean corpuscular diameter, 8.5µ
5. Mean corpuscular volume, 150 cuµ
6.  Mean corpuscular haemoglobin (MCH) 50 µµg.
7.  Mean corpuscular haemoglobin concentration (MCHC), 33%
8.  Anisocytosis, poikilocytosis, megalocytosis, polychromasia and punctate basophilia
9.  Normoblasts and megaloblasts present
10.  Platelet count reduced
11. Reticulocytes increased to about 2%
12. Leucopenia, 4,000-5,000 cells/cu. mm. with relative lymphocytosis, polymorphonuclears show a 'shift to right in the Arneth's count, some myelocytes present
13.  Coagulation time prolonged
14.  E.S.R. raised

Bone Marrow Changes

1.  Very marked erythroblastic reaction
2.  Yellow marrow becomes red in patches
3.  Trabeculae of medullary cavity absorbed
4.  Adult polymorphonuclears fewer in number
5.  Megakaryocytes reduced in number and degenerated.

Other Diagnostic Aids

1.  Serum bilirubin raised with an indirect van den Bergh's reaction.
2.  Gastric analysis shows achylia gastrica with histamine fast achlorhydria.
3.  Biopsy of gastric mucosa shows evidence of chronic atrophic gastritis.


IRON DEFICIENCY ANAEMIA

Etiology

Better

 

1.  Blood loss

 

Even

 

(i)  External haemorrhage-wounds

 

Innocents

 

(ii)  Internal haemorrhage

 

 

 

 

(a) Rupture of visceral vessel

 

 

 

 

(b) Gastric haemorrhage

 

 

 

 

(c) Menstruation

 

Punished

 

(iii) Parasitic disease

 

 

 

 

(a) Ankylostomiasis

 

 

 

 

(b) Malaria

Deport

 

2.  Deficient iron intake

 

 

 

(a) Poverty

 

 

 

 

(b) Faulty dietary habits

Every

 

3. Excessive demand

 

I

 

(i) Infancy

 

 

May

 

(ii) Menstruation

 

Pay

 

(iii) Pregnancy

 

Little

 

(iv) Lactation

Dog

 

4. Defective utilization

 

M

 

(i) Myxoedema

 

N

 

(ii) Nephritis

 

 

O [sequence]

 

(iii) Organic disease of stomach and oesophagus

Blood Picture


 

1.  Mean corpuscular volume 50-70 cuµ (microcytic).
2. Mean corpuscular haemoglobin concentration, 30% or less (hypochromic)
3.  Colour index, below 0.5.
4.  Several erythrocytes ring stained; poikilocytes scanty; erythroblasts rarely present.
5.  Total leucocyte count normal or slightly lower.
6.  Platelet count initially low, later increased.

Bone Marrow

1. Normoblastic hyperplasia
2. Immature cells increased in number
3.  Poorly haemoglobinized pyknotic normoblasts
4.  No stainable iron.

Other Changes

1.  Serum bilirubin low with no evidence of increased haernolysis.
2.  Serum iron reduced to 50µg/100 ml; total iron binding capacity increased.

HAEMOLYTIC ANAEMIA

Classification (Depending upon the causes)

 

 

I. Intrinsic defects in red blood cells

 

 

 

 

A.     Inherited

 

Few

 

 

 

1.  Familial acholuric jaundice (spherocytosis)

Nurses

 

 

 

2.  Nonspherocytic haemolytic anaemia

Have

 

 

 

3.  Hereditory elliptocytosis

Hat

 

 

 

4.  Haemoglobinopathies

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Sickle cell anaemia

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Thalassaemia

 

 

 

B. Acquired

 

 

 

 

1. Paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria

 

 

 

 

2. Dyspoietic anaemias

 

 

 

II. Pathological haemolytic mechanisms

One

 

 

A. Obscure antibodies

 

 

 

 

1. Idiopathic acquired haemolytic anaemia

 

 

 

 

2. Secondary haemolytic anaemia as in

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Carcinomatosis

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Reticulosis

Indian

 

 

B. Iso-agglutinins and lysins

 

Road

 

 

1. Rh incompatibility

 

 

Transport

 

 

2. Transfusion reactions

 

Company

 

 

3. Cold haemoglobinuria

Pilot

 

 

C. Parasitic invasion

 

 

 

 

-         Malaria

 

Hired

 

 

D. Haemolytic poisons

 

 

 

 

1. Bacterial

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Clostridium welchii

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Streptococcus pyogenes

 

 

 

 

2. Chemical

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Phenylhydrazine

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Potassium chlorate

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Lead

 

 

 

 

3. Vegetable

 

 

 

 

 

 

-         Saponin

Blood Picture

 

 

1.  Erythrocytes normocytic or microcytic in chronic cases, macrocytic
2.  Increased reticulocyte count
3.  Fragmented red cells and spherocytes
4.  Leucocyte count raised with 'shift to left' in Arneth's count
5.  Platelets generally normal.

Blood Marrow
L.  Normoblastic hyperplasia
2.  Proerythroblasts considerably increased.

Other Changes

1. Serum folic acid low.
2.  Free iron and phagocytosed erythrocytes in the histological sections of spleen, liver and  bone marrow.
3. Serum bilirubin raised upto 3.5 mg per 100 ml

ABNORMAL HAEMOGLOBINS

The normal form of haemoglobin in the adult has beeii designated as 'A' and that in the foetus as 'F' Genetically distinct abnormal forms of haemo­globin occur as a result of small molecular abnormalities. The most striking example is haemoglobin-S. In the homozygous forms (with abnormality in both chromosomes of a pair), fatal forms of haemolytic anaemia appear such as sickle cell anaemia and thalassaemia.

Detection

The following tests, the first two of which are briefly described here, are usually employed.

1. May-Grunwald's stain. This method is employed in detection of foetal cells which appear as pink staining refractile cells.

2. Alkali denaturation. When oxyhaemoglobin is treated with alkali, a brownish material (alkaline globin haematin) is formed. The reaction involves oxidation of haem iron to the ferric state, as well as denaturation of globin. The proportion of haemo­globin which does not undergo denaturation is termed as alkali resistant. If time is prolonged the whole haemoglobin undergoes denaturation. Denaturation of normal adult haemoglobin takes place within one minute. A one-minute denaturation value represents the percentage of alkaliresistant haemoglobin. A value of 03-1.7 per cent is normal. Values above 2 per cent are taken as abnormal.

3. Paper electrophoresis.
4. Crystallography.
5. Immunological specificity.
6. Rate of spread in surface films.
7. Oxygen dissociation curves.

Common Haemoglobinopathies
1. Sickle-cell anaemia
2. Thalassaemia
3. Haemoglobin C disease
4. Haemoglobin D disease
5. Haemoglobin E disease
6. Haemoglobin G disease
7. Haemoglobin H disease.

Sickle-cell Anaemia
It is a frequently fatal, chronic haemolytic anaemia.
Occurs almost exclusively in negroes.
Caused by homozygous inheritance of an abnormal haemoglobin (S). This haemoglobin is insoluble in the reduced state at lower oxygen tension. The red blood corpuscles assume a characteristic sickle shape increasing the viscosity of capillary blood. There is then a tendency to capillary thrombosis and tissue necrosis.

In the heterozygous state (only one chromosome involved out of a pair), the condition is termed sickle cell trait.

 

In sickle cell anaemia, there is marked anaemia and leucocytosis. The total erythrocyte count averages 2 million/cu. mm. and total leucocyte count 20,000/cu. mm. The film shows an extraordinary change in the shape of red cells; large number of these are of crescentic, sickle or stellate form. Many of the abnormal cells are being phago­cytosed by macrophages. Reticulocytes are increased. The serum is deep yellow due to great increase of bilirubin.

In sickle cell trait blood appears to be resistant to falciparum malaria.

Thalassaemia

It is a haemolytic anaemia due to an inherited abnormality of haemoglobin. Foetal haemoglobin continues to be produced after birth. The homo­zygous condition is almost always fatal in early life.

The disease occurs in two forms viz. Thalassaema major (homozygous) and thalassaemia minor (heterozygous).

Thalassaemia major (or Cooley's anaemia) is fatal in infancy and childhood. The blood may contain 40-100 per cent of foetal haemoglobin. There is a severe microcytic, hypochromic anaemia with much anisocytosis, poikiolocytosis, elongated and oval cells, and large number of characteristic target cells and leptocytes. Reticulocytes may be upto 30%; stippling, Howell-Jolly bodies and cabot rings are commonly found. Total leucocyte count is raised (13,000-50,000/cu. mm), with a few myeloid cells in more severe cases. The van den Berg reaction is indirect positive and the icteric index is raised. Blood platelets are usually normal.

 

Thalassaemia minor (Retti-Greppi-Micheli syndrome) and even minor grades known as thalassaemia minima, which arise from heterozygous inheritance, are mainly symptomless. A chance examination reveals mild anaemia with typical haematological features.

APLASTIC ANAEMIA

Aplastic anaemia is a type of pancytopenia (reduc­tion in all types of blood cells) characterised by a normocytic, normochronic anaemia, neutropenia and thrombocytopenia. Rarely there may be only an erythroid aplasia, the condition being known as pure red cell aplasia.

Causes

I

 

1. Idiopathic

Can

 

2. Constitutional

 

 

 

Fanconi's syndrome

Pay

 

3. Physical agents

 

 

 

Whole body irradiation

Charges

 

4.  Chemical agents

 

 

 

a. Dose related

 

An

 

 

(i) Alkylating agents

 

Able

 

 

(ii) Antimetabolites

 

Bodied

 

 

(iii) Benzene

 

Citizen

 

 

(iv) Chloramphenicol

 

Inside

 

 

(v) Inorganic arsenicals

 

 

 

(b) Idiosyncratic

 

Can

 

 

(i) Chloramphenicol

 

Politicians

 

 

(ii) Phenylbutazone

 

Open

 

 

(iii) Organic arsenicals

 

More

 

 

(iv) Methyl phenyl ethyl hydantoin

 

Science

 

 

(v) Streptomycin

 

Colleges

 

 

(vi) Chlorpromazine

In

 

5. Infections

 

Very

 

(i) Viral hepatitis

 

 

Minor

 

(ii) Miliary tuberculosis

 

Operation

 

(iii) Other infections

Indian

 

6.  Insecticides

 

 

 

(i) DDT

 

 

 

 

(ii) Malathion

 

Paise

 

7. Paroxysmal nocturnal haemoglobinuria

Blood Picture

 

1. Normocytic normochromic anaemia

2.  No evidence of erythropoiesis such as polychromatophilia, and reticulocytosis

3.  Leucocyte count low, may drop below 1,000/cu. mm., mainly lymphocytes present

4.  Platelet count low

5.  Serum iron elevated to the saturation of total  iron-binding capacity.

Bone Marrow

Aplastic or hypocellular bone marrow; in the initial stages it may occasionally be hypercellular.

POLYCYTHAEMIA

An increase in the number of circulating red blood cells, is termed polycythaemia.

Causes

 

A.  Relative polycythaemia (dehydration)

 

Very

 

(i) Vomiting

 

 

Dull

 

(ii) Diarrhoea

 

 

Time

 

(iii) Traumatic shock

 

 

Emerging

 

(iv) Excessive burns

 

 

 

B. True Polycytheamia (Polycythaemia rubra)

 

 

 

1.  Primary or idiopathic (Polycythaemia vera)

 

 

2. Compensatory polycythaemia

 

 

 

(a) High altitudes

 

 

 

(b) Chronic pulmonary disease

Every

 

 

 

(i) Emphysema

Cent

 

 

 

(ii) Chronic pulmonary fibrosis

Counts

 

 

 

(iii) Chronic pulmonary congestion

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3. Increased erythropoietin production

Rabbits

 

 

(a) Renal lesions

 

 

 

 

(i) Tumours

 

 

 

 

(ii) Cysts

 

 

 

 

(iii) Hydronephrosis

Can

 

 

(b) Carcinoma of liver

Come

 

 

(c) Cerebellar haemangioblastoma

Under

 

 

(d) Uterine myomata

Polycythaemia Vera

Blood Picture

 

1. Total erythrocyte count 7-12 million/cu mm
2. Haemoglobin 16-27 g/100 ml
3. Mean corpuscular volume 60-80 cu mm
4.  Mean corpuscular haemoglobin concentration  30-36%
5. Numerous normoblasts and polychromatic cells
6. Large blood volume with raised PCV
7. ESR below 1 mm/hour
8.  Platelet count about 1,000,000/cu. min. with deficient clot reaction
9.  Leucocytes 10,000 - 40,000/cu. mm. with 75-85% polymorphs.

Bone Marrow
1.  Densely cullular with little fat
2.  Cell trails hypercellular
3.  Erythropoiesis normoblastic
4.  Immature granulocytes and megakarocytes much abundant.

LEUCOCYTOSIS

The normal total leucocyte count is 5000-8000/cu. mm. Counts below normal are termed leucopenia whereas the counts above normal are termed leucocytosis

Blood Cells

Granulocytes

Physiological leucocytosis

1. Pregnancy

2. After meals

3. After exercise.

Types and Causes

A.  Neutrophilic leucocytosis (mainly in acute  infections):

Please

(i) Pneumococcal pneumonia

Enter

(ii) Empyema

From

(iii) Furunculosis

Park

(iv) Perinephric abscess

Office

(v) Osteomyelitis

And

(vi) Appendicular abscess

See

(vii) Septicaemia

Bonanza

(viii) Bacterial endocarditis

 

B. Lymphocytosis

 

 

1. Absolute lymphocytosis

Call

 

 

(i) Chronic infections

 

They

 

 

(a) Tuberculosis

 

Send

 

 

(b) Syphilis

 

Us

 

 

(c) Undulant fever

 

Material

 

 

(d) Malaria

A

 

 

(ii)  Acute infections

 

 

 

 

(a) Infectious mononucleosis

 

 

 

 

(b) Pertussis

Lad

 

 

(iii)  Lymphosarcoma

To

 

 

(iv) Thyrotoxicosis

Open

 

 

(v) Obesity

Door

 

 

(vi) Diabetes mellitus

 

 

2. Relative lymphocytosis (total count may be normal or even below normal)

Very

 

 

(i) Viral infections

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Influenza

 

 

 

 

(b) Measles

Tough

 

 

(ii) Typhoid

 

N

 

 

(iii) Neutrophilic leucopenia

Hard

 

 

(iv) High altitude

 

 

C.  Eosinophilia  

Pain

 

1.  Parasitic infestations

 

An

 

(i) Ascariasis

 

Ace

 

(ii) Ankylostomiasis

 

Has

 

(iii) Hydatid cyst

 

Failed

 

(iv) Filariasis

And

 

2. Allergic conditions

 

Boy

 

(i) Bronchial asthma

 

Has

 

(ii) Hay fever

 

Delivered

 

(iii) Drug allergy

 

Some

 

(iv) Serum sickness

 

Antique

 

(v) Angioneurotic oedema

 

Mats

 

(vi) Milk allergy

Suffering

 

3. Skin diseases

 

Unarm

 

(i) Urticaria

 

Every

 

(ii) Eczema

 

Person

 

(iii) Pemphigus

 

Entering

 

(iv) Exfoliative dermatitis

 

Polo

 

(v) Psoriasis

 

Dress

 

(vi) Dermatitis herpetiformis

 

Store

 

(vii) Scabes.

Develop

 

4. Drugs

 

Little

 

(i) Liver extract

 

Pups

 

(ii) Penicillin

 

Can

 

(iii) Chlorpromazine

 

Pounce

 

(iv) Pilocarpine

A

 

5. Acute infections

 

Seniors

 

(i) Scarlet fever

 

Can

 

(ii) Chorea

 

Enter

 

(iii) Erythema multiforme

Bit

 

6. Blood dyscrasias and malignant lymphomas

 

Charming

 

(i) Chronic myeloid leukaemia

 

People

 

(ii) Polycythaemia

 

Have

 

(iii) Hodgkin's disease

 

Met

 

(iv) Multiple myeloma

In

 

7. Idiopathic familial eosinophilia

Every

 

8.  Eosinophilic granulomatosis

Patient

 

9.  Post-splenectomy

 

 

D.  Monocytosis

Blood

 

1.  Bacterial infections

 

Try

 

(i) Tuberculosis

 

Some

 

(ii) Subacute bacterial endocarditis

 

Tricks

 

(iii) Typhoid

Pressure

 

2.  Protozoal infections

 

My

 

(i) Malaria

 

Karate

 

(ii) Kala-azar

 

Trainer

 

(iii) Trypanosomiasis

Really

 

3.  Rocky-mountain spotted fever

Inflicts

 

4.  Infectious mononucleosis

Health

 

5.  Hodgkin's disease

 

E. Basophilia

 

Charming

1. Chronic myeloid leukaemia

Male

2. Myelosclerosis

Poet

3. Polycythaemia vera

Invited

4.  Irradiation

NEUTROPENIA (AGRANULOCYTOSIS)

An abnormally low white cell count is termed leucopenia. Any type of white cells may be reduced. An uncommon variety in which lympho­cytes are reduced is termed lymphopenia, generally associated with Hodgkin's disease, non-lymphocytic leukaemias, corticosteroid therapy, and occasionally with chronic diseases.

The commonest variety of leukopenia is neutro­penia in which neutrophils (polymorphs) are reduced in the circulating blood. Neutropenia of higher grades which has serious consequences by predisposing to infections is termed agranulocytosis.

Causes

 

1. Inadequate formation

Alarm

A

(i) Aplastic anaemia

In

I

(ii)  Idiopathic periodic or cyclic neutropenia

Natives

N

(iii)  Nonmyelocytic leukaemia or lymphoma involving bone marrow

 

2. Increased destruction or removal

 

Doctor

 

(i)  Drugs

 

 

 

Aminopyrine

 

 

 

Chlorampheni­col

 

 

 

Sulphonamides

 

 

 

Chlorpromazine

Has

 

(ii)  Hypersplenism (Felty's syndrome)

Injected

 

(iii)  Idiopathic (probably auto-immune)

 Pathology

1. Bone marrow initially hyperplastic but in 2-3 days becomes progressively hypocellular, may be completely devoid of myeloid elements although erythroblasts and megakaryocytes are almost normal.

2. Ulcerating necrotizing lesions of the gingiva, floor of the mouth, buccal mucosa, pharynx or any­where in the oral cavity (agranulocytic angina); the ulcers are typically deep, undermined and covered by gray to green black necrotic membranes from which number of bacteria or fungi can be isolated. Severe necrotizing infection may also be present in the lungs, urinary tract, and kidneys.
3. The regional lymph nodes, and rarely spleen and liver are enlarged, spleen often. contains small anaemic infarcts.

Blood Picture

 


1. Haemoglobin and erythrocyte count low; thus colour index may he normal but is generally low.
2. Platelet count sometimes very low with purpura.

3. Leucocyte count low; polymorphs may be entirely absent; total count generally less than 1,000/cu mm., absolute lymphocyte count and absolute monocyte counts also reduced though percentage may be high. An increased absolute monocyte, count indicates favourable prognosis.

LEUKAEMIA

Leukaemias are a group of myeloproliferative dis­eases characterized by a remarkable increase in the blood leucocyte count which does not corres­pond with that of a reactive leucocytosis.

Classification

 

1. Acute leukaemias

 

Live

 

(i) Lymphoblastic leukaemia

Multi

 

(ii) Myeloblastic leukaemia

Media

 

(iii) Monoblastic leukaemia

Service

 

(iv) Stem-cell leukaemia

 

2. Chronic leukaemias

 

Live

 

(i) Lymphatic leukaemia

Multi

 

(ii) Myeloid leukaemia

Media

 

(iii) Monocytic leukaemia

 

3. Miscellaneous

 

Every

 

(i) Erythroleukaemia

Engineer

 

(ii) Eosinophilic leukaemia

Meets

 

(iii) Megakaryocytic leukaemia

Pay

 

(iv) Plasma cell leukaemia

Challenges

 

(v) Chloroma

Chronic Myeloid Leukaemia

Blood Picture
1 . TLC. Average 2,00,000/cu. mm
2.  DLC. Polymorphs, 60-70%
Myelocytes and metamyelocytes, 20-50%
Blast cells, 1-5%
Basophils raised
Lymphocytes lowered.

3. Platelets. Unchanged initially; increased later
4.  Red blood cells. Total count low, Haemoglobin 8-10 G%.

Bone Marrow
1.  Erythroblastic tissue largely replaced by leukoblastic elements.
2.  All varieties of leucocytes and myelocytes present.
3.  Megakaryocytes increased.



Chronic Lymphoid Leukaemia

Blood Picture
1. TLC. 50,000-100,000/cu. mm
2. DLC Lymphocytes more than 95%
3. Platelets. Much diminished
4.  Red blood cells. Total count low
Anaemia more marked than in chronic myeloid type
Normoblasts few
Megaloblasts frequent.

 

Bone Marrow
1. Hyperplasia of bone marrow
2. Sternum tender on percussion

Acute Myeloblastic Leukaemia

Blood Picture
1.  TLC. 20,000-25,000/cu. mm.
2.  DLC. Myeloblasts about 90%
3.  Platelets. Reduced; bleeding time increased  and coagulation time delayed
4. Red blood cells. Total count low Reticulocytes, polychromatic cells, normoblasts of all types present; Poikiolocytosis and anisocytosis.

 

Bone Marrow
1.  The bone marrow is hypercellular
2.  Mycloblast cells 70-95%
3.  Erythroblastic tissue reduced or absent
4.  Megakaryocytes reduced or absent.

Acute Lymphoblastic Leukaemia

Blood Picture

 



1.  TLC. 10,000-500,000/cu. mm. (average 70,000/cu. mm)
2.  DLC. Lymphocytes (mainly lymphoblasts) about 99%
3.  Platelets. Reduced or absent
4. Red blood cells. Total count low; anisocytosis, poikilocytosis, reticulocytes, polychromatic cells, nucleated cells present.

Acute Monocytic Leukaemia

Blood Picture
1. TLC. Initially 15,000-45,000/cu. mm.; later upto 400,000/cu. mm.
DLC. Monocytes, 50-90%, mature or primitive; vacuolated monocytes in aleukaemic phases.
3. Anaemia, normochromic or hypochromic.
4. RBC. Count 1-2 millions/cu. mm.

LEUKAEMOID REACTIONS

Leukaemoid blood reactions are the nonleukaemic conditions with peripheral blood picture resemb­ling that of leukaemia. There may be marked ele­vation of total leucocyte count or the presence of immature leucocytes, or both.

The leukaemoid reactions may be either myeloid or lymphatic. Generally only one type of reaction is caused by a particular disorder but some disorders such as tuberculosis, carcinoma may cause either of the two types.

Causes  

 

 

A. Myeloid leukaemoid reactions

 

I

 

 

1. Infections-Disseminated tuberculosis

Like

 

 

2. Leucoerythroblastic anaemia

 

 

 

 

(i) Secondary carcinoma of bone

 

 

 

 

(ii) Myelosclerosis

 

 

 

 

(iii) Multiple myeloma

 

 

 

 

(iv) Malignant lymphomas

 

 

 

 

(v) Lipoid dystrophies

 

Gorkha

 

 

 

(a) Gaucher's disease

 

Now

 

 

 

(b) Niemann-Pick disease

 

Heading

 

 

 

(c) Hand-Schuller-Christian disease

 

Army

 

 

 

(d) Albers-Schonberg's disease

More

 

 

3. Malignancy

Apples

 

 

4. Acute haemolysis

 

 

B. Lymphatic leukaemoid reactions

 

I

 

 

1. Infectious mononucleosis

Am

 

 

2. Acute infectious lymphocytosis

Planning

 

 

3. Pertussis

To

 

 

4. Tuberculosis

Marry

 

 

5. Malignancy

Leukaemoid Reaction v/s Leukaemia
 
 

Leukaemoid reaction

Leukaemia

1. Total leucocyte count

Increase usually moderate; seldom exceeds 1,00,000/cu. mm

Often exceeds 1,00,000/cu. mm. in chronic leukaemia 

2. Immature cells

Usually in small or moderate number; myelocytes seldom increase 5 - 15% and blasts 1 - 5%

Usually numerous

3. White cell morphology

Toxic changes may be seen in infective cases

Cells often . atypical as well as immature; toxic granules uncommon

4. Haemoglobin

Varies with cause but often normal or slightly lower

Usually low markedly and progressively

5. Nucleated red cells

Frequent in leucoerythroblastic anaemia due to marrow infiltration

Infrequent and seldom in large numbers 

6. Platelets

Normal or increased; reduced in leucoerythroblastic anaemia

Diminished except in chronic myeloid leukaemia

7.  Bone marrow

White cell hyperplasia may be present but seldom to same degree as in leukaemia 

Leukaemic hyperplasia 

8.  Autopsy 

Infiltration of organs and tissues absent

Leukaemic infiltration of organs and tissues.

HAEMORRHAGIC DISORDERS

Classification

 

 

I. Related to increased vascular fragility

 

Indian

 

 

1.  Infections

 

My

 

 

(i) Meningococcemia and other seplicaemias

 

Sitting

 

 

(ii) Severe measles

 

Room

 

 

(iii) Rickettsial disease

Dogs

 

 

2.  Drug reactions

Managed

 

 

3.  Metabolic disorders

 

Save

 

 

(i) Scurvy

 

Every

 

 

(ii) Ehlers-Danlos syndrome

 

Cent

 

 

(iii) Cushing's syndrome

Here

 

 

4.  Henoch-Schonlein purpura

 

 

II.  Related to thrombocytopenia

 

Dame

 

 

A.  Decreased production of platelets

 

 

 

 

1.  Generalised diseases of bone marrow

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Aplasia

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Congenital

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Acquired

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Invasive disease

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Leukaemia

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Carcinoma

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c) Disseminated infection

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Deficiency states

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Folic acid deficiency

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Vit. B1 deficiency

 

 

 

 

2.  Diseases specifically affecting megakaryocytes

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Congenital

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)  Deficiency of a prothrombopoietin like substance

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)  Reduced or absent megakaryocytes

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c) Normal number of megakaryocytes with production of defective platelets

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Acquired

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Infections

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b)  Drugs, e.g., cytotoxic drugs, chloramphenical, thiazides

Is

 

 

B. Increased destruction of platelets

 

 

 

 

1.  Immunologic

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Autoimmune (Idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura)

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Isoimmune

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Neonatal

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Blood transfusion

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Drug associated

 

 

 

 

2.     Infection

 

 

 

 

3.  Drugs, e.g., alcohol, gold

 

 

 

 

4.  Increased utilization-Disseminated intra­vascular coagulation

 

 

 

 

5. Mechanical injury

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Prosthetic heart valves

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Haemolytic-uraemic syndrome

Settling

 

 

C. Sequestration of platelets

 

 

 

 

- Large spleen synd­rome

Down

 

 

D.  Dilution of platelets

 

 

 

 

- Massive transfusion

 

 

III. Derangement of mechanism of coagulation (Deficiencies of clotting factors)

 

 

 

 

A.  Acquired

 

 

 

 

1.  Vitamin K deficiency resulting in depressed  synthesis of factors II, VII, IX, X

 

 

 

 

2.  Severe parenchymal liver disease (liver produces all the factors except VIII)

 

 

 

 

3.  Disseminated intravascular coagulation

 

 

 

B. Hereditory

 

 

 

 

1.  Classical haemophilia (deficiency of factor VIII)

 

 

 

 

2.  Christmas disease (factor IX)

IDIOPATHIC THROMBOCYTOPENIC PURPURA

Etiology. Cause not exactly known; generally believed to be immunologic. Most patients have autoantibodies against platelets and causing platelet destruction as evidenced by the following facts:

1. Infants born to affected mothers are often thrombocytopenic.
2. When plasma of the patient is transfused into a normal person, rapid fall in platelet count results.
3. Normal platelets are rapidly destroyed when transfused into the patient.
4. The disease is often encountered in patients with other autoimmune diseases, e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus and autoimmune thyroiditis.

Pathology

1. Spleen
Gross. May be slightly larger than normal.

Microscopic
(i) Congestion of sinusoids
(ii) Enlargement of splenic follicles
(iii)  Megakaryocytes may be found within the sinuses and sinusoidal walls.

2.  Blood picture
(i) Platelet count low
(ii) Microcytic hypochromic anaemia
(iii)  Bleeding time much prolonged, e.g.,  15-20 minutes
(iv)  Coagulation time normal but the clot formed is soft, friable and retracts poorly.

HAEMOPHILIA

Haemophilia is a hereditary disease affecting males but transmitted by females and characte­rised by prolonged coagulation time and a lifelong tendency to excessive haemorrhage due to a quan­titative deficiency of andhaemophilic globulin.

True haemophilia may occur occasionally in a child with no previous family history because of muta­tion. The disease has also been recorded in one of a pair of identical twins.

Thus it is evident that by union of a carrier female and a normal male, the progency will include a normal male, a carrier female, and a haemophilic male.

Similarly a carrier female may be produced by normal mother and a haernophilic father, the trans­mission being represented in the following chart:
 

The few recorded cases of haemophilic females are the result of union of a haemophilic male and a carrier female, the chances of which are virtually nil.

In haemophilia, there is no significant change in the corpuscular elements of the blood the number of polymorphonuclears is some what diminished.
The coagulation time, when estimated between haemorrhages, is usually lengthened, after a haemorrhage, however, it may approach normal.

The platelets in shed haemophilic blood are much more slow to undergo vicious metamorphosis than those of normal blood. This is due to the absence of the specific antihaemophilic globulin (AHG) known as factor Vill. This antihaemophilic globu­lin normally promotes the disruption of platelets which come in contact with an abnormal surface and thus initiates the process of clotting by the formation of blood thromboplastin. Accordingly failure of coagulation in haemophilia depends on lack of formation of the thromboplastin. The tendency to occurrence of serious effusion and haemorrhages into the joint in haemophilia points to the co-existence of some vascular abnormality.

Christmas disease (Haemophilia B) is due to deficiency of factor IX, plasma thromboplastin component (PTC) in the absence of which thromboplastin formation fails and a haemo­rrhagic disorder clinically identical with haemo­philia results. It shows a similar sex linked inheritance.

 


 


 

Chapter 3 : Inflammation & repair

INFLAMMATION
 

Overview of Inflammation

1. Inflammation may be defined as response of the body tissue to trauma. 
2. Inflammation is not a disease that enters from outside, it is rather a tool developed by the body itself to fight an attack. 
3. The response of the tissue depends upon the nature and magnitude of trauma. 
4. The response may be immediate and brief when trauma is extremely mild. 
5. The inflammation caused subsides before it becomes noticeable (latent inflammation). 
6. To certain types of trauma, the tissue may react sharply by undergoing severe changes. Such form of response is acute inflammation.


7. The tissue changes occurring in acute inflammation may subside partly or completely after trauma is overcome. 

8. Often type of trauma is such that it continues to elicit the response over prolonged period in subsidised form. The resultant inflammation is called the chronic inflammation. 
9. A chronic inflammation may be the aftermath of acute inflammation, in that case exacerbations may render the inflammation acute periodically. 
10. Alternatively chronic inflammation may originate as an independent entity without being preceded by acute form. 
11. Acute inflammation is mainly a cellular phenomenon whereas the predominant feature of chronic inflammation is the overgrowth of interstitial connective tissue.

 

Causes of Inflammation 
 

 

 

Inanimate

Many

 

Mechanical

 

Flirts

Foreign body

 

In

Injury

 

Night

Necrosed tissue

People

 

Physical

 

Heat

Heat or cold

 

Every

Electric burn

 

Rod

Radiation

Coming

 

Chemical

 

An

Acids

 

Army

Alkalis

 

Officer

Other irritants

 

 

Animate

 

Buy

Bacteria

 

Pure

Parasites

 

 

Protozoa

 

 

Helminths

 

Food

Fungi

Acute Inflammation
 

Varieties of Acute Inflammation

C

1. Catarrhal Inflammation

S

2. Serous Inflammation

C

3. Croupous or Fibrinous Inflammation

H

4. Haemorrhagic Inflammation

P

5. Purulent Inflammation

N

6. Necrotic Inflammation

P

7. Pseudomembranous Inflammation


 

1. Catarrhal Inflammation


(i) Affects mucous membranes, acini and ducts of glands, mainly of upper respiratory tract, large intestine, and urinary tract,
(ii)  Mucus secretion is abundant.
(iii)  Desquamation of surface epithelium.
(iv)  Discharge initially mucoid, later muco purulent.
Example: Bronchitis, gastritis, colitis.

2. Serous Inflammation
(i) Affects mostly serous cavities viz. pleura, peritoneum, pericardium - may occur anywhere.
(ii)  Exudate is fluid and composed mainly of  serum.
Example: Bristles of burnt skin.


 

3. Croupous or Fibrinous Inflammation


(i)  Affects serous membranes, e.g., pleura, pericardium, peritoneum, joints, meninges.
(ii) May occur in epithelial surfaces, e.g., alimentary canal, urinary tract, gallbladder, lungs.
(iii) Exudate more concentrated with excess of plasma protein, mainly fibrinogen.
Examples: Dysentery, lobar pneumonia (early stage).

4. Haemorrhagic Inflammation
(i) Caused by increased fragility of blood vessels and capillaries as in leukaemia, anaemia, various forms of purpuras.
(ii)  Inflammation attended with extra­
vasation of red blood cells.
Examples: "Black" small pox, measles, diphtheria.


 


 

5. Purulent Inflammation


(i)  Digestive softening of the tissues with formation of pus.
(ii)  Pus is semifluid, yellow or greenish yellow material, opaque, creamy and granular.
(iii)  Odour may be offensive if gas forming organisms, e.g., Esch. coli are associated. Example: Abscesses.

6. Necrotic Inflammation
Inflammation accompanied by necrosis, e.g., oriental sore.

7. Pseudomembranous Inflammation
Formation of a false membrane composed of necrosed epithelium and fibrin.Example: Diphtheria, dysentery.
 

Causative Irritants
 

1. Biological

(i) Bacteria

(ii) Viruses

(iii) Rickettsiae

(iv) Parasites a. Helminths b. Protozoa

2. Physical

(i) Trauma

(ii) Heat and cold

(iii) Pressure

(iv) Light

(v) Radiation

3. Chemical

(i) Corrosive acids and alkalies

(ii) Poisons

(iii) Bacterial toxins

4. Foreign bodies

(i) Ligature material

(ii) Carbon particles

(iii) Occupational material

(iv) Dead and necrosed tissues


 

Local Signs in Acute Inflammation


1. Heat and redness. Result form dilatation of microcirculation in the area of injury.
2. Swelling. Largely produced by escape of fluid, plasma proteins, and cells from the blood into the perivascular tissues.
3. Pain. Pirobably induced by prostaglandin bradykinin, or serotonin and increased tissue tension due to oedema.
4. Loss of function


 

Pathology


The three phases of acute inflammation are:
1.  Vascular phenomenon. Changes in the blood vessel callibre and quantity of blood flowing.
2.  Exudative changes. Escape of cellular and fluid constituents of the blood into tissue spaces.
3.  Tissue changes. Cell proliferation leading to regeneration and repair of damaged tissues.


 

Vascular Phenomenon


Vascular phenomena in acute inflammation have three components:
1.  Dilatation of blood vessels
2.  Emigration of leucocytes
3.  Escape of blood plasma.


 

2. Emigration of Leucocytes


(i) The ground substance of the swollen endothelium becomes loosened; the individual elements of the vessel wall lose their sharpness.
(ii) Through such vessel wall, the leucocytes flow out.
(iii) A number of erythrocytes also flow out; when these are numerous the inflammation is said to be haemorrhagic.

3. Escape of Blood Plasma
(i)  Blood plasma accompanies the leucocytes through the damaged vessel wall.
(ii)  This results in swelling of the tissue (inflammatory oedema).
(iii)  The fluid contained in inflammatory oedema is termed inflammatory exudate.


 


 

Mechanism of Vascular Phenomena


1. Nervous impulses
2. Chemotaxis
3. Chemotactic response
4. Leucotaxine
5. Globulins
These five points are described on subsequent screens


 

Mechanism of Vascular Phenomena


1. Nervous impulses. The dilatation of blood vessels and exudation are influenced by nervous impulses. When the nerve to a part is divided, the normal constrictor impulses are cut off and inflammation develops much more rapidly. In such case, the capillaries permit greater emigration of leucocytes and a greater transudation of lymph through their walls.
2. Chemotaxis. Phenomenon of chemotaxis controls the emigration of leucocytes. Chemotaxis may be positive (attracting) or negative (repelling). Some substances such as quinine, alcohol and lactic acid produce negative chemotaxis in higher concentrations. As the substances are diluted, the chemotaxis becomes positive.Exceedingly virulent bacteria do not attract the leucocytes but merely paralyze them.
3. Chemotactic response. The various leucocytes show different degree of response to chemotaxis. Polymorphs are most readily affected. The lymphocytes are much less affected because of smaller amount of mobile cytoplasm.The parasite products specifically attract eosinophils.


 

Fig. 3.1. Vascular Phenomena


 

4. Leucotaxine. A substance in the inflamed tissue which induces increased permeability and diapedesis of leucocytes. It is related to chemotaxis.


5. Globulins. Blood globulin has two fractions. One increases the capillary permeability whilst the other inhibits this process. Increased permeability in vascular phenomenon coincides with presence of a soluble globulin factor in the exudate. This factor has a strong effect on vessel wall and disappears later owing to suppression by a specific protein inhibitor.


 

Tissue Changes


The overall changes in acutely inflammed tissue may be of two types: degenerative or proliferative. If the irritant is intense, the effect is degeneration and destruction. If it is mild it acts as stimulant and the effect is proliferation. At the centre of inflammatory area the action of irritant is severe so that degeneration predominates, at the periphery the action is mild so that the tissue may be stimulated to proliferate. This part of the inflammatory process is known as repair or healing. Two types of tissue changes are described on subsequent screens :-
1. Degeneration
2. Suppuration


 


 

Degeneration


1. The bacterial toxin & poison destroy the tissues of the inflamed part leading to degeneration or death (necrosis). 
2. The two most common degenerations are albuminous degeneration or cloudy swelling and fatty degeneration. 
3. If either of these is carried too far, the affected tissue will become necrosed. 
4. Should thrombosis of vessels occur, necrosis will be hastened. 
5. In addition to bacterial toxins the proteolytic ferments liberated by the broken down leucocytes may play an important part in the destructive processes. 
6. These ferments produce liquefaction of the dead tissue. 
7. This results in the formation of the fluid known, as pus. 
8. The pus formation or suppuration takes place only in pyogenic infection. 


 

9. Large numbers of leucocytes are necessary for the formation of pus.


10. If the exudate consists mainly of lymph or of fibrin sufficient leucocytes are not present to produce liquefaction which is necessary for pus formation. 
11. The serum contains an antibody which tends to inhibit the proteolytic enzyme of the leucocytes, so that in serous inflammation, there is no autolysis. 
12. Instead there is a process of organisation. 
13. New fibroblasts grow into the exudate and remove it in part or whole. 
14. If some of the exudate remains it will be converted into dense fibrous tissue. 
15. If the two serous surfaces are stuck together by the exudate, the invasion of fibroblasts will sew the surface together with permanent adhesions.


 

Suppuration


If the dead tissue in an inflammed area undergoes softening and liquefaction, the process is known as suppuration, and the fluid formed is pus. This is the method by which the dead material is removed from the body. There are three requisites for suppuration:
(i) Necrosis
(ii) Sufficient leucocytes
(iii)  Digestion of dead material by proteolytic ferments

Anything which produces both positive chemotaxis and necrosis will result in suppuration.


 

Inflammatory exudates


Inflammatory exudate is the fluid that passes through the capillary walls as a result of slowing of the blood stream in the inflammatory process. The exudate accumulates in the connective tissue spaces and leads to swelling of the part.


 

Mechanism of Exudate Formation


In inflammation there is not only an increased blood flow but also an increased protein content of the lymph. These are brought about by an increased permeability or porosity of the capillary endothelium, caused by damage. Initially it seems to result from local release of histamine but the persistently increased permeability of later stages is due to some other mechanism. The presence of abundant leucocytes in the tissues may lead to local production of lactic acid by anaerobic glycolysis and this in turn further increases capillary permeability. With the mechanical escape of red corpuscles, plasma also escapes and adds to protein content of the exudate. The extreme result of damage is necrosis of the capillary walls and thrombosis within. The intermediate stages are the phenomen6n of stagnation, exudation and diapedesis of red corpuscles. The exudation is thus, a result of damage to the capillary endothelium.


 

Types of Inflammatory Exudate


1. Serous exudate
2. Fibrinous exudate. Occurs in
(i) Severe inflammations
(ii) Rheumatic pericarditis
(iii) Pneumococcal pneumonia,
3. Purulent exudate
4. Haemorrhagic exudate
The four types of inflammatory exudate described on next screens.


 

1. Serous exudate. The example is skin blister as a result of burn. There is outpouring of a low-protein fluid which may be derived either from the blood stream or from secretions of mesothelial cells, i.e., the cells lining peritoneal, pleural, pericardial cavities and the joint spaces.


2. Fibrinous exudate. Occurs in
(i) Severe inflammations
(ii) Rheumatic pericarditis
(iii) Pneumococcal pneumonia,
There is outpouring of large amounts of plasma proteins including fibrinogen and precipitation of masses of fibrin. The exudate generally gets resorb­ed by fibrinolysis (resolution of exudate), however, occasionally there may be ingrowth of fibroblasts and capillary buds. This phenomenon, known as organisation of exudate may hamper the function of heart or lung.


 

3. Purulent exudate. The common example is acute appendicitis. There is production of large amounts of pus. The causative organisms common­ly are staphylococci, pneumococci, meningococci, gonococci coliforms and certain nonhaemolytic streptococci.


4. Haemorrhagic exudate. There is always a basic fibrinous or suppurative exudate accompanied by extravasation of a large number of red blood cells. Extravasation may result from rupture of blood vessel or diapedesis.


 

Formation of Inflammatory Exudate


I. Increased permeability or porosity of the capillary endo-thelium caused by damage results in increased flow as well as increased protein content of the lymph.
2. Initial increase in permeability results from local release of histamine.
3. The presence of abundant leucocytes in the tissues may lead to local production of lactic acid by anaerobic glycolysis and this in turn further increases capillary permeability.
4. With the mechanical escape of red corpuscles, plasma also escapes and adds to protein content of exudate. 
5. The extreme result of damage is necrosis of capillary walls and thrombosis within, the intermediate stages are the phenomenon of stagnation, exudation and diapedesis of red corpuscles.
The exudation is thus a result of damage to the capillary endothelium.

.
 

Role of Inflammatory Exudate


1. The exudate dilutes the irritant, and if this is of purely chemical nature, the result will be favour­able. 
2. It the irritant is of bacterial origin, not only the bacteria but also the leucocytes which deal with them, will be diluted. 
3. Nevertheless, the lowering of concentration of bacterial toxins thus achieved may be highly beneficial by lessening the harmful effects of such toxin on the leueocytes, e.g., leucocidin produced by some strains of staphylococcus. 
4. The exudate, when first formed, may be regarded as possessing the various properties of the blood plasma. 
5. In some instances, it has a direct bactericidal effect but such bacterial species are only limited in number. 
6. The exudate may have an inhibitory effect on the growth of the bacteria. 
7. It has another very important effect in making them susceptible to phagocytosis by the leucocytes.


 

Cellular elements of Exudate


The cells of the exudate are derived partly from the blood and partly from the tissues. The cells parti­cipating are mainly polymorphs, eosinophils, mast cells, plasma cells and lymphocytes. Besides these the wandering cells of the tissues also take part in the exudate formation.
A. Neutropbils.
B. Eosinophils
C. Basophils and mast cells.
D. Monocytes and macrophages.
E. Lymphocytes and plasma cells.
F. Giant cells


 

Cellular Elements of Inflammatory Exudate

  1. Neutrophils


2. Eosinophils
3. Mast cells
4. Lymphocytes
5. Plasma cells
6. Macrophages
7. Giant cells
(i) Tumour giant cells
(ii) Foreign body giant cells 
(iii) Miscellaneous

Fig 3-2 Cellular elements of inflammatory exudate


 

A. Neutrophils


1. These cells are active agents in acute inflammation particularly when the causative organisms are pyogenic bacteria and are the chief constituent of pus. 
2. In section of inflamed tissue, the vessels may be packed with polymorphs. 
3. The cells collect in great numbers around the dilated vessels and they pass through the tissue spaces by their amoeboid movement. 
4. They are actively phagocytic and have a remarkable power of amoeboid movement but they cannot swim through a fluid. 
5. They form the first line of defence of the body against the pyogenic bacteria. 
6. Having devoured the bacteria, they digest them by means of an enzyme which dissolves the bacterial bodies. 


 

7. Large number of leucocytes are killed by the bacterial toxins. 


8. On disintegration they release a proteolytic enzyme which dissolves the dead tissue and thus hastens the process of recovery. 9. In the fresh exudate, the cell outline is sharp and the nucleus distinct. 
10. As degeneration proceeds, the cytoplasm becomes granular, the outline indistinct and the nucleus eventually disappears. 
11. Many of the leucocytes which survive, reenter the circulation.


 

B. Eosinophils


1. The eosinophils appear early in the inflammatory exudate and may disappear entirely from the blood. 
2. A marked eosinophilia is characteristic of many parasitic infections. 
3. In bron­chial asthma, the mucosa of the bronchi is often crowded with eosinophils. 
4. In both these instances, the eosinophilia may be a reaction against a foreign protein. 
5. A marked eosinophilia is sometimes seen in appendicitis in subacute or chronic stages. 
6. Eosinophils are frequently present in the lesions in lymph nodes in Hodgkin's disease.
7. Eosinophilia, both in the tissues and the blood is a constant accompaniment of the allergic reactions. 
8. The antibodies rather than the antigen may be responsible for eosinophilia which rises in convalescence with the rise in antibody titre. 
9. Eosinophils on breaking down release histamine, with resulting increase of capillary permeability and outpouring of more antibodies and neutralisation of the antigen.


 

C. Mast cells


1. These are the cells with coarse basophilic granules in the cytoplasm and an indented or polymorphonuclear nucleus. 
2. In inflammatory lesions, mast cells are of tissue and not of haematogenous origin. 
3. The mast cells release heparin, histamine and serotonin. In acute inflammation, mast cells lose their granules and become unrecognisable. 
4. Indeed the primary response to injury is thought to be an immediate and sudden degranulation of mast cells with resulting changes in the vascular endothelium. 
5. The mast cells play some role in reparative mechanisms. 6. Whether their function is one of detoxifying the irritant or of a phagocytic nature has not been established.


 

Basophils and Mast Cells


1. Basophils are of haematogenous and mast cells of tissue origin.
2. The two types of cells have similar function in hypersensitivity reactions mediated by immunoglobulin lgE.
3. They release heparin, histamine. and serotonin, in response to antigen-antibody complexes, drugs and trauma.4. Immunoglobulin IgE binds selectively to the surface of these cells.
5. Degranulation of basophils and mast cells, triggered by : interaction of immunoglobulin (antibody) with specific; antigen, results in release of histamine and other mediators.


 

Monocytes and Macrophages


1. Monocytes and macrophages belong to mononuclear phagocyte system (MPS). also called reticuloendothelial system (RES).
2. These are found in the bone marrow, peripheral blood, and tissues with function of intracellular digestion. In connective tissue these are termed histiocytes.
3. Macrophages involved in inflammation are derived from monocytes and have the following properties :
    (i) Phagocytosis and digestion of invading organisms or foreign particles.
    (ii) Release of potent enzymes which degrade connective tissue.
    (iii) Release of chemotactic and permeability factors which may prolong inflammation.
    (iv) Release of substances causing leucocytosis and fever (viz prostaglandins, endogenous pyrogen).
    (v) Release of factors which aid in healing.
    (vi) Secretion of antibacterial, antiviral substances and such other proteins.


 

Lymphocytes and Plasma Cells


I. Appear late during the chronic phase of inflammation and are particularly prominent in tuberculosis, syphilis, other granulomous diseases, viral and rickettsial infections.
2. Plasma cells develop from lymphocytes by synthesizing an increased amount of RNA and gamma-globulin in their cytoplasm.
3. Lymphocytes and plasma cells are a prominent source of globulin antibodies.


 

Giant Cells


When the individual macrophages are unable to deal with particles to be removed, they fuse together and form multinucleated giant cells. The giant cells are of three types :
    (i) Tumour giant cells.
    (ii) Foreign body giant cells.
    (iii) Miscellaneous.


 

Tumour giant cells are seen in:


        (a) Osteogenic sarcoma,
        (b) Glioblastoma multiforme,
        (c) Rhabdomyosarcoma and
        (d) Primary carcinoma of liver.

They are large cells and have one or several nuclei but these are never numerous. Their nuclei are always hyperchromatic and may vary considerably in size and shape. The tumour giant cells are formed by division of the nucleus while cytoplasm of the cell fails to divide. These giant cells are not derived from the macrophages but from tumour cells, whether connective tissue or epithelial in nature. Tumour giant cells are found in neoplasms only and are absent in inflammation.

The foreign body giant cell is larger than an ordinary cell and may be of enormous size. It contains numerous nuclei, sometimes as many as 50-100. The nuclei, are regular in size, seldom large and are scattered through the cytoplasm. However, in certain conditions e.g. tuberculosis the nuclei may be arranged around the periphery (Langerhan's giant cells). Foreign body giant cells are seen in;
        (a) Tuberculosis,
        (b) Syphilis,
        (c) Leprosy and
        (d) Actinomycosis, etc.
 

The third group 'miscellaneous' include the giant cells of mesodermal origin e.g. Aschoff cells of rheumatic nodule. Another member is the Reed-Strenberg cell of Hodgkin's disease.

 

Mediators of Inflammation


Mediators or permeability factors or endogenous mediators of increased vascular permeability are a large  number of endogenous compounds which canenhance vascular permeability. Many chemical mediators have been identified which partake inother processes of acute inflammation as well e.g.
vasodilatation, chemotaxis, fever,  pain and cause tissuedamage.
The substances acting as chemical mediators ofinflammation may be released from the cells, the plasma, ordamaged tissue itself. They are broadly classified into 2 groups:
i) mediators released by cells; and
ii) mediators originating from plasma.

Chemical mediators of acute inflammation
 

I. Cell-derived mediators

1. Vasoactive amines

2. Arachidonic acid metabolites (Eicosanoids)

3. Lysosomal components 

4. Platelet activating factor

5. Cytokines 

6. Free radicals

II. Plasma-derived mediators (Plasma proteases) Products of:-

1. Kinin system

2. Clotting system

3. Fibrinolytic system

4. Complement system

The above mediators subclassified on next screens 
I. Cell-derived mediators
 

1. Vasoactive amines

Histamine

5-hydroxytryptamine

Neuropeptides

2. Arachidonic acid metabolites (Eicosanoids)

i. Metabolites via cyclo-oxygenase pathway

Prostaglandins

Thromboxane A2

Prostacyclin

Resolvins

ii. Metabolites via lipo-oxygenase pathway

5-HETE

leukotrienes

lipoxins


 
 
 

3. Lysosomal components 

from PMNs

from macrophages

4. Platelet activating factor

5. Cytokines 

6. Free radicals

Oxygen metabolites

Nitric oxide


 

II. Plasma-derived mediators (Plasma proteases) Products of :-

1. Kinin system

2. Clotting system

3. Fibrinolytic system

4. Complement system


 


 

Sources and Contribution of Chemical mediators


A. Cell derived
1. Mast cells, basophils, platelets
   Histamine->Permeability
2. Platelets
   Serotonin->Permeability
3. Inflammatory cells
   Prostaglandins->Vasodilataion
   Leukotrienes->Permeability
   Lysosomal enzyme->Tissue damage
   Platelet activating factor->Permeability
   Cytokines->Fever
   Nitric oxide and oxygen metabolites->Tissue damage
B. Plasma derived - ON NEXT SCREEN


 

B. Plasma derived


1. Clotting and fibrinolytic system
     Fibrin split products->Permeability
2. Kinin system 
     Kinin/Bradykinin->Permeability
3. Complement system
     Anaphylatoxins->Permeability

RESOLUTION

Resolution is the process of retrogression of the various phenomena occurring in inflammation. There is a tendency to restoration of normal blood flow and absorption of exudate. 

As the irritant is removed from the tissue or other­wise its effect countered, the stagnation passes off and the blood flow is restored though a certain amount of vascular dilatation often persists for some time. The exudate if fluid, is absorbed chiefly by lymphatics and fibrin is digested by leucocytes and thereafter absorbed. If however, the fibrin is abundant or dense, its absorption is effected only after the ingrowth of fibroblasts and capillaries, i.e., by a process of organization. This is the common result in the case of a fibrinous exudate on a serous membrane. Connective tissue cells which have become swollen and separated in an inflam­med part diminish in size and become attached again to fibres or form new fibres. The defects in endothelial lining may be completely restored by surviving cells. Healthy leucocytes may pass back through the endothelium of the vemiles to the blood stream; but those that are damaged and also the extravasated red cells are either taken up by phagocytes or are carried by the lymph to the lymph nodes, where they are similarly dealt with. The phagocytes are macrophages developing from both the monocytes and cells of local origin (histo­cytes). Within a macrophage, sometimes several polymorphonuclear leucocytes are seen. The phagocytosed leucocytes are gradually digested and disappear. Damaged red corpuscles are also taken up by these phagocytes and destroyed. 

 

Fig. 3.3. Resolution of Inflammation


As a sequel to this process of phagocytosis by the non-granular cells, there is marked diminution of the inflammatory cells, ultimately those left are almost exclusively of non-granular type. The cells then become smaller, the lymphocytes become relatively increased in number and there is gradual return to the normal condition. Thus the polymorphonuclear leucocytes (microphages) which take part in destruction of organisms in the phenomenon of inflammation are in turn taken up and digested by the non-granular cells (macrophages). 
The most striking example is met with in acute lobar pneumonia where all the phenomena des­cribed above are well observed. After destruction of the organisms, a gradual softening and digestion of fibrin in the air vesicles follows and in this the leucocytes are chiefly concerned. The degenerated leucocytes and red cells are taken up by nongranu­lar phagocytes or are carried b, lymphatics to the bronchial nodes, where they undergo intracellular digestion. With the absorption of the fluid content of the air vesicles, these again become air con­taining and part returns practically to normal. Some of the liquefied exudate is expectorated but the amount may not be large and in every case major part of the exudate is absorbed. 

Cell Cycle

 

Cell cycle 


1. The cell cycle, or cell-division cycle, is the series of events that take place in a cell leading to its division and duplication (replication) that produces two daughter cells. 
2. Cell cycle is the period between two successive cell divisions. 
3. Cell cycle occurs only in eukaryote cells (with a nucleus). Prokaryote cells (without nucleus) divide by binary fission. 
4. The cell-division cycle is a vital process by which a single-celled fertilized egg develops into a mature organism
5. It also covers process by which hair, skin, blood cells, and some internal organs are renewed. 


 

Cell cycle has 4 phases allocated to 3 states :- 


States
a. Interphase, during which the cell grows, accumulating nutrients needed for mitosis preparing it for cell division and duplicating its DNA 
b. Mitotic (M) phase, during which the cell splits itself into two distinct cells, often called "daughter cells". 
c. Cytokinesis, where the new cell is completely divided. 

Phases
 

Synthesis  S - Synthesis phase
DNA synthesis replicates the genetic material. 
Each chromosome now consists of two sister chromatids.

Gap 2  G2
Metabolic changes assemble the cytoplasmic materials necessary for mitosis and cytokinesis.

Mitosis  M - Phase of mitosis
A nuclear division (mitosis) followed by a cell division (cytokinesis)

Gap 1  G1
The daughter cell enters G1 phase after mitosis. 
Cells increase in size in Gap 1. 
Metabolic changes prepare the cell for DNA synthesis and division.


 

Gap 0  G0 -  Resting phase


Gap0 or G0 is the term used  where the cell has left the cycle and has stopped dividing. Resting phase is not a part of the cell cycle. In some books, wrongly stated as phase between Mitosis and Gap 1.


 

Body cells divide at varying pace. 


Cell division may be as quick as every single hour. 
Some mature cells may not divide at all. Duration of G1 phase.determines the frequency of division.


 

Mitosis


1. Mitosis is a form of eukaryotic cell division that produces two daughter cells with the same genetic component as the parent cell. 2. Chromosomes replicated during the S phase are divided in such a way as to ensure that each daughter cell receives a copy of every chromosome. 
3. In actively dividing animal cells, the whole process takes about one hour.
4. The replicated chromosomes are attached to a 'mitotic apparatus' that aligns them and then separates the sister chromatids to produce an even partitioning of the genetic material. 


 

5. This separation of the genetic material in a mitotic nuclear division (karyokinesis) is followed by a separation of cell cytoplasm in a cellular division (cytokinesis) to produce two daughter cells.


6. In some unicellular organisms, mitosis forms the basis of asexual reproduction.
7. In diploid multicellular organisms, sexual reproduction involves the fusion of two haploid gametes to produce a diploid zygote.
8. Mitotic divisions of the zygote and daughter cells are then responsible for the subsequent growth and development of the organism.
9. In the adult organism, mitosis plays a role in cell replacement, wound healing, and tumour formation.


 

a. Prophase


1. Prophase occupies over half of mitosis. 
2. The nuclear membrane breaks down to form a number of small vesicles and the nucleolus disintegrates. 
3. A structure known as the centrosome duplicates itself to form two daughter centrosomes that migrate to opposite ends of the cell. 
4. The centrosomes organise the production of microtubules that form the spindle fibres that constitute the mitotic spindle. 
5. The chromosomes condense into compact structures. 
6.Each replicated chromosome can now be seen to consist of two identical chromatids (or sister chromatids) held together by a structure known as the centromere.



 

b. Prometaphase


1. The chromosomes, led by their centromeres, migrate to the equatorial plane in the mid-line of the cell - at right-angles to the axis formed by the centrosomes. 
2. This region of the mitotic spindle is known as the metaphase plate. 
3. The spindle fibres bind to a structure associated with the centromere of each chromosome called a kinetochore. 
4. Individual spindle fibres bind to a kinetochore structure on each side of the centromere. 
5. The chromosomes continue to condense.



 

c. Metaphase


The chromosomes align themselves along the metaphase plate of the spindle apparatus.


 

d. Anaphase


1. The shortest stage of mitosis. 
2. The centromeres divide, and the sister chromatids of each chromosome are pulled apart - or 'disjoin' - and move to the opposite ends of the cell, pulled by spindle fibres attached to the kinetochore regions. 
3. The separated sister chromatids are now referred to as daughter chromosomes. 
4. It is the alignment and separation in metaphase and anaphase that is important in ensuring that each daughter cell receives a copy of every chromosome.



 

e. Telophase


1. The final stage of mitosis, and a reversal of many of the processes observed during prophase. 
2. The nuclear membrane reforms around the chromosomes grouped at either pole of the cell, the chromosomes uncoil and become diffuse, and the spindle fibres disappear.


 

Cytokinesis


1. The final cellular division to form two new cells. 
2. There is a constriction of the cytoplasm. 
3. The cell then enters interphase - the interval between mitotic divisions.


 

Meiosis


1. Meiosis is the form of eukaryotic cell division that produces haploid sex cells or gametes (which contain a single copy of each chromosome) from diploid cells (which contain two copies of each chromosome). 
2. The process takes the form of one DNA replication followed by two successive nuclear and cellular divisions (Meiosis I and Meiosis II). 
3. As in mitosis, meiosis is preceded by a process of DNA replication that converts each chromosome into two sister chromatids.


 

Prometaphase I


Spindle apparatus formed, and chromosomes attached to spindle fibres by kinetochores.

Metaphase I
1. Homologous pairs of chromosomes (bivalents) arranged as a double row along the metaphase plate. 
2. The arrangement of the paired chromosomes with respect to the poles of the spindle apparatus is random along the metaphase plate. 

Anaphase I
The homologous chromosomes in each bivalent are separated and move to the opposite poles of the cell

Telophase I
The chromosomes become diffuse and the nuclear membrane reforms.




 

Cytokinesis


1. The final cellular division to form two new cells, followed by Meiosis II. 
2. Meiosis I is a reduction division: the original diploid cell had two copies of each chromosome; the newly formed haploid cells have one copy of each chromosome.


 

Meiosis II


Meiosis II separates each chromosome into two chromatids.
The events of Meiosis II are analogous to those of a mitotic division, although the number of chromosomes involved has been halved.

Meiosis generates genetic diversity through:


a. The exchange of genetic material between homologous chromosomes during Meiosis I
b. The random alignment of maternal and paternal chromosomes in Meiosis I
c. The random alignment of the sister chromatids at Meiosis II

CHRONIC INFLAMMATION

Chronic inflammation is the response of body tissues to the persistent traumatic stimuli. 

 

Causes

 

Infective organisms (i) Mycobacterium tuberculosis (ii) Treponema pallidum. 

Mild poisons in solution - Lead. 

Particulate irritants (i) Silica dust (ii) Vegetable cells (iii) Lime salts (iv) Pigments. 

 

Pathogenesis

 

Chronic inflammation in various organs may occur in three ways: 

1. It may follow an episode of acute inflammation where the inciting stimulus persists in the body. 

2. There may be repeated attacks of acute infla­mmation with healing phase in between as in cholecystitis and pyelonephritis. 

3. Chronic inflammation may develop as a pri­mary entity without a preceding attack of acute inflammation, as in rheumatoid arthritis tuberculosis, chronic bronchitis. 

Pathology

The characteristic features of chronic inflammation are: 
1.  Infiltration of mononuclear cells 
2.  Proliferation of fibroblasts 
3.  Proliferation of blood vessels. 

Emigration of mononuclear cells is an important component of chronic inflammation. The monocyte, on reaching the extracellular tissue, gets changed into a much larger cell, the macrophage. Macrophages accumulate in large numbers in three ways. 
1.  Continuous inflow of monocytes from circulation maintained by chemotactic factors. 
2.  Local proliferation of macrophages by mitotic division. 
3.  Prolonged survival and immobilization of macrophages within the site of inflammation. 
The other cells encountered in chronic infla­mmation are plasma cells, lymphocytes, and occasionally eosinophils and polymorphonuclear leucocytes. When the irritant is of particulate nature or a substance difficult for absorption, foreign body giant cells are often a predominant feature. When degenerative changes are going on the neighbourhood, the macrophages may contain droplets of fat and other lipid material. Cells filled with globules of myelin fat (foamy cells) are common being especially abundant in the granulo­matous lesions of actinomycosis. 
Another characteristic of chronic inflammation is the overgrowth of interstitial connective tissue which in earlier stages may be comparatively cellu­lar, the cells being spindle shaped and connective tissue fibres delicate and scanty, e.g., in congenital syphilitic cirrhosis of the liver. The vascularity of the new tissues also varies greatly. There is sometimes a considerable formation of new blood vessels and the interstitial tissue may appear red­dish as is often seen in cirrhosis of liver and kidney. In the later stages or where the process has been of very slow nature throughout, the chief change is a thickening of collagenous fibres whilst cells and vascularity are relatively scanty. 

The various types of chronic inflammatory lesions have some relatively distinguishing features in the structure, however, they are not always specific. The tubercle follicle is characteristic of lesions due to Mycobacterium tuberculosis, but this organism may at times produce a quite different and much more acute exudative lesions in the meninges or pleura. Also the Treponema pallidum commonly induces a diffuse chronic inflammatory response, but at times in older lesions, a markedly folficular character may be seen and an erroneous diagnosis of tuberculosis may then be made. Tubercle folli­cles are also very characteristic of sarcoidosis and are frequently induced in the tissues by foreign bodies. 

Effects of Chronic Inflammation

1.  Contraction of newly formed tissue leads to narrowing of orifices and tubes, e.g. 
(i)  Stenosis of mitral valve and chronic endocarditis. 
(ii)  Stenosis of small intestine in regional ileitis. 

2. Uneven affection of interstitial tissue results in coarse granularity of the surface, e.g., in chronic pyelonephritis. 

3.  Loss of parenchymal cells of the organ. 

4. Replacement of specialised connective tissue by more resistant connective tissue cells, e.g., in liver cirrhosis. 

ABSCESS

An abscess is a localised collection of pus caused by suppuration burried in a tissue, organ, or confined space. 

Formation of Abscess

Abscesses are usually produced by the deep seed­ing of pyogenic bacteria into a tissue. Two chief changes occur inside the tissues viz. 
1.  A progressive emigration of polymorphs which come to pack the tissue. 

2.  Gradual destruction and disappearance of the tissue elements. 
The special cells of the part become necrosed, break down into granular material and melt away, while the supporting connective tissue fibrils, capillaries, etc, are digested and disappear. The accumulation of leucocytes still goes on and the tissue gradually becomes replaced by pus, in which remains of the dead tissue are present. There is thus, an actual destruction of tissue and a return to normal is no longer possible. 

The progressive emigration of leucocytes is due to a continued supply of chemotactic substances from the bacteria. Although the pyococci are most fre­quently concerned, suppuration may be produced by a great variety of organisms, the essential point being that they should be able to persist in the tissues and produce their effects. Digestion and liquefaction of the tissue is chiefly due to proteo­lytic enzymes produce by leucocytes. Certain pyo­genic organisms have a digestive action of proteins but others e.g. steptococci and pneumococci have no such property. Digestive softening of the tissue by leucocytes follows damage or actual necrosis due to bacterial toxin, as there is no evidence that leucocytes, however numerous, will attack normal tissues. Digestivc action by the leucocytes is seen also when suppuration is preceded by much exu­dation of fibrin, e.g., in pleurisy. The fibrin is to a large extent digested and disappears and this is closely analogous to the action of leucocytes in removing fibrin in the process of resolution of inflammation as seen in pneumonia. In dense tissues, complete suppurative softening may fail owing to the density of the tissue. A portion of dead tissue or slough then forms and may persist for considerable time. 

 

Fig. 3.4. Liver abscess

Subsequent Fate

When suppuration ceases to spread, at the peri­phery of an abscess, a reactive proliferation of the connective tissue cells with new formation of blood vessels forms a zone of granulation tissue around it. The outer part of it becomes denser and a definite wall to the abscess is formed (pyogenic memb­rane). If the abscess is of small size, the pus may be absorbed and a smaller scar results. The pus may, however, be too abundant for this to occur. Then it becomes thickened and changed into granular debris. In this debris lime salts may be deposited. When an abscess forms near a free surface as in subcutaneous tissue, the tension of the contents causes the suppuration to extend in the direction of surface so that the overlying skin is involved. The abscess is then said to "point". It may ultimately discharge its contents spontaneously. 

HEALING AND REPAIR

Healing

Factors Affecting Wound Healing 

A.  General factors 

1. Age. Healing is quickest in children. As the age advances, the process is impaired due to comparatively less blood supply. 

2. Nutrition. The nutritional state of the patient, particularly the protein intake is of utmost importance. Serious protein deficiency with hypoproteinaemia and oedema predisposes to prolonged and complicated wound healing. 

3. Vitaniin C. It is necessary for the formation of intercellular substance and maturation of collagen of connective tissue. 

4. Vitainin K Vitamin K deficiency with hypo­prothrombinaemia and a bleeding tendency may interfere with normal wound healing by the formation of haematomas and scrum collection. These in turn predispose to wound separation and wound infections. 

5. Vitainins A, D, and B-complex. Their deficiency lowers the rate of phagocytosis and bacterial digestion, thus predisposing to local wound infection. 
6. Fluid and electrolyte balance. It is necessary for optimum wound healing. Dehydration may be associated with delayed wound healing. Wounds also heal poorly in presence of a water-salt overload and oedema. 
B. Local factors: 
1. Bacterial infection, either invasive or uninva­sive, interferes with the healing process. 
2. Devitalised tissue from mechanical or chemi­cal trauma predisposes to bacterial infection thus delaying the process of healing. 

3. Haematomas and serum collections. 

4. Ischaemia. 

5. Foreign bodies. 

6. Desiccation of the tissues. 

7. Improper approximation. 

Healing in a Clean Incised Wound

In a simple incised wound such as is made in asep­tic surgery, the process of healing is simple and rapid. Such a wound is said to heal by primary union. When bleeding has been arrested and the margins have been fixed in apposition, the adjacent surfaces are glued together with a thin layer of coagulum. There is a slight degree of congestion of the superficial vessels with some liberation of plas­ma which coagulates, but ordinarily this is scanty and only a few leucocytes emigrate from the vessels into the clot. Within a short time the connective tissue cells become swollen and divide by mit ' osis. This cells in the form of fibroblasts, migrate into the thin layer of coagulum, which undergoes absorption by the action of these cells and of leucocytes. 

Capillary bands accompany the fibroblasts, but often little vascularisation is necessary. The fibro­blasts from adjacent sides become intermingled; they arrange themselves At right angles to the line of wound and produce the collagen fibrils which bring about the permanent union. At the same time the epithelial cells grow over the line of incision from the two sides and restore the continuity of epithelial covering. At the end of 5-6 days the pro­cess is practically completed and. only a narrow band of young connective tissue remains to mark the line of incision. 

If the wound surface has been irritated or if the wound has been a large one, serous discharge from the vessels may be considerable. In such a case the emigration of leucocytes continues for a longer time and formation of fibroblasts and new capil­laries is likewise of longer duration and more abundant resulting in a more distinct line of fibrous tissue than in the case of simple aseptic healing. 

Healing in an Infected Wound

Healing process in an infected wound is by granulation tissue and is termed secondary union. It consists of two parts: 
1.  Removal of inflammatory material arid necrotic debris which may be much or little. 

2.  Replacement or reconstruction of the original tissue, as far as possible. 

It involves the invasion and replacement of dying and dead tissue by immature mesenchyme called granulation tissue. The process commences at the base and works to the surface, so that the youngest tissue is always at the surface. Such a surface is highly vascular and bleeds very readily. 
In addition to the fixed cells of the part (fibroblasts and vascular endothelium), wandering cells also form an important element of granulation tissue. In the early stages, these are mainly polymorpho­nuclear leucocytes which migrate from the new capillaries in response to irritation. They serve to keep the surface free from infection. In the later stages and in deeper layers, the wandering cells are mainly macrophages and lymphocytes. Till the leucocytes have overcome the infection, the epithelium begins to cover the surface and true healing is said to have commenced. 

On account of its cellularity a granulating surface has a remarkable power of resisting bacterial infection. It presents so powerful a barrier that septicaemia cannot occur once an intact wall of granulation tissue has been ' formed. The granulation tissue grows in duly from below upwards. In the superficial layers the fibroblasts run at right angle to the surface and therefore parallel to the 
vessels, whereas in deeper parts of the wound where the process is older they are arranged parallel with the surface; eventually all the fibroblasts and the fibres which they produce run in this direction. The direction depends largely upon the pull which is 
exerted on them. 

When the surface is covered by epithelium the pro­cesses of devascularisation begins. The new vessels gradually disappear and the scar which is first red becomes white and bloodless. 

Repair
The term repair refers to the process of restoration to a normal stage after injury. The process of repair may result in regeneration of normal tissue, e.g., in liver and kidney parenchyma, or in filling the gap by connective tissue when the original tissue has no power of regeneration. 

Repair of Fracture

When a bone undergoes a simple fracture, there is necessarily tearing of blood vessels and of soft tissues and a varying amount of haemorrhage occurs between the broken ends. The periosteum is usually torn through and separated from the bone to a varying extent in the neighbourhood of the breach. Bleeding soon ceases and coagulation of the effused blood occurs. Soon there follows reaction on the part of the vessels. There is exu­dation from them which leads to a swelling ofthe tissues at the site. 

The process of repair begins by proliferation of cells and formation of new blood vesseles. The proli­feration takes place in cells of the endosteum and of the deep or cambium layers of the periosteum as well as in cells derived from the bone especially from the Haversion canals. All these cells posses osteogenic function, i.e., are osteoblasts. The new blood vessels accompanied by the cells grow out from the pre-eidsting blood vessels and make their way into the clot which gradually becomes replaced by a cellular and vascular tissue. 

In this newly formed tissue the young bone cells, the steoblasts have branching processes from which delicate fibrils pass in all directions. In the process of bone formation, the young bone cells and the fibrils are seen to become enclosed in a somewhat homogeneous matrix forming trabeculae of osteoid tissue which become osseous (bony) tissue by deposit of lime salts. The newly formed bone has a somewhat spongy character, and it comes to enclose and unites the ends of the fractured bone. It is then known as provisional callus. 

The callus is sometimes artificially divided into an internal callus in the medullary cavity, an inter­mediate callus between the ends of the bone, and an external callus outside. The amount of callus varies very much in different cases and is least abundant in case of simple fractures. While the newly formed tissue is mainly a vascular osteoid and osseous tissue, islets of young cartilage may also develop especially when there has been much movement. Provisional callus is formed rapidly and serves to bring about early union. 

The next stage is one of strengthening the union and adapting the configuration of the bone to the functional requirements. Parts of the callus are penetrated and resorbed by the new blood vessels surrounded by osteoblasts and these cells then lay down bone by lamellar apposition in the form of Haversian systems. This process goes on till a more compact type of bone is produced, which forms the permanent union; this is known as the definitive callus. The external callus is to a great extent absorbed so that if there has been a proper apposition, the configuration of the bone is largely restored. When a bone has been united in a wrong position, the newly formed bone is not only more abundant but is arranged and moulded in a striking way, according to the muscular requirements. 

The repair of the compound fracture proceeds in a similar way but entry of organisms may cause suppuration and may interfere with formation of callus sometimes leading to resorption of callus already formed. When there is exit for pus the healing takes place very much as in a granulating fracture would. There is an advancing line of ordinary granulation tissue behind which granu­lation goes on and ultimately and space occupied by pus maybe obliterated and the process of bone formation may be completed. 

Just as in soft tissues, where long continued, suppu­ration produces much overgrowth of fibrous tissue, so in the case of compound fracture there may be considerable and irregular formation of new bone. When a sequestrum is present, it becomes a nidus for organismal growth, pus forms around it; suppu­ration may in this way, be kept up for an indefinite period of time, the pus being discharged from the sinus which leads down to the dead bone. 

Causes of Delayed Union

Indian

1. Ischaemia

Pharmaceutical

2. Poor reduction

Idustry

3. Improper immobilization

Is

4. Interposition of soft tissue

Developing

5. Destruction of fragments

Lipid

6. Loss of fracture haematoma

Inhibitors

7. Infection

  
 
 

 


 

 

Chapter 4 : Circulatory Disturbances

THROMBOSIS

Very

 

1. Veins

 

 

 

Venous thrombosis

 

Goods

 

 

(a) General circulatory failure

 

In

 

 

(b) Interference with respiration

 

Trucks

 

 

(c) Trauma

 

 

 

(ii)  Thrombophlebitis. It may be septic or  simple.

 

 

 

 

(a) Septic thrombophlebitis

 

 

 

 

(b) Simple thrombophlebitis

Accomodating

 

2. Arteries

 

Can’t

 

(i) Coronary artery

 

Count

 

Cerebral artery

 

Admission

 

(iii) Aorta

 

Fee

 

(iv) Femoral arteries

Head

 

3. Heart

 

Very

 

(i) Valves

 

Lively

 

(ii) Left ventricle

 

Ladies

 

(iii) Left auricle

Constable

 

4. Capillaries

 

 

 

(i) Sickle cell anaemia

 

 

 

(ii) Malaria

Clotting of the blood inside a vessel during life is termed thrombosis. Thrombosis is essentially a platelet deposition. 

Types of Thrombosis

Thrombosis is classified according to its site: 
1. Veins. The veins are the commonest site of thrombosis. The thrombosis in the veins may be divided in two groups: 
(i)  Venous thrombosis. Associated with 
(a) General circulatory failure 
(b) Interference with respiration 
(c) Trauma. 

Common site is the deep veins of calf muscles. 
(ii)  Thrombophlebitis. It may be septic or  simple. 
(a) Septic thrombophlebitis is secondary to infection and inflammation of the vein wall (phlebitis). It occurs in cavernous sinus infections of the face and in pelvic veins in puerperal sepsis. 
(b) Simple thrombophlebitis, associated with inflammatory reaction in the vein wall without any evident bacterial infection. There may be painful swelling of an entire limb developing after delivery. 

2. Arteries. Common in the

(i) Coronary artery

(ii) Cerebral artery

(iii). Aorta

(iv) Femoral arteries. 

3. Heart. Found in 
(i) Valves

(ii) Left ventricle

(iii) Left auricle. 

4. Capillaries. Occurs in

(i) Sickle cell anaemia

(ii) Malaria. 

Causes of Thrombosis

There are three factors described as Virchow's triad. 

1. Slowing of blood stream. More common in veins due to slow blood flow, commonly seen as post­operative complication in patients with an ageing heart muscle. Common in congestive heart failure especially when combined with confinement to bed. Normally platelets flow in central portion of the stream. As the stream becomes slow they flow in the peripheral portion. 

2. Changes in the vessel wall. Injury to the intima may occur in the arteries, the veins or the heart. In the arteries, the smooth intima may be roughened by atheroma which also narrows the lumen and retards the stream. It may become necrotic as a result of malignant hypertension, periarteritis nodosa and disseminated Jupus erythematosus. 

The veins are liable to injury by trauma, by pressure and by injection. 

In the heart, valves are injured by inflammation so that thrombi are deposited on the surface. 

3. Changes in the blood
(i)  Increased stickiness of platelets 
(ii)  Rapid production of platelets 
 (a) After operation 
 (b) After childbirth 
 (c) After injury. 

(iii)  Increased viscosity of blood in polycythaemia. 

Mechanism of Thrombosis

 

Fig. 4.1 Formation of a thrombus


In the process of thrombosis generally, the first occurrence is deposition of platelets which become agglutinated and fused together. The subsequent structure of thrombus depends mainly upon the rate of blood flow. If this is rapid, as in an artery or 
over a heart valve, the thrombus is formed mainly by progressive deposition of platelets. If it is less rapid as in a vein, the deposition of platelets leads to formation of trabeculae or laminae, which grow out from the vessel wall and to the surface of which leucocytes adhere. Around the platelet masses thromboplastin diffuses and leads to coagulation in the interspaces. Finally when the blood flow is brought to a standstill, a dark red thrombus is formed with relative rapidity and is mainly the result of ordinary coagulation. 

If a vessel wall is merely damaged, thrombosis may not occur, but if at the same time damaged part is projected inwards, the platelets are brought into contact with its surface to which they adhere, heaping themselves up and in this way starting a thrombus. 

Complications of Thrombosis

When a pure thrombosis is completely successful in its function, it is clinically silent. When complicated by clotting it may or may not become clinically manifest. The following effects may be produced depending upon the site of thrombus, the type of vessel involved and the degree of occul­sion: 

1. Oedema of a limb. Occurs when venous thrombosis is complicated by perivenous lymphangitis. 
2. Post-thrombotic ulceration. Occurs in lower extremities due to local venous hypertension following canalization of the deep venous system. 
3. Gangrene of a limb. Caused by thrombosis of a main artery or occlusion by embolism from a thrombus in the heart or aorta. 
4. Gangrene of the bowel. Due to thrombosis of the mesenteric artery or vein or to arterial embolism. 

5.  Infarction of the myocardium, retina, etc. due to arterial thrombosis. 
6. Embolism. 

Ultimate Fate (Sequelae) of Thrombosis

1. Fiblinolysis. Restoration of the vascular channel after thrombotic occlusion may occur by a combination of fibrinolysis and shrinkage of the thrombus. The fibrinolytic mechanism depends Types of Emboli upon the activation of pIasminogen in the plasma A. Depending upon physical state, the emboli may and this may become very active when there has 
been large scale intravascular coagulation. 

2. Organisation. The thrombus becomes per­meated by young connective tissue cells and capillaries, the later growing in form the vasa vasorum and from the intimal endothelium. Its substance becomes gradually absorbed and 2. ultimately replaced by connective tissue. In some instances, the young vessels that grow in from the vascular endothelium covering the thrombus anastomose and then enlarge to form new channels by 3. which the thrombus is said to be canalised. 

3. Infection. Venous thrombi may become infected with pyogenic organisms and may then undergo suppurative softening so that portions are carried away by blood stream and give rise to abscesses in other parts of the body producing pyaemia. 

Thrombosis v/s Coagulation
 

Thrombosis

Coagulation

1

Intravascular

Extravascular

2

Essentially a platelet deposition

Essentially a conversion of fibrinogen into fibrin

3

Thromboplastin not essential

Thromboplastin, an essental factor

4

Occurs in streaming blood

Occurs in stagnant blood

5

Firmly attached to vessel wall

Weakly attached to vessel wall

6

Fibrin threads and cellular components produce laminar lines of Zahn

Homogeneous, nonlaminated

7

Friable

Rubbery

8

Embolism common

Embolism rare

EMBOLISM

Partial or complete obstruction of some part of cardio-vascular system by a foreign body transported by the blood stream is termed embolism. 

Types of emboli

Depending upon physical state, the emboli may be: 
1. Solid: 
(i) Detached thrombus

(ii)              A mass of tumour cells

(iii) Parasites. 

2. Liquid:

(i) Fat globules

(ii) Amniotic fluid. 

3. Gas - Air. 

B. Depending upon the site, the emboli may be: 
1.  Arterial 
2.  Venous 
3.  Lymphatic 
4. Paradoxical. An embolus arising in the vein but obstructing an artery. It occurs in congenital heart disease, e.g., patent foramen ovale and septal defects. 

Mode of Formation
A. Solid emboli 
1. An arterial thrombus may arise from left side of the heart or aorta 
2. A venous thrombus commonly arises from pelvic veins. 
3. Tumour cell embolism may be formed in two ways: 
 (i) The tumour cells may gain entrance in the blood stream and form an embolus in some distant capillaries. 
(ii) There may be growth of a tumour into a large vein and a portion of it may get detached, carried by the blood and im­pacted in a vessel. 

B. Liquid emboli
1. Fat embolism occurs as a result of laceration of a vein surrounded by adipose tissue and its comm­onest cause is fracture of a long bone with laceration of the fatty marrow, laceration of a fatty liver, and Caisson's disease. 

2. Amniotic fluid embolism may occur during or immediately after labour. Fluid may enter through tears or during rupture of membranes through venous sinuses of the uterus. 

C. Air emboli 

Occur in: 

1. Operations on neck 
2. Blood transfusion 
3. Vaginal douching. 

ISCHAEMIA

Ischaemia or local anaemia is the local diminution of blood supply due to obstruction of inflow of arterial blood. 

Causes of Ischaemia

Intra

 

A. Intravascular

 

 

 

 

1. Thrombosis

 

 

 

2. Embolism

Vascular

 

B. Vascular

 

 

Even

 

1. Endarteritis

 

Rogues

 

2. Raynaud's disease

 

Enter

 

3. Ergot poisoning

Clotting

 

C. Extravascular

 

 

 

 

1. Tumours of surrounding structures

 

 

 

2. Ligatures and contractures

 

Effects of Ischaemia

When the process of ischaemia is slow, there is sufficient time for collateral circulation to develop. In that case, the tissue changes are degenerative and atrophic with replacement fibrosis. Brain tissue is softened. If the cessation of blood supply is sudden and complete, the result is infarction, necrosis and gangrene. 

INFARCT

An infarct is an area of coagulation necrosis due to complete and sudden loss of blood supply of an organ. Collateral circulation is usually inadequate. Infarct is termed pale when collateral circulation is minimal (e.g., in kidney, heart and brain). When 
collateral circulation is marked, yet inadequate, the infarct is called red haemorrhagic (e.g., in lung, bowel and spleen). 

Infarct of Heart (Myocardial Infarction)

The area involved includes the anterior part of the interventricular septum, the apex, and the anterior part of the wall of left ventricle. The papillary muscles are most severely affected. When the right coronary artery is occluded, the infarct includes the posterior half of the interventricular septum and posterior part of left ventricle with little involvement of the right ventricle. The right ventricle generally escapes infarction because of the collateral circulation established by the The basian vessels. 

Gross Appearance

The areas are irregular in shape, yellow and often surrounded by a red zone. The larger areas may undergo softening leading to rupture of the heart. If the endocardial surface is involved, a mural thrombus will be formed on the necrotic area; if pericardial surface is involved, there will be patch of pericarditis. Embolism, sometimes fatal, may occur as a result of mural thrombus becoming detached. 

Gradually the infarct becomes replaced by fibrous tissues, so that it is represented by a white patch of scar visible both on the endocardial and on the cut surface with corresponding thinning of the wall of ventricle. If the patient survives for sometime, the weakened area will give way and buldge outward, so that aneurysm of the heart is formed with marked thinning of the wall. This usually involves the inferior wall of left ventricle near the apex. In course of time, this aneurysm may rupture causing sudden death. 

Microscopic Changes

The changes depend upon the. age of infarct. Necrosis is evident after six hours, when the muscle fibres become hyaline and stain deep red with acid dyes. The striations are indistinct and finally lost. The spaces between the fibres are filled with granular debris and the nuclei disappear. Some of the fibres may become swollen and vacuolated before disintegrating. 

In the first week, there is polymorphonuclear in­filtration of the necrosed area at the end of twenty-four hours. By fourth day it becomes marked. Removal of necrosed tissue begins. 

In the second week, this removal is carried out by great number of pigment filled macrophages which replace the polymorphonuclears. New cappillaries and fibroblasts grow into the area of infarct. 

In. the third week, removal of the dead muscle may Infarct of the Spleen be completed in small infarcts, though much delayed in large lesions. The fibroblasts begin to form Causes collagen. 

During 4-6th weeks, collagen formation is marked. By the end of second month the process is comp­lete and the infarct is healed. 

Infarct of Kidney

Causes 
1.  Subacute bacterial endocarditis 
2.  Embolus arising from heart
3.  Thrombus from a branch of atheromatous renal artery. 


 

Fig. 4.2. Kidney infarct

Fig. 4.3. Spleen infarct

.

Gross Appearance

The cortex is irregularly demarcated by pale, slightly depressed area, surrounded by a thin irregular margin of red, hyperaemic zone. The surface of the kidney escapes infarction besause of its blood supply from the vessels extending from capsule. 

The cut surface is pale, wedge-shaped with base of the wedge toward the cortex and apex toward medulla. A rim of uninvolved cortical tissue lies between the renal capsule and infarct area. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Absence of nuclear staining, without any cellular details and blood supply in glomeruli and tubules. 
2. Hyperaemic zone at the margin of infarct. 
3. Normal renal tissue beyond the infarct. 

Infarct of Spleen

Causes
1.  Occlusion of the splenic artery and its branches. 

2.  Emboli arising from the heart. 

Characteristics

1. Red haemorrhagic; old infarcts are, however, always pale as the haemoglobin is gradually removed. 
2. The affected site in old infarcts is depressed due to fibrosis and shows signs of perisplenitis. 

SHOCK

Shock is the clinical manifestation of an inadequate volume of circulating blood accompanied by physiological adjustment of the body to the progressive discrepancy between the capacity of the vascular system and the volume of blood to fill it. 

Causes 

Rosy

 

1. Reduction of blood volume

 

 

 

Whole blood loss - Haemorrhage

 

 

 

Fluid loss

 

Both

 

 

(a) Burns

 

Can

 

 

(b) Crushing injuries to a limb

 

Visit

 

 

(c) Vomiting

 

Daily

 

 

(d) Diarrhoea

In

 

2. Increase in vascular bed

 

Never

 

(i) Neurogenic stimuli

 

 

 

 

(a) Painful stimuli

 

 

 

 

(b) Anxiety states

 

Travelling

 

(ii)  Toxins

 

 

 

 

(a) Toxic metabolic products

 

 

 

 

(b) Bacterial toxins

 

Again

 

(iii)  Anoxia

Rome

 

3. Acute circulatory failure

 

Many

 

(i) Myocardial infarction

 

People

 

(ii) Paroxysmal tachycardia

 

Coming

 

(iii) Cardiac temponade

Pathogenesis

The sequence of events in shock is believed to be: 

Riders

1. Reduction in blood volume

Don’t

2. Decreased venous return

Dare

3. Decreased cardiac output

Ride

4. Reduced arterial pressure

In

5. Ischaemia and anoxia of organs

Rain

6. Reflex vasoconstriction


At first the blood pressure may be sustained (hypertensive reaction) or occasionally even raised, possibly due to diversion of blood flow from the kidneys with subsequent liberation of pressor sub­stances. Later the blood pressure falls, owing to the Causes loss of tone in the capillaries throughout the body, with the result that blood accumulates in them and A. Cardiac: their permeability is increased so that plasma is lost into the tissues and the blood volume is further reduced. A visciOus cycle is thus established. The pressor substances causing initial hypertensive reaction are termed vasoexcitor material (VEM). This material is produced by cortex of the kidney while the kidney loses the power to destroy it. The loss of capillary tone and increased capillary per­meability have been attributed to the effects of anoxaemia leading to liberation of vasodepressor material (VDM) from the fiver and muscles. The vaso-depressor material is believed to be ferritin. The vaso-excitor material and vaso-depressor material are collectively termed humoral vasotropic factors. 

Post-mortem Appearances

The lesions are those of anoxia and increased capillary permeability: 

Little

1. Lungs

 

 

 

(i)  Dark and filled with blood and fluid

 

 

(ii) The capillaries are widely dilated

 

 

(iii) Alveoli show marked oedema

Henry

2. Heart muscles

 

 

-          Fatty degeneration

Lifted

3. Liver

 

 

 

(i) Fatty degeneration commencing in the central zone and extending to the peri­phery

 

 

(ii)  Sinusoids dilated and engorged.

A

4. Adrenals

 

 

 

(i)  Cortex widened and bright yellow in colour

 

 

(ii)  Foci of focal necrosis in the cortex

Kettle

5. Kidneys

 

 

 

(i)  Severe tubular degeneration (shock kid­ney)

 

 

(ii)  Pigment in tubules

 
 
 

CHRONIC VENOUS CONGESTION

Causes

 

A. Cardiac

 

My

 

1. Mitral stenosis

Maid

 

2. Mitral incompetence

Attacked

 

3. Aortic valvular disease

Cat

 

4. Chronic myocardial failure

 

B. Pulmonary

 

 

 

1. Emphysema

 

 

2. Fibrosis

Changes in the Liver

Gross Changes

The liver becomes enlarged and tender. The cut surface shows a mottled appearance of dark brown and light yellow areas (nutmeg liver). 

Microscopic Changes
The sinusoids at the centre of the lobule are dis­tended with blood. The liver cells are degenerated and atrophic probably as a result of anoxia, while at the periphery the cells are normal and merely show fatty degeneration. 
In very chronic cases there may be collapse of the lobules and fibrous thickening of the walls of the central veins with extension of fibrous tissue into surrounding lobules. The condition has been called cardiac cirrhosis or cardiac sclerosis. 

Changes in the Lung

Two forms are recognised, namely, the brown indu­ration, a chronic process and hypostatic congestion, usually a terminal one. 

Brown induration is always associated with hyper­tension in the pulmonary circuit. The lungs are voluminous, brown in colour, tough, and indurated. Microscopically, the lung is filled with blood, the alveolar vessels being widely distended and alveoli containing many red blood cells. There is presence of large number of phagocytic cells filled with yellow pigment. These cells are known as heart failure cells. However, it is a misnomer as the condition is not always associated with cardiac lesion. The pigment is haemosiderin, derived from the red blood cells. 

 

Fig. 4.4. Lung- C. V. C.

In hypostatic congestion, the dependant part of the lung appears to be consolidated. The air in the alveoli is replaced by plasma and red blood cells, but a pneumonic process may be added as a result, of terminal infection. 

 


 

 

Chapter 5 : Nutritional disturbances

DEGENERATIONS

Degeneration may be defined as the passive metabolic derangement of cells to the nonfatal injuries, which leads to different intercellular alterations, resulting in the accumulation of metabolites. 

Causes of Degenerations

A

 

1. Anoxic

 

Heavy

 

(i)  High altitudes

 

Duty

 

(ii) Disturbances of circulation, e.g., heart failure

 

Arms

 

(iii)  Anaemia

Tiny

 

2. Toxic

 

British

 

(i)  Bacterial toxins e.g.streptococcal infections

 

Medical

 

(ii)  Metabolites e.g. urea, ketone bodies 

 

Council

 

(iii)  Chemicals e.g. phosphorus, mercury, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride

Pen

 

3. Physical

 

Her

 

(i) Heat

 

Cute

 

(ii) Cold

 

Romper

 

(iii)  Radiation

Types of Degenerations

Chandresh

1. Cloudy swelling 

Has

2. Hydropic degeneration

Found

3. Fatty change (degeneration and infiltration)

A

4. Amyloid degeneration

Lovely

5. Lipoidal degeneration

Green

6. Glycogen infiltration

Motor

7. Mucoid infiltration

Horn

8. Hyaline degeneration

Cloudy Swelling

It is the commonest type of degeneration caused by: 

A

1. Acute fevers

Bachelor

2. Bacterial infections

Can

3. Chemical poisons e.g. arsenic, mercury 

Marry

4. Malnutrition

 

Fig. 5.1. Kidney - Cloudy swelling

Cloudy swelling results from disturbance in prowin and water metabolism resulting in increased intracellular colloidal osmotic pressure. Mitchondria are damaged. Water is absorbed into the cells which become swollen. 

Commonly affected organs are kidney, fiver, adre­nals and heart. The organ is slightly enlarged and looks pale. The cut surface is hazy. The cells are swollen. Cytoplasm shows albuminous granules soluble in acetic acid. 

Hydropic Degeneration

Very large amount of water is retained by the cells resulting in marked swelling. Granules are absent in the cytoplasm. Cytoplasm is vacuolated or reti­culated. 

Hydropic degeneration of liver is caused by poisoning due to chloroform, diethylene glycol and carbon tetrachloride. 

Fatty Change
Fatty degeneration is caused by poisons which may be bacterial or chemical. It also occurs due to ano­xia in chronic venous congestion. The commonly affected organs are liver, kidney and heart. The organ becomes greesy and yellowish. Microscopic examination reveals small vacuoles representing fat globules dissolved away during the process. 

Fatty infiltration is caused by overload of fat and lack of lipotropic factors. It is commonly fQt*,*d in liver. The nucleus is pushed to the periphe'ry and becomes elongated and narrow. There may be individual cells or fat cysts. 

Amyloid Degeneration (Amyloidosis)
There is deposition of amyloid in the tissue. The commonly affected organs are spleen, kidney, liver, heart, intestines and urinary tract. 

Lipoidal Degeneration
In the cells undergoing autolysis, cholesterol be­comes visible as needle shaped crystals. Tissue with such cells is said to have developed lipoidal degeneration. Cholesterol crystals may be present in cascous tissue, infarets, old haemorrhages, atheroma, degenerating goitres, dermoid cyst, hydrocele, etc. 

Glycogen Infiltration

There is excessive accumulation of glycogen in the affected tissue. The common causes are diabetes mellitus and glycogen storage disease, an inborn error of metabolism. The common sites are kidney and suppurative lesions. 

Mucoid Degeneration

Mucus is a loose combination of protein with mucopolysaccharides of high molecular weight. Mucous granules appear to be produced by the mitochondria, then moving to the Golgi apparatus, where they change into mucin granules. When this process is exaggerated with excessive secretion of mucus associated with degeneration of the cells, it is called mucoid degeneration. 

Hyaline Degeneration

It is a nonspecific degeneration affecting mainly the collagenous connective tissue and fibrous tissue in the walls of the blood vessels (connective tissue hyaline). The other form is cellular hyaline. 

Connective tissue hyaline appears as a homo­gencous swelling of collagen and the walls of the vessels in arteriosclerosis. It is present in: 

Very

1.  Vascular hypertension

Cold

2.  Chronic nephritis

Season

3.  Stroma of tumour

Really

4.  Reticulum of lymph nodes (in chronic inflammation)

The cellular hyaline is seen in:

Rude

1. Renal tubules (in amyloidosis)

People

2. Pancreas (in a.-tyloidosis)

Pour

3. Prostate

Often

4. Old infarcts of lung

FATTY DEGENERATION AND INFILTRATION
(Fatty Change)

Accumulation of fat in degenerated or damaged cells is termed fatty degeneration. It is differen­tiated from the termfatty infiltration in which fat accumulates in apparently normal cells. However, the differentiation is an obsolete one. The two conditions are collectively termed fatty change. Pathological adiposity, having more semblance to the fatty infiltration is the term used for an increase of fat in the tissues which normally store fat. 

Causes

A

 

A. Anoxia

 

Sentiments

 

1. Severe anaemia

 

 

 

 

(i) Pernicious anaemia

 

 

 

 

(ii) Posthaemorrhagic anaemia

 

Are

 

2.  Arteriosclerosis

 

Up

 

3. Under-nourishment

 

 

 

 

(i) Tumours

 

 

 

 

(ii) Collection of desquamated cells, e.g., in chronic nephritis

Precious

 

B.  Poisons

 

 

 

1.  Chemical

 

Polite

 

 

(i) Phosphorus

 

And

 

 

(ii) Arsenic

 

Calm

 

 

(iii) Carbon tetrachloride

 

 

 

2. Bacterial toxins

 

The

 

 

(i) Typhoid

 

Same

 

 

(ii) Smallpox

 

Yellow

 

 

(iii) Yellow fever

 

Dress

 

 

(vi) Diphtheria

Necklace

 

C. Neurogenic

 

 

 

- Wallerian degeneration

Changes in the Liver

Gross Appearance 
1.  Enlarged 
2.  Increasingly yellow in colour 
3.  Greesy to touch 
4.  Soft. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. Liver cells represented by large fat globules
2.  Nucleus squeezed into the displaced peri­phery. 

Change in the Heart

Gross Appearance -Two patterns 

1. In profound anaemia, there are bands of yellow coloured myocardium, alternating with bands of darker, red-brown, uninvolved myocardium. The uninvolved zones are believed to be closer to the blood vessels and are therefore less hypoxic than the yellow bands. 

2. In profound hypoxic or diphtheritic myo­carditis, the entire myocardium becomes flabby. 

Microscopic Appearance

The fat in the myocardial cells tends to be distri­buted in minute cytoplasmic vacuoles. 

AMYLOIDOSIS

Amyloidosis is a type of cellular degeneration in which there is deposition of amyloid in the tissue. Amyloid is a glycoprotein, the carbohydrate part being a sulphated polysaccharide and the protein part being globulin. 

Demonstration of Amyloid

Amyloid is demonstrated by its staining reactions; the following methods are employed. 

1.  Iodine solution produces a dark brown colour when poured over the cut surface of an organ. 
2. Methyl violet, and cresyl violet give a meta­chromatic reaction the amyloid material staining rose-red while the surrounding tissue is coloured blue. (Most reliable). 
3. Congo-red produces a brilliant pink colour. 
4.  Periodic acid Schiff given an intensive red reaction. 
5.  Van-Gieson's stain gives khaki colour. 
6.  With ultraviolet light, amyloid gives a specific bright yellow fluorescence. 

Type of Amyloidosis

 

A. Generalised

 

 

(i) Secondary - It affects principally the parenchymatous tissue viz. Spleen, Kidneys, Liver, Adrenals. Found in :-

Come

 

 

1.       Chronic pulmonary tuberculosis

Closer

 

 

2.       Chronic suppurative osteomyelitis

Silly

 

 

3.       Syphilis

Lad

 

 

4.       Leprosy

Take

 

 

5.       Tumours

Care

 

 

6.       Chronic nephritis

Carrying

 

 

7.       Cirrhosis

Roster

 

 

8.       Rheumatoid arthritis

 

 

(ii) Primary - rare idiopathic condition, is characterised by amyloid deposition, often massive, in mesodermal tissue viz. 

Hey

 

 

1. Heart

Guys

 

 

2. Gastrointestinal tract

Some

 

 

3. Skeletal muscles

Rust

 

 

4. Respiratory tract - Larynx and lungs

Under

 

 

5. Urinary tract - Ureter and bladder

Every

 

 

6.  Endocrine glands- Pituitary, thyroid and adrenals

Seat

 

 

7.  Skin

 

B. Localised

Localised amyoidosis is observed in the vicinity of abscesses and the lymph nodes draining them. This is probably a direct effect of suppuration on ad­jacent tissue elements. However, it is the rarest form. Small connective tissue growths in the larynx, bronchi and nasal septum are sometimes com­posed mainly of amyloid. 

Amyloidosis of Spleen (Two form)

A. Patchy amyloidosis 

Gross Appearance
1. Enlarged

2. Capsule normal. 

On Cut Section

1. Firm, dark red 
2. Malpighian bodies swollen, greyish red or colourless, some of them showing small opaque central dots (sago spleen). 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Amyloid appears in the Malpighian bodies between the lymphocytes. 
 2. Initially it is deposited around the cells, later the cells also are encroached and fuse together in large mass. 
3.  Lymphoid tissue undergoes pressure atrophy. 

B. Diffuse amyloidosis

Gross Appearance
1.  Heavily enlarged 
2.  Elastic and firm 
3.  Capsule normal. 

On cut Section
1.  Shows large pale-grey areas 
2.  Firm consistence, waxy and transluscent. 
 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Amyloid first appears in the basement membranes of the walls of the sinusoids. 
2. Reticulum of pulp spaces also affected. 
3.  The sinuses are narrow due to thickened wall. 
4. Malpighian follicles are normal in early stages; later reticular element of arterial component may be involved. 

Amyloidosis of Kidney

Gross Changes
1.  Enlarged, in chronic cases shrunken, granular, and contracted because of fibrosis. 

2.  Firm in consistence. 

On Cut Section
1.  Width of cortex increased. 

2.  Pale grey in colour. 

 3.  Medulla may be congested. 
4.  Capsule stripped off easily and shows congested blood vessels and yellow stippling.
5. Tubules show fatty degeneration (amyloid nephrosis). 

Microscopic Appearance
Initially amyloid is deposited in: 

1. Capillary loops of glomerular tufts 
2. Walls of arteriae rectae of the pyramids 
3.  Inter-lobular arterioles of the cortex. 

In advanced cases amyloid may be found lying under the epithelial cells of the tubules involving the basement membrane. 

Amyloidosis of Liver
GrossAppearance
1. Enlarged 
2. Heavy 
3.  Firm. 

Cut Surface
 1. Waxy 
 2. Transluscent, 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Affects primarily small arteries and veins of Glisson's capsule. 
2. Most extensive in the sinusoids of lobules, appearing immediately outside the endothelium of sinusoids particularly in the middle parts of the lobule. 
3. In advanced cases pressure atrophy of the liver cells with amyloid from adjacent sinusoids to form a solid mass of considerable size. 

Effects of Amyloidosis
1.  Pressure atrophy of surrounding cells. 
2.  Narrowing of affected vessels leading to: 
 (i) Cloudy swelling 
 (ii) Fatty degeneration 
 (iii) Atrophy 
 (iv) Necrosis. 

3.  In the intestines increased permeability causes watery diarrhoea. 

NECROSIS

Death of a cell or group of cells, is termed necrosis, when such cells still form a part of the living body. 

Necrosis may or may not be preceded by degenerative changes. When necrosis preceded by degenerative changes, it is termed necrobiosis. 

Causes of Necrosis

Low

 

1. Loss of blood supply. This is seen in an infarct caused by blockage of a vessel or by a blood clot which produces immediate local anoxia. Even if the loss of blood supply is incomplete, the cells may die. The predisposing causes are:

 

To

 

(i)  Thromboangitis obliterans (Buerger's disease)

 

Pay

 

(ii) Polyarteritis nodosa

 

Rent

 

(iii) Raynaud's disease

 

Tenants

 

(iv) Thrombo-embolism

 

Arrive

 

(v) Atherosclerosis

 

Often

 

(vi) Occlusion by tumours, etc.

Blood

 

2. Bacterial toxins. If the toxin is weak, inflam­mation is produced; if it is strong the result is necrosis

 

 

 

(i)                Necrosis of myocardium by diphtheria toxin

 

 

 

(ii)              Necrosis of rectus muscle (Zenker's degeneration) by typhoid toxin

Pressure

 

3. Physical irritants

 

Every

 

(i) Excessive heat

 

Egg

 

(ii) Excessive cold

 

Reached

 

(iii) Radiation

 

Tray

 

(iv) Trauma

Cured

 

4. Chemical irritants

 

 

 

(i) Caustics

 

 

 

(ii) Strong acids

Types of Necrosis

A.  Coagulation necrosis:
1.  The commonest form, seen in the infarcts of spleen and kidney. 
2.  The part becomes dry, homogeneous and opaque. 
3. There is coagulation of cytoplasm by intracellular enzymes; some of the surrounding lymph may be absorbed and coagulated in the same way. 
4. All the cellular detail is lost. 
5. Coagulated material may remain unchanged  for long time, but at the margin of the infarcted area, gradual absorption may occur due to action of proteolytic enzymes in the leucocytes. 
6.   Finally calcification occurs. 

Fig 5.2 : Coagulative necrosis. A, A wedge-shaped kidney infarct (yellow). B,

Microscopic view of the edge of the infarct, with normal kidney (N) and necrotic cells in the

infarct (I) showing preserved cellular outlines with loss of nuclei and an inflammatory infiltrate (which is difficult to discern at this magnification).

 

B. Liquefaction Necrosis
1.  Occurs in the central nervous system. 
2. Necrosed area becomes softened and lique­fied; fluid material is absorbed leaving cyst like spaces. 
3. Also occurs in bacterial inflammation with for­mation of pus. 
C.  Caseation Necrosis
1.  Seen in tuberculosis, lymphogronuloma inguinale, tularaernia, etc. 
2. All the detail of structure is wiped out, with the production of dry, cheesy, granular material which is amorphous. 
3.  Caseous material has a high fat content. 
4.  Both the cells and stroma are involved. 

D. Fat Necrosis
1.  Occurs in acute pancreatitis; also results from trauma. 
2. Lipase acts upon surface of the omentuM and the pancreas with the production of small opaque white areas of fat necrosis. 
3.  Fatty acids combined with alkaline pancreatic juice produce chalky white precipitate. 
4.  Lipase is released as a result of obstruction or rupture of pancreatic duct. 

Changes in the Cell

A. In the Cytoplasm: 
1.  Cell is swollen. 
2. Cytoplasm is homogeneous without normal Gas Gangrene reticular appearance. 
3.  Cell outline indistinct. 

B. In the Nucleus: 
1.  Pyknosis. The nuclear membrane becomes 3. 
 irregular and wrinkled. The nucleus stains deeply and is shruken. It loses vesicular appearance. 
2.  Karyorrhexis. The nucleus is broken up into a  number of small pieces. 
3. Kaiyolysis or chromatolysis. Initially the nuc­leus is darkly stained but gradually faints and fades away. 

GANGRENE

Gangrene is death of a part accompanied by putre­faction of the tissue by saprophytic bacteria. It occurs in organs exposed to atmosphere directly or indirectly, e.g., skin, mouth, bowel, lung, cervix, etc. 

Causes of Gangrene

 

A. Primary gangrene. (Part killed by putrefactive bacteria) viz.

 

 

1. Clostridium welchii

 

 

2. Fusiform bacillus

 

B. Secondary gangrene. Putrefaction preceded by death of the part produced by ischaernia due to: 

R

 

1.  Raynaud's disease

E

 

2.  Ergot poisoning

S

 

3.  Senile changes, e.g,. arteriosclerosis

T

 

4.  Thromboangitis obliterans (Buerger's disease)

E

 

5. Embolism

D [Rested]

 

6.  Diabetes mellitus

  Types of Gangrene
A. Primary gangrene: 
1. Gas gangrene 
2. Noma. 
B. Secondary gangrene: 
1. Dry gangrene 
2. Moist gangrene. 

Gas gangrene

1.  Occurs in wounds inflicted in wars or in street accidents. 
2.  Caused by anaerobic clostridia, mainly Clostridium welchii. 
3. Predisposed by damaged muscle and foreign bodies. 
4. The affected muscle becomes swollen, pinkish and crepitant owing to formation of gas bubbles by the fermentive action of bacilli on the muscle sugar. 
5. Rapidly spreading oedema as organism has no power of breaking down proteins. 
6. Oedema, followed by necrosis, affects a muscle throughout its length as organism spreads within the sarcolemmal sheath. 
7. The neighbouring muscles remain unaffected. 

Noma

1.  Occurs occasionally in poorly nourished children especially after some debilitating infection. 
2.  Begins on the gum margin and spreads to the cheek. 
3.  An inflammatory patch of dusky red colour forms and then becomes darker in colour and ultimately gangrenous. 
4. Necrosis is initially caused by fusiform bacillus, the dead tissue then undergoes putrefaction. 
Vitamin B-complex deficiency, particularly ot nicotinic acid predisposes to the condition. 

Dry Gangrene
1. Caused by gradual narrowing of an artery by arteriosclerosis; the tissues have a time to dry out due to vaporisation or a good venous drainage. 
2. Confined to extremities, with no collateral circulation; begins in one of the toes with or without slight injury. 
3.  The part is cold, pulseless. 
4. Spread is slow as the part contains so little blood that invading bacteria grow with diffi­culty in dead tissue. 
5. The part becomes dry, shrivelled and dark. 
6. The gangrene slowly extends upwards till it reaches a point where circulation is sufficient for part viability; there is a conspicuous line of demarcation which finally brings about comp­lete separation. 
7. Microscopic picture is one of complete necro­sis. There is usually a blurring and sludging of outline; a disintegration of tissue more extensive than in simple necrosis. 

Most Gangrene

1.  Occurs in: 
(i) Internal organs, e.g., bowel, lung, or extremities where both vein and artery are occluded. Classical example is strangulated hernia. 
(ii)  Naturally moist organs, e.g., vulva. 

2. Owing to abundant moisture, there is rapid growth of putrefactive bacteria; the part becomes rotten, putrid, and fouls smelling. 

3. Liquefaction of tissues and often gas for­mation, produce blebs of fluid under the skin; bubbles of gas give an emphysematous crackling when the part is palpated. 

4. Local spread is rapid with no line of demarcation. 

5. Toxaemia and finally death due to absorption of toxic products. 

ATROPHY

The term atrophy refers to the acquired wasting or diminution in the size of a cell or of the essential tissue of an organ. 

Causes of Atrophy
1. Defective nutrition.

2. Diminished functional activity.

3. Interference with nerve supply.

4. Continuous pressure. 

Defective Nutrition

This may be produced locally by arterial disease interfering with blood supply to a part, when the reduction is not so severe as to cause necrosis. The functional parenchymatous elements of the tissue then undergo atrophy and there is sometimes also a concomitant overgrowth of connective tissue, the condition being called fibroid atrophy. This is often well seen in the heart wall and in the kidneys where small atrophic depressions result from narrowing of the lumina of small arteries. When the muscle cells of arterial wall are atrophied, the overgrowth of connective tissue becomes very marked. This is probably compensatory since it gives support and minimizes dilatation. 

General atrophy is seen in cases of starvation. Emaciation depends chiefly upon utilization of fat of the adipose tissue but there is also a great wasting of the tissues. The various organs may thus diminish in weight. The liver and spleen are markedly affected, the kidneys and heart to lesser degree whilst the central nervous system is only slightly affected. In a great majority of cases of wasting disease, however, such as malignant growth of the alimentary tract, chronic tuber­culosis or suppuration, etc. a toxic element is concerned in production of wasting. Various degenerations may thus come to be associated with atrophy and secondary anaemia is present. Sec­ondary anaemia is little marked in cases of pure starvation. The term cacharia is often applied to a condition of wasting, anaemia and weakness. 

Diminished Functional Activity

Diminution in katabolic process leads to anabolism below the normal and thus to diminution in the size of cells. When a part is under-functioning, t e blood supply diminishes which is presumably the cause of atrophy. Accordingly it is likely that atrophy depends upon diminished metabolism. This disuse atrophy is seen when a gland, e.g., pancreas has its duct obstructed, its functional activity is stopped and it undergoes atrophy. Similarly tubules of kidney undergo atrophy when their glomeruli are thrown out of action. The muscles around a joint which has been fixed for some time undergo marked atrophy and the bones may also be affected. 

Interference with Nerve Supply

This form of atrophy is seen where there is any destructive lesion of the lower motor neurones or their axons, the motor nerves, This type is often called neuropathic atrophy. There is not only a simple wasting but also more active degenerative changes in the nerve fibres and muscles. In the former Wallerian degeneration takes place, in which the myelin breaks down into fatty globules; whilst in the latter, fatty degeneration also occurs followed by absorption of the sarcous substance and increase of the interstitial connective tissue. Sometimes marked atrophy occurs also in the bones from the same cause, e.g., cases of infantile paralysis. The bones of the limb may become thin and light. 

Deficiency of the Endocrine Glands

The effects of endocrine deficiency are seen mainly when it occurs at an early period of life, so that the full development of the body is interfered with and thus hypoplasia results. This is especially seen in the deficiency of thyroid and of the anterior lobe of the pituitary. A striking example of true atrophy in the adult, however, is seen in myxoedema due to thyroid deficiency. There occurs marked atrophy of the structures of the skin viz. hair follicles, sweat glands, and sebaceous glands. 

Continuous Pressure

The continuous pressure acts mainly by interfering with the blood supply and also the functions of a tissue. Thus the pressure atrophy maybe produced by simple tumours, cysts, etc. Even bone may undergo atrophy from pressure but in this instance, there is active absorption of tissue by cellular acti­vity, osteoclasts being concerned in the process. 

OEDEMA

The term oedenia may be defined as an abnormal accumulation of fluid in the tissue spaces and serous cavities. This accumulation may be local or general. When water collects in the tissues, it may be in free or combined form. When combined, it may be united with the protoplasm of the tissue elements and can be moved from one place to another. 

Causes of 0edema

I

1.  Increased capillary permeability

Did

2.  Diminished colloidal osmotic pressure of  plasma proteins

Invite

3. Increased hydrostatic pressure of the blood

Less

4. Lymphatic obstruction

Seriously

5. Salt retention

Increased Capillary Permeability

Although the capillary endothelium is completely .permeable to water and crystalloids, the outward passage of colloids is closely related to the condition of the vessel wall. Under normal conditions, protein is almost completely prevented from crossing out of the blood into the tissue. But when the vessels are damaged, e.g., by toxins, anoxia, etc. they become readily permeable to proteins as seen inflammatory oedema. 

The escape of proteins is of greatest importance in the production of oedema, for it lowers the collol­dal osmotic pressure of the blood and raises that of the tissue. As a result, water readily passes out through the capillary wall. 

Decreased Colloidal Osmotic Pressure of the Plasma Proteins

Under normal conditions, colloidal osmotic pres­sure of the plasma proteins holds the water inside blood vessels and prevents it from passing into the tissues. When the level of plasma proteins becomes low resulting in decreased osmotic pressure, water passes out from the vessels into the tissues and hence oedema develops. A fall of plasma proteins below 5% will cause oedema. Thus long continued anaemia is likely to be associated with oedema. Marked ascites, when the fluid is rich in protein content as in malignant disease of the peritoneum may lead to generalised oedema (anasarca) owing to severe blood protein loss. The osmotic pressure of albumin is about four times that of globulin. Thus when there is reversal of albumin: globulin ratio (3:1) as in subacute glomerulonephritis and nephrotic syndrome, oedema sets in. The colloidal osmotic pressure, therefore depends partly upon the total amount of plasma proteins and partly upon their relative proportion. 

Increased Hydrostatic Pressure of Blood

The pressure in the capillaries is the force which plasma and enables the normal passage of nutritive material into the tissues. If it is increased, oedema results. The pressure in the capillaries depends upon the venous blood pressure and not upon the arterial pressure. In cardiac failure the venous pressure rises markedly, and the increased capillary pressure leads to oedema. The stretching and dilatation of the capillaries also renders them more permeable. The oedema that follows thrombosis of the main vein of a limb is largely due to an increase in the capillary blood pressure. 

Lymphatic Obstruction

This is an important factor in the production of local but not general oedema. Much of the inter­cellular fluid in the tissues escapes by way of the lymphatics, so that obstruction to outflow through these channels will cause local oedema. The obstruction may be due to inflammation, the presence of tumour cells within the lumen or filariasis. Pressure from outside may be due to a tumour or collection of fluid. As the fluid increases, the lymphatic obstruction becomes more marked, so that a vicious cycle is formed. 

Examples of lymphatic oedema are swelling of the arm in breast cancer, swelling of the legs, scrotum, etc. in elephantiasis, chylous ascites and chylo­thorax in thoracic duct obstruction. Milroy's disease or hereditory oedema is also probably lymphatic in origin. 

Chloride Retention

It is a secondary factor as it does not cause the production of oedema but it aggravates and conti­nues the already existing oedema. Once oedema is established and chlorides pass into the tissues with water, more water is retained by the tissues because of increased osmotic pressure. In renal oedema the withdrawal of salt from food is often followed by rapid disappearance of the oedema and a corresponding increase in the flow of urine. 

Oedema in Acute Nephritis

The oedema in acute nephritis cannot be due to -protein loss in urine since the plasma proteins are normal and oedema fluid is rich in protein. The factors involved include oliguria. due to glomerular damage, and increased reabsorption of sodium and water from the renal tubules. It is probable that the subcutaneous capillaries are simul­taneously damaged with those of the kidneys. A further factor is congestive heart failure with rise in capillary blood pressure. 

Oedema in Nephrotic Syndrome

The following factors are probably concerned with the production of oedema: 

1. Hypoproteinaemia. The colloidal osmotic pres­sure is lowered by loss of protein in the urine, and hence fluid passes from the blood into the tissue spaces. The normal colloidal osmotic pressure is 40-50 cm of water; in nephrotic syndrome it is 5-20 cm of water. The protein lost from the plasma is albumin rather than globulin owing to the smaller size of its molecule. The protein content of plasma in nephrotic syndrome does not usually fall below 4G%. A further fall in albumin figure is compen­sated by rise in globulin content. A second factor which may be partially responsible for the fall in albumin content of the plasma is failure to synthesize new proteins from the aminoacids. The capillary permeability does not appear to be increased in nephrotic syndrome as the oedema fluid and the ascitic fluid protein content is low. 

PIGMENTATION

Types of Pigmentation

 

 

 

I. Endogenous pigmentation

 

Many

 

 

 

1. Melanin pigmentation

 

 

A

 

 

 

(i) Addison's disease

 

 

Company

 

 

 

(ii) Chloasma

 

 

Vigilance

 

 

 

(iii) Vitiligo

 

 

Inspector

 

 

 

(iv)  Irregular pigmentation of skin

 

 

Common

 

 

 

(a) Chronic arsenical poisoning

 

 

Boy

 

 

 

(b) Bronzed diabetes

 

 

Friend

 

 

 

(c) Familial multiple polyposis

 

May

 

 

 

(v) Melanosis coli

 

Open

 

 

 

(vi) Ochronosis

Heart

 

 

 

2. Haematogenous pigmentation

 

 

Many

 

 

(i) Malarial pigmentation

 

 

Happyy

 

 

(ii) Haemochromatosis

 

 

Boys

 

 

(iii) Biliary pigmentation

Attack

 

 

 

3.  Atrophic pigmentation

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Brown atrophy

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Fuscous degeneration

 

 

 

II. Exogenous pigmentation

Bad

 

 

 

1. By inhalation

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Anthracosis

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Silicosis

Boys

 

 

 

2.  By ingestion

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Argyria

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Chronic lead poisoning

Talking

 

 

 

3.  Tattooing

 Endogenous Pigmentation

1. Melanin Piginentation. The melanins are iron­free sulphur containing pigment varying in colour from pale yellow to deep brown. They are formed intracellularly from colourless precursors, melano­gens, by the metabolic activities of the cells and are very stable substances resistant to acids and many other reagents, but soluble in strong alkalies. They are related to the aromatic compounds, tyrosine, phenylalanine and tryptophan and may be formed from such substances by oxidation. On treating section of the skin with dihydroxyphenylalanine (dopa) certain cells in the epidermis oxidize this substance by means of an enzyme like tyrosinase and become blackened in consequence. These cells are 'dopapositive' The only cells in the skin which are dopapositive in vivo are the dendritic cells which lie extended between the basal cells of the epidermis. These cells are the only true mellanoblasts and after elaborating the pigment in the form of fine granules they transfer it by means of their processes into the basal epidermal cells and also into certain I5hagocytic cells in the dermis which may thus become heavily pigmented with coarse pigment granules. Melanin pigmentation occurs in the following conditions. 

(i) Addison's disease. Following destruction of the adrenal contex there occurs a general increase in pigmentation, especially in the parts exposed to light and in those normally pigmented. There may also be pigmentary deposit on the inner surface of the cheeks on a line corresponding to the junction of the teeth, and on the sides of the tongue, the position of the deposit being apparently determined by irritation. 

(ii) Chloasma. It is a condition sometimes due to ovarian disorder and sometimes related to preg­nancy, pigmented patches occur on the skin of the face and pigmented parts, e.g., the nipples, may become of deeper tint under the influence of oestrogenic and melanocyte stimulating hormone. 

(iii) Leucoderma (Vitiligo) may be attended by increase in pigment in the intervening parts. In the affected areas the dendritic cells are of abnormal structure and have lost their capacity to oxidize 'dopa' to form pigments. 
(iv) Chronic arsenic poisoning. (v) Neurofibromatosis. 
(vi) Bronzed diabetes. 
(vii) Peutz syndrome. 

2. Haematogenous pigmentation. Normally the breakdown of haemoglobin begins with opening of the porphyrin ring system. Iron is carried away attached to the plasma 13-globulin transferrin (side­rophyllin) for preferential reutilization in blood formation. The residual biliverdin pigment is then reduced to bilirubin which is absorbed and carried by the plasma a-globulin to the liver where it is dissociated and the pigment, conjugated with glu­curonic acid is excreted in the bile. In pathological states, haemoglobin is broken down in similar manner and many cells have the power to effect the change. The resulting pigments may be deposited in the tissues around some local destruction, e.g., that following a haemorrhage, or in certain organs where there has been a process of general blood destruction. When haemorrhage occurs into the tissues the red cells become haemolysed and their haemoglobin is broken down by tissue enzymes and by the action of phagocytes. The pigments usually deposited are haematoidin (iron free) and haemosiderin (iron-containing). Haematoidin is formed mainly from large accumulations of blood; thus the rhombic crystals are often met with in the sites of old cerebral haemorrhages, in thrombi, haemorrhagic infarcts, etc. It is found both in the free condition and within cells. Accumulation of haemosiderin in organs, or viseral siderosis occurs in malignant malaria and where there has been much haemorrhage into the tissue, e.g., in purpuric diseases. 

Malalial pigmentation. The malarial parasites with­in the red corpuscles produce from the haemo­globin a dark-brown pigment, haematin, in the form of very minute granules, which accumulates­within the intracorpuscular parasites. It becomes free when the corpuscles are broken, and is taken up by phagocytes and deposited in the organs especially the spleen and liver, where it remains practically unchanged for many years. 

Haemochromatosis. This term is applied to a condition in which there is an extensive deposit of haemosiderin in the organs and tissues without anaemia or other evidence of increased blood des­truction. It appears to be an inherited abnormality of iron metabolism leading to excessive absorption. the largest amount is present in the liver, but the haemosiderin may occur in even greater concen­tration in the lymph nodes in part of the abdomen. It occurs in the skin especially around the sweat glands also in the pancreas, gastric glands, heart muscles thyroid, etc. In the liver it is always accompanied by a somewhat fine cirrhosis, usually with enlargement. 

Biliary piginentation. This occurs especially in jaun­dice, the coloration of skin and other tissues is usually due to reabsorption of bile pigments from the liver after conjugation with glucuronic acid. The bile pigment retained in the liver cells is deposited in the form of small greenish brown granules, most prominently in the central parts of the lobules. The reabsorbed bile pigment is excre­ted by the kidneys, and a finely granular deposit occurs in the cells of the convoluted tubules. Portions of the pigmented cells are broken off and form granular collections in the tubules, and these on passing downwards become condensed, so that in the lower parts hyaline cylinders of brownish­green colour may be present. 
3. Atrophic Pigmentation. In the later years of life a fine brownish-yellow pigment tends to appear in the heart muscle, non-striped muscle, etc., and in wasting diseases this accumulation of pigment is more marked. In the heart muscle the pigment accumulates in the central part of the cells at the poles of the nucleus and when this is associated with wasting of the muscle, the term, brown atrophy is applied. Similar pigments may occur in the liver cells, especially in the central parts of the lobules, in the cells of the testis and the nerve cells of the brain cortex. In the last situation a consider­able amount of pigment is met with in senile insanity and allied conditions, the change being known as fuscous degeneration. 

Exogenous Pigmentation
1. By inhalation. A certain amount of coal-dust and stone dust enters and accumulates in the lungs of all individuals living in urban conditions, but the accumulation becomes excessive in those whose occupation exposes them to an atmosphere rich in dust. The lungs may be infiltrated in this way by foreign particles of various kinds - coal, stone iron, cinnabar and various organic substances and pathological results may follow. The degree of irritation resulting depends on the nature of the particles. Large collections of carbon particles may provoke little or no overgrowth of connective tis­sue, anthracosis, whereas this is very marked in the case of certain kinds of stone-dust, the condition of silicosis resulting. 
2. By ingestion. The common example is argyria, which results from the ingestion of silver prepara­tions for long periods. Silver forms an albuminate which is carried in the plasma to various tissues and when it undergoes reduction, many minute brownish-grey nodules are formed. These are pre­sent especially in the wall of the intestine, in skin, liver and kidneys. In chronic lead poisoning an albuminate is produced in a similar way and the action of H2S on it around the teeth produces the characteristic blue line on the gums. 
3. Tattooing. In tattooing, fine particles such as India ink, ultramarine, cinnabar, etc., introduced through the epidermis, are taken up by histiocytes and lodge in small spaces or clefts in the connec­tive tissue of the cutis. Some particles are carried also by the lymph stream to the regional lymph nodes and then are conveyed by phagocytes into the lymphoid tissues. 

PATHOLOGICAL CALCIFICATION

Pathological calcification may occur in normal tis­sue as a result of blood being flooded with calcium or it may represent the deposition of calcium in tissue which is injured, degenerated or dead. In the former case, it is known as metastatic calcification and in the latter, dystrophic calcification. Meta­static calcification may be induced by repeated injections of parathyroid hormone or it may be occur in decalcifying disease of bone such as osteoporosis of forced immobility (poliomyelitis, etc), osteomalacia, general carcinomatosis of bone and multiple myeloma. The calcium is either removed from the bones or not laid down there, but deposited in other tissues, more particularly the kidneys. 

Dystrophic calcification, in which calcium is laid down in dying or dead tissue irrespective of blood calcium level, in much more common. Both phos­phate and carbonate are deposited in practically the same proportion as is found in the bone. There is tendency for any dying or dead tissue, accessible to the body fluids to become calcified. Necrosis and hyaline changes are the two chief antecedents of calcification. 

Several examples or pathological calcification are often seen, the more important being: 

Can

(i)  Caseous tuberculous areas free from viable tubercle bacilli

A

(ii)  Arteriosclerosis- Monckeberg's sclerosis

Highly

(iii)  Healed endocarditis and pericarditis

Paid

(iv)  Phleboliths

Doctor

(v)  Degenerating uterine fibroids

Lend

(vi) Lithopedion (calcified foetus from a glandular epithelia (liver, kidney, etc.), appear to tubal pregnancy)

Rupees?

(vii) Renal convoluted tubules in mercuric chloride poisoning

 METAPLASIA 

Metaplasia is the transformation of one type of tissue into another type. This process has definite limits. An epiblastic tissue can only produce an­other epiblastic tissue, mesoblast can only produce mesoblast. Metaplasia is best seen in the closely related connective tissues as when cartilage is converted into bone. Thus depending upon the type of tissue involved, metaplasia may be epi­thelial metaplasia, connective tissue metaplasia and endothelial metaplasia. 
 

True epithelial metaplasia occurs in response to call for altered function or at least the result of altered environment. If the prolapsed uterus becomes everted, the columnar epithelium is changed into a stratified squamous form better suited to withstand friction. As a result of continued irritation, e.g., from gallstones, the columnar epithelium of the gallbladder may also become squamous. The more highly specialised glandular epithelia (liver, kidney, etc.) appear to be incapable of true metaplasia. 

Connective tissue metaplasia is of common occur­ence. Fibrous tissue, myxomatous tissue, cartilage and bone are all closely related and one may become changed into another. The commonest change is that of cartilage into a bone. In old age ossification of the laryngeal and tracheal cartilages is common. This is certainly not due to altered function but may be connected with the altered environment. Bone may be formed in the walls of degenerated arteries or in an eye which is des­troyed and functionless. It may be encountered in the edges of a wound in the abdominal wall. In myositis ossificans bone is formed in the voluntary muscles and may replace them to a large extent. The cells of an osteogenic: sarcoma of bone may form fibrous tissue, mucoid tissue, cartilage or bone. 

Endothelial metaplasia is observed when serosal endothelium as that lining the pleura or peri­toneum is irritated. In place of being flattended it may become cubical, columnar or even startified. The cubical and columnar cells may surround spaces so as to give glandular appearance. 

 


 

 

Chapter 6 : Granulomata

INTRODUCTION

A granuloma is a variety of chronic inflammation characterised by lesions which tend to be strictly circumscribed and by cells of histiocytic rather than of haematogenous type. A granuloma is essentially a highly specific reaction of the reticuloendothelial system. Thus the granuloma must be regarded as a special example of inflammation and not as a tumour since the latter should have no relationship with the reaction to iinjury or limitation of infection. 

 

 

I. Infective granulomata

Border

 

 

1. Bacterial

 

Take

 

 

(i) Tuberculosis

 

Lesser

 

 

(ii) Leprosy 

 

Tomatoes

 

 

(iii) Tularaemia

Security

 

 

2.  Spirochaetal

 

 

 

 

(i) Syphilis

 

 

 

 

(ii) Yaws

Force

 

 

3.  Fungal

 

 

Any

 

 

(i) Actinomycosis

 

More

 

 

(ii) Maduromycosis

 

Boys

 

 

(iii) Blastomycosis

 

Can

 

 

(iv) Coccidiomycosis

 

Arrive

 

 

(v) Aspergillosis

Very

 

 

4.  Viral

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Granuloma inguinale

 

 

 

 

(ii) Lymphopathia venerium

Intuitive

 

 

5. Idiopathic

 

 

 

 

(i) Hodgkin's disease

 

 

 

 

(ii) Sarcoidosis

 

 

II. Foreign body granulomata

 

Little

 

 

(i) Lint granuloma

 

Baby

 

 

(ii) Berrylium granuloma

 

Lone

 

 

(iii) Lipogranuloma

TUBERCULOSIS

Tuberculosis is caused by the acid fast organism, Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Two types - human and bovine, are known to cause infection in human beings. Both types are equally pathogenic for man.  The bovine bacillus is primarily a parasite of cattle. In man it is mainly responsible for tuberculosis of lymph nodes and bones in children.  Infection with the human type is air-borne from patients with pulmonary tuberculosis (i.e., with viable bacilli in the sputum). Infection is commonest under five years of age when it is likely to be rapidly progressive and fatal. Then it declines until late adolescence, reaching its maximum in women between 20-25 and in men between 40-50 years of age. In the adult the disease is much more chronic. Infection may occur through the alimentary tract by ingestion of infected milk especially in the rural population where proper boiling is not practised. Congenital infection through the placenta is rare. 

Spread

The tubercle bacillus is non-motile but it can be transported in the bodies of phagocytes. The spread may occur by: 

Delhi

(i) Direct extension

Lads

(ii) Lymphatics

Beating

(iii) Blood stream

Nun

(iv) Natural passages

 Spread by direct extension occurs from the pri­mary site of lesion. The extension is effected by amoeboid movement of the phagocytes harbouring the bacilli. Thus the bacilli are carried into the lymph spaces of the surrounding tissue. 

Spread by lymphatics results in transportation of the bacilli from the infected lymph spaces to the regional lymph nodes whence they disseminate widely in the lymphatic system. Ultimately the bacilli are poured into the venous blood stream through the thoracic duct. The venus blood carries the bacilli to lungs and sometimes to systemic circulation. 

Spread by blood stream may occur either via the lymphatic-venous route or by ulceration of a caseous focus into a vein. In the former case, a simple bacillaemia results leading to isolated lesion in almost any organ of the body. While ulceration of a caseous focus into a vein results in general miliary tuberculosis and the circulation is flooded with bacilli; tiny miliary tubercles, macroscopic or microscopic are present in every organ of the body. 

Spread along the natural passages may occur through the bronchi, ureters and vas deferens. In these cases however, it is difficult to be certain that the bacilli have not been carried along the lymphatics in the submucosa. 
Differences between Childhood and Adult Tuberculosis
 

Childhood Tuberculosois

Adult Tuberculosis

(i)  Usually results from primary infection

Results from reaction or super infection 

(ii)  Healing takes place by calcification or by 


 complete removal of tuberculous tissue

Healing takes place by fibrosis and scarring

(iii)  Glandular involvement usually predominates

Glandular involvement not common

(iv)  Parenchymal lesions usually perihilar

Parenchymal lesions usually apical

(v)  Cavities, when present, usually acute 


 and necrotic 

Cavities usually chronic and walled up

(vi)  Haematogenus infection common

Haematogenous infection less common.

Primary Tuberculosis (Ghon Lesion)

Gross Appearance 
1. Generally found immediately subjacent to the pleura in the lower part of upper lobe or upper part of lower lobe of one lung; less common in other regions of lung and other parts, e.g., gastrointestinal tract, pharynx and skin. 

2.  1 - 1.5 cm in diameter. 

3.  Grey-white inflammatory consolidation with sharp boundary. 
4. During second week, consolidated focus be­comes granulomatous and the develops a soft, caseous, necrotic centre. 
5. Tubercle bacilli move, either free or within phagocytes along the regional peribronchial lymphatic channels to the tracheo-bronchial lymph nodes forming caseating granulomas. 
6.  Ultimately heals by progressive fibrosis, calcification and sometimes ossification. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. At very early stage centre of focus consists of a collection of swollen macrophages around which there is a zone of round cells, chiefly lymphocytes. 

 

Fig. 6.1. Primary tubercle.

2. Soon macrophages become oval, spindle­shaped, or irregular in form, w4h fairly abundant cytoplasm and a faintly staining nucleus. These cells are termed epithelioid or endothelioid cells. 

3. The central cells become swollen and lose their outline, their nuclei cease to stain and ultimately they become fused to become a homogeneous or slightly granular, structure­less material (caseation necrosis). 

4. Among the epithelioid cells are the giant cells with some what irregular outline and nume­rous oval or rounded nuclei often arranged at the periphery (Langerhan's giant cells). 

The primary tubercle or primary complex or Ghon lesion has thus a necrotic centre surrounded by epithelioid cells with a few giant cells and these again surrounded by small round cells. 

LEPROSY

Leprosy is a chronic infective granuloma caused by Alycobacterium leprae, an acid-fast bacillus, chiefly affecting the skin and nerves. 
There are four types of lesions in leprosy: 

Let

1.  Lepromatous

The

2. Tuberculoid

Indians

3. Indeterminate

Bounce

4. Borderline or Dimorphic

 
Lepromatous Leprosy

This form is manifested especially in the skin by diffuse involvement in which the skin becomes erythematous, swollen and often smooth and glis­tening. It is firm and usually painless. Projecting nodules may develop, either discrete or fusing to form large conglomerate masses. When the latter involve forehead and face together with loss of eye brows and eye lashes, the face is discribed as leonine. Involvement of conjunctivae leads to blindness; hearing, smell and taste sensations are sometimes lost. 

The nodules vary in size from microscopic to 2 cm. diameter. The large nodules, often in the skin, are well defined, have a tense overlying epiderm, are firm, somewhat elastic and cut with resistance. They show a slight buldging; pale yellow or light grey in cross section. Situated in the corium, they may extend deeply. Microscopically, the nodule is made up principally of large, mononuclear cells, with an irregular intermingling of lymphocytes, plasma cells and multinucleate giant cells of Langerhan's type. The large mononuclears and giant cells are often foamy and contain the acid fast bacilli. These foam cells may also contain fat. The bacteria may also be found in vascular endo­thelium, in polymorphonuclear leucocytes and even in epithelium. They are present as small clusters of organisms termed. 'Cigar pack' and as large masses. Extracellular organisms are also found but these are originally intracellular. Occasionally, lepromas are made up largely of large mononuclear cells without foamy cytoplasm. Sometimes there is an ingrowth of connective fissue and the losion becomes cicaterized. 

Tuberculoid Leprosy

Tuberculoid lesions are tiny granulomas, often near blood vessels, made up of lymphocytes, large mononulears, and occasional giant cells. When in the skin they are in the upper corium, and the overlying epidermis is often atrophic. 

The lesions are smaller than the usual leproma and also differ in that they contain few demonstrable bacteria. Sometimes tuberculoid lesions, especially in the lym- ph nodes and bones, closely resemble the granulomas of sarcoidosis. In rare instances, tuber­culoid lesions undergo extensive necrosis with the formation of painless ulcers, called lazarine leprosy. 

Indeterminate Leprosy

The lesions are not distinctive histologically. Hyperaemia is prominent in the erythematous macules. Infiltration of lymphocytes may be noteworthy, especially around blood vessels. 

Dimorphic Leprosy

The histology is not characteristic. As changes occur, the lepromatous or tuberculoid features may be prominent. 

SYPHILIS

Syphilis is a specific infective granuloma caused by Treponetnapallidum and transmitted sexually. 

The lesions encountered in syphilis are described in three stages viz. primary, secondary and tertiary. 

1. Primary lesion. The primary lesion appears at the site of incoulation. This is usually on the geni­talia but it may be extragenital, e.g., on lips and fingers. The common genital sites are the penis in the male and the cervix in the female. The cervical chancre is highly infective on account of the moist character of its surroundings and it is easily over­looked owing to its hidden nature and freedom from pain and discharge. The primary lesion is generally single but may be multiple. It usually develops in from three to fourweeks after infection but this latent period may be two to six weeks. It f irst takes the form of a hard nodule but the surface tends to become ulcerated and a 'hard sore' or chancre is formed from the surface of which enornious number of spirochactes are discharged. The chancre is the earliest clinical manifestation but from the pathological standpoint the chancre is really a late affair. The hardness is due to dense cellular infiltration but does not appear during the first few days. Later it is caused by a marked degree of fibroplasia. In the course of a few weeks, healing occurs which may or may not leave a scar. 

Microscopically, there is dense accumulation of lymphocytes and plasma cells especially around the small vessels and fibroblasts multiply and lay down collagen fibrils. Destruction of the tissue is seldom marked but the surface epithelium is usual­ly lost. The regional lymph nodes are enlarged, hard and shotty but not painful or tender. 

2. Secondary lesion. After the appearance of primary lesion, there is a latent period. In two or three months after infection, secondary lesions appear in the skin, mucous membranes and the central nervous system. These persist for a period of months and then disappear. There is no destruction of the tissue at this stage so that no scars are left. 

Secondary lymphadenitis is one of the earliest changes. Swelling of the epitrochlear or posterior cervical nodes are specially characteristic. 

The lesions of the skin are of great variety, but they are symmetrical in distribution. They are polymor­phous in type, i.e., present several varieties of the lesions at the same time. The lesions may be macular, papular or pustular. 

3. Tertiary lesions. The subsidence of the secondary lesions is followed by another latent interval during which all is quiet. In a year or not for many years a third set of lesions appears. These are not symmetrical. They affect deep as well as superficial structures and show a tendency to necrosis and destruction. These are not infective. Two main types of tertiary lesions may occur. The one is gross and localised (the gumma), the other is microscopic and diffuse. 

The gumma is a necrotic, localised, yellowish, homogeneous mass of rubbery consistence composed of usual mononuclear cells. In the centre of the lesion necrosis and caseation occur with the formation of peculiar gummy material, but there is not the same complete wiping out of structure as in tuberculous caseation. A few giant cells may be seen at the margin. Gummata of skin, mouth, tongue and nose may lead to extensive ulceration. The liver may show one or several masses which heal with fibrosis so that deep scars are formed producing a peculiar lobed appearance known as 'Hepar lobatum'. In the testicle, gumma forms a hard mass which may be confused with tumour. Gumma in the bone, the brain and other places may be confused with tumours of these organs. 

In the diffuse lesions, the spirochaetes are widely distributed and set up a diffuse chronic inflammatory reaction which lymphocytes and plasma cells, tissue destruction but no caseation. The principal sites are the thoracic aorta and the testicle. In the thoracic aorta a frequent result is the development of an aneurysm of that vessel. The most serious of all the late lesions are those of the central nervous system which may appear many years after the original infection., These may affect chiefly the meninges, the brain and the spinal cord. 

Congenital Syphilis

Syphilis may be transmitted from the father or mother but in all cases mother is infected though the infection may not be manifest. There are three possibilities: 

1.  The child may be born dead showing well marked evidence of syphilis. 
2.  The child may be born alive with external evidence of syphilis. 
3.  The child may appear healthy but lesions develop later. 

When the child is born dead, the appearance is usually characteristic. There is no primary lesion, as infection takes place through the placenta. The child is usually premature and undersized. The skin may be macerated. The spleen and often the liver are enlarged. Syphilitic epiphysis is the most diagnostic feature. The chief microscopic change is an interstitial round cell infiltration of many of the internal organs combined with a varying degree of fibrosis. In the liver this produces a fine form of intercellular cirrhosis. 
If the child is born alive the skin may show varied lesions described in the acquired form. Common sites of lesion are the buttocks, anus, angles of the mouth, palms of the hands and the soles of the feet. Enlargement of spleen is very constant. The liver and the other organs show the changes already described. 

In the late type, lesions develop over a period of years. The permanent teeth show the appearance known as "Hutchinson teeth". These are small, widely spaced, peg-shaped and central incisors are notched: molars are pitted and honey-combed. An interstitial keratitis develops as the time of puberty producing a ground-glass opacity in the cornea. Nerve deafness is common. There may be involve­ment of the central nervous system similar to that seen in the acquired form. 

 


 


 

Chapter 7 : Tumours

INTRODUCTION

 A tumour or neoplasm is a purposeless growth that progresses without regard to the surrounding tissues or the requirement of the organism as a whole. Whilst forming a part of the body, a tumour and its cells seem to have escaped from the normal controlling influences of the body. Autonomy may be regarded as the most characteristic feature of a tumour. It behaves like a 
 parasite, drawing nourishment from the body, but subserving no useful function. 

Types of Tumours

 

Many

 

1.   Tumours of mesodermal connective tissue

 

 

 

(i)  Benign

 

 

 

 

(a) Fibroma

 

 

 

 

(b) Myxoma

 

 

 

(ii)  Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

Fibrosarcoma

American

 

2. Tumours of adipose tissue

 

 

 

(i)  Benign

 

 

 

 

Lipoma

 

 

 

(ii)  Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Liposarcoma

 

 

 

 

(b) Alveolar soft tissue sarcoma

Customers

 

3.   Tumours of cartilage and bone

 

 

 

(i)  Benign

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Osteoma

 

 

 

 

(b) Chondroma

 

 

 

(ii) Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Osteosarcoma

 

 

 

 

(b) Chondroma

 

 

 

 

(c) Osteoclastoma

May

 

4. Tumours of muscles

 

 

 

(i) Benign

 

 

 

 

 

Myoma

 

 

 

(ii) Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Leiomyosarcoma

 

 

 

 

(b) Rhabdomyosarcoma

Visit

 

5.  Tumours of vascular endothelium

 

 

 

(i) Benign

 

 

He

 

 

(a) Haemangioma

 

Got

 

 

(b) Glomangioma

 

Casual

 

 

(c) Chemodectoma

 

Leave

 

 

(d) Lymphangioma

 

 

 

(ii) Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

- Haemangiosarcoma

Every

 

6.  Tumours of the epithelium

 

 

 

(i) Benign

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Papilloma

 

 

 

 

(b) Adenoma

 

 

 

(ii) Malignant

 

 

 

 

 

Carcinoma

New

 

7.  Tumours of the neuro-ectoderm

 

Give

 

 

(a) Glioma

 

Some

 

 

(b) Symphathicoblastoma

 

Grapes

 

 

(c) Ganglionic neuroma

Monument

 

8.  Melanin-forming tumours

 

Senior

 

 

(a) Simple cutaneous melanoma

 

Medical

 

 

(b) Malignant melanoma

 

Officer

 

 

(c) Ocular melanoma

Listed

 

9.  Tumours of the leucocyte forming tissues

 

Ladies

 

 

(a) Lymphoma

 

Love

 

 

(b) Lymphosarcoma

 

Ripe

 

 

(c) Reticulosarcoma

 

Mangoes

 

 

(d) Myeloma

More

 

10.  Mixed tumours 

 

Cow

 

 

(a) Collision tumours 

 

May

 

 

(b) Metaplastic tumours

 

Eat

 

 

(c) Embryonal tumours

 

Tomato

 

 

(d) Teratomata

CAUSATION OF TUMOURS

Causation of tumours is an intricate question and not finally decided. It appears that two factors are responsible, an initiating agent and a promoting agent. The initiating agent starts the process while the promoting agent carries it on to maturity. The initiating agent is believed to produce an instant­aneous change in the cell, a somatic mutation, which however, does not manifest itself as neoplasia until the long continued action of the promoting agent renders the condition irreversi­ble. Urethane, when applied to the skin of the mouse will not produce an evident neoplasia, but when this is followed by the repea*LC.d application of croton oil a neoplasm jcvclops. I he croton oil is harmless unless the process has initiated by urethane, for it only promotes the proce-,s. The known factors causing tumours are enlisted below: 

Coming

 

1.  Chemical carcinogens 

 

 

 

(a) Hydrocarbons

 

Bangla

 

 

(i)                Benzpyrene (isolated from tar)

 

Desh

 

 

(ii)              Dibenzanthracene

 

Medical

 

 

(iii)            Methylcholanthrene (prepared from cholic acid)

 

Association

 

 

(iv)            Acetylacetaminofluorine

 

 

 

-          (b) Azo-dyes

 

 

 

 

-          Paradimethylaminoazobenzene (Butter yellow)

 

 

 

(c) Alkylating agents

 

 

 

 

(i)                Ethyleneimenes

 

 

 

 

(ii)              Epoxides

In

 

2. Ionizing radiation

Very

 

3. Viruses

 

 

 

(a)  D.N.A. viruses - Polyoma virus

 

 

 

(b)  R.N.A. virus - Rous Chicken Sarcoma virus

High

 

4. Hormones -Sex hormones

Emergency

 

5. Environment and occupation- Exposure to various carcinogens

Fig 7. 1: Sequential stages in Chemical carcinogenesis (left) in evolution of cancer (right)

SPREAD OF TUMOURS

The tumours may spread by the following methods: 

I

1. By infiltration

Live

2. By lymphatics

Behind

3. By blood vessels

National

4. Along natural passages

Skin

5. Through serous cavities

Institute

6. By inoculation

  1. Spread by infiltration. Spread of cancer cells through tissue spaces is one of the chief charac­teristics of malignant tumour. Cancer cells are amoeboid and motile. The cells of benign tumours and of normal tissues are incapable of movement because they are firmly anchored to one another by cell adhesiveness. Loss of adhesiveness in cancer cells is due to deficiency of calcium in the cell membrane. 

2. Lymphatic spread. The tumour cells can readily enter lymphatic channels. They may extend along 
these channels by permeation or they may be carried both to regional and distant lymph nodes by lymphatic embolism. Pulmonary metastasis from gastrointestinal cancer without the involve­ment of liver takes place by lymphatic spread. 

 

Fig. 7.2 : Spread of Cancer.

3. Spread by blood. Cancer cells may reach the blood either by way of the thoracic duct or by direct invasion of the blood vessels. The veins are invaded with great readiness but the arteries very rarely. Clumps of tumour cells may form emboli but they may not give rise to metastases owing to inability to become colonized at the site of impaction. 

Three groups of veins are chiefly invaded: 

(i) The portal system of veins is invaded by turnours of gastrointestinal tract and pancreas. Secondary tumours of the liver are, therefore, very common. 
(ii) Th e pulmonary veiqs are invaded not only by a primary bronchogenic carci­noma but also by metastatic growths in the lung. 
(iii)  Spread by natural passages. The vertebral system of veins is responsible for the very common involvement of the lumbar region of the spine in cancer of prostate. 

4. Spread by natural pagsages. Tumour cell may be carried along such passages as the bronchus, bowel and ureter. This explains the simultaneous occur­rence of the same type of tumour in the renal pelvis and the bladder. 

5. Spread through the serous cavities. The method known as transcoelomic spread is the explanation given for the frequent transfer of tumour cells from the stomach to the ovaries; small implatations on the peritoneum can often be traced between sto­mach and ovary. Malignant glial tumours shed cells into the ventricles and subarachnoid space, throughout which they may be carried by the cerebrospinal fluid and form m ultiple secondary growths. 
6. Spread by inoculation. The tumour cells may be inoculated into the surrounding tissue in an operation. 

MALIGNANT TUMOURS

Three characteristics of malignancy are: 
1. Invasion 
2. Metastasis 
3. Anaplasia. 

In addition the malignant tumours have the following features. However, the presence of all the features is not essential in a particular tumour: 

1. Recurrence 
2. Rapidity of growth 
3. Nuclear changes 
(i)  The nucleus becomes large and hyperchromatic. 
(ii)  Nucleolus large in proportion to the size of the nucleus. 
(iii)  Inorganic content of the nucleus is increased. 

4. Loss of polarity. Normally the epithelial cells are arranged with their long axes perpendicular to the surface of the sheet. In malignancy there is loss of normal polarity so that the cells now present a jumbled arrangement to the surface. 
 
 

Benign tumours

Malignant tumours 

1.  Structure

Structure often typical of the tissue of origin

Structure often atypical i.e. differentiation imperfect

2. Growth  (i) Rate 

Slow

Rapid

(ii) Mitoses

Few and normal

Numerous and abnormal 

(iii) Nuclei

Little altered

Enlarged; often irregular 

(iv) Nucleoli

Little altered

Usually enlarged. 

(v) Cytoplasmic basophilia

Slight

Marked

(vi) Haemorrhge and necrosis

Inconspicuous

Often extensive

(vii) End of growth

May come to standstill or retrogress

Growth rarely ceases; usually progresses to a fatal  termination 

3.  Boundaries (i) Intact capsule 

Frequent

Rare 

(ii) Local invasion

Never 

Very frequent 

(iii) Metastasis

Never 

Frequent

4.  Clinical result 

Dangerous only because of position, size or accidental complication

Dangerous because of spread. 

Types of Carcinoma

Gentle

1.  Glandular carcinoma

 

 

(i) Spheroidal cell carcinoma

 

 

(ii) Adenocarcinoma

Man

2.  Mucoid carcinoma

Selling

3. Squamous carcinoma

Bags

4. Basal carcinoma (Rodent ulcer)

Glandular Carcinoma

The growth may take origin from the acini of the glands or epithelium covering mucous surfaces or lining ducts. 

Spheroidal-cell carcinoma is the term applied when the cells are rounded or polyhedral in form and adhere together to form solid masses of various sizes. This is the most atypical form and the cells show no attempt to produce a gland like arrangement. 

In adenocarcinoma, the cells are more cubical or columnar and tend to form a more or less complete lining of the alveoli in which they lie. Thus, they produce, though imperfectly, a glandular struc­ture. The lining of the alveoli may be fairly regular in places, but usually there is evidence of excessive proliferation in the irregular folding and heaping up of the epithelial layer. The cancer cells may, at places, form papilliform processes (e.g., in lung and thyroid) or trabeculae (e.g., in liver). 

Fig 7.3 : Adenocarcinoma of Cancer

Adenocarcinorna is termed scirrhous when tl~.. mass is compact to give hard consistence. It is termed encephaloid when it forms a soft fungating mass. 

Mucoid Carcinoma

It is essentially carcinoma in which the cells form much mucin and then disintegrate to become fused with the mucoid material, no cells surviving. Such tumours are commonest in situations with abun­dant mucin forming cells, notably in the large intestine, biliary passages, stomach etc. The tissue of the tumour has a characteristic semitranslucent appearance; at places it may be softened and glue like. A constant feature is the formation of a large mass Extension to the distant lymph nodes is prevented by blockage of the lymphatics which mucoid material. 

Squamous Carcinoma

It is derived from the stratified squamous epithe­lium of the skin or of a mucous membrane, or form an epithelium which has undergone metaplasia into the squamous type, e.g., in bronchi, gall bladder, renal pelvis etc, It may also arise from the cellular inclusions of congenital origin, e.g., from bronchial clefts, dermoid cysts etc. 

Naked eye appearance. A squamous carcinoma appears first as indurated thickening of the skin epithelium or mucous membrane. Its growth is usually slow and margins badly defined. Ulceration generally occurs at an early stage and then the esion appears as a progressive ulcer with irregular nd indurated floor and margins. Continuous growth and ulceration go on until ultimately there may be extensive destruction of tissue, Haemo­rrhage from erosion or vessels is of common occurrence and occassionally a fatal result is produced by the implication of a large artery. 

Microscopic appearance. Squamous carcinoma begins as a thickening of the epithelial layers and downgrowth of the interpapillary processes. Such changes are common at the margin of any chronic ulcer and it is often difficult to say whether or not malignancy has supervened. After a time however, the epithelium penetrates deeply as branching processes which involve the tissue spaces and destroy intervening structures such as muscle. For a time cells form a continuous mass and the shape of the growth may be compared to an inverted cauliflower. Later, however, the cells become detached and wander in tissue spaces and into the lymphatics; they are thus carried to lymph nodes, where they produce secondary growths. Metastases may occur in internal organs but are rarer than in the case of glandular carcinoma. 

The deepest layer of the original epithelium is continuous with the epithelium on the outer aspect of the cell masses of tumour, while the superficial or squamous layer is continuous with the central parts of the tumour cell masses. Accordingly the cells towards the centre become somewhat flat­tened and concentrically arranged and ultimately undergo keratinization. Such concentric structures are common in well differentiated squamous carcinomata and are known as cell nests. These cell nests are prominent in squamous carcinomata of 'skin and tongue in certain situations, e.g., in the extrinsic tumours of the larynx and in the cervix uteri, these maybe almost absent. The centre of the cell nests may occassionally show a hyaline change as in tongue. Sometimes the cell nests may be invaded by polymorphonuclear leucocytes. 

Basal Cell Carcinoma

It is one of the commonest malignant tumours. It originates from the epidermis, chiefly in the face. Although it arises from the same epithelium as does the squamous carcinoma, it is very different tumour. It takes origin by downgrowths from the under surface of basal fayer. It is usually slow growing and spreads laterally rather than deeply. Much of the central area is lost by ulceration but the growing invasive edge of the tumour gives rise to the characteristic rolled edge. Its most remark­able feature is the extreme rarity of metastasis. 

 


 

 

Chapter 8 : Cardiovascular system

RHEUMATIC FEVER

Etiology
1. Age. Mostly in children and adolescents in the age group 5-16 years. 
2. Sex. Females predominate. 
3. Climate. Temperate climate with high humidity and low temperature. 
4. Socio-economic status. Unhygienic conditions, over-crowding and malnutrition predispose. 
5. Causative organism. P-haemolytic streptococci of Lancefield group A. 
6. History of tonsillitis or other nasopharyngeal B. Proliferative lesion infection 2-4 weeks before the onset. 

Pathogenesis
1. immunological reactivity to the products of causative organism sensitizes the fibrous tissue. 
2. The products also combine with connective tissue protein to form antigen which induces antibody production. 
3. The antigen-antibody reaction produces focal allergic necrosis and characteristic cellular response of collagen disease. 
4. The degenerated area gives staining reaction for fibrin. 
5. Degeneration is eventually followed by necrosis. 

Sites of Lesion

Hockey

1. Heart valves

Players’

2. Pericardium

Secretary

3. Synovial membrane of joints

Punished

4. Periarticular tissue

Some

5. Skin

Players

6. Pharynx

Pathology

 

A. Exudative and degenerative lesion

 

 

1. Fibrinoid lesion

 

 

2. Exudation of fibrin

 

B. Proliferative lesion

Radiology

 

1.  Rheumatic granuloma (Aschoff nodule)

Students

 

2.  Subcutaneous nodules

Were

 

3.  Widespread inflammatory exudate with large mononuclear cells

Here

 

4.  Healing and repair with fibrous tissue

Laboratory Diagnosis

Law

1. Leucocyte count raised

Examiner

2. E.S.R. elevated

Attached

3. Antistreptolysin O (ASO) titre elevated

A

4. Anaemia 

Casual

5. C-reactive protein elevated

Info

6. Isolation of causative organism

Jone's Criteria
Diagnosis of rheumatic fever may be made if at least two major criteria or one major criteria and two minor criteria are present. 

 

Major Criteria

Chief

 

1. Carditis

Police

 

2. Polyarthritis

Commissioner

 

3. Chorea

Examining

 

4. Erythema marginatum

Spy

 

5.  Subcutaneous nodules

 

Minor Criteria

Pay

 

1. Past history of rheumatic fever

And

 

2. Arthralgia

Fetch

 

3. Fever

Egg

 

4. ESR, C-reactive protein and leucocytes raised

Pakoda

 

5.  Prolonged PR interval

 

RHEUMATIC HEART DISEASE

Rheumatic fever affects all the three layers of heart viz pericardium, myocardium and endocardium. (pancarditis) 

Spread of Infection
1. From valve to valve through inter-valvular fibrosa and septum fibrosum. 
2. From valve to pericardium through fibrous pericardial wedge. 
3.  From pericardium to myocardium through subpericardial adipose. 
Valvular Lesions
Types 
1. Rheumatic nodule in endocardium of valve 
2. Diffuse thickening of cusps 
3. Rheumatoid nodules in endocardium of valve 
4. Mac Callum patch. 

Gross Appearance
Rheumatic nodule size. 1-3 cm in diameter. 
Colour. Grey. 
Arrangentent. Clusters of 2-3 nodules. 
Transparency. Translucent during early stages, completely opaque later. 
Consistence. Firm and adherent to cusps. 

Mac Callum patch. Rough, thickened patch on the posterior wall of the left auricle just above the mitral valve. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. Neovascularization. Proliferation of blood vessels 
2. Inflammatory cells aggregate around the new blood vessels 
3.  Oedema of the valve 
4.  Fibrous tissue proliferation 
5.. Degeneration followed by necrosis of endothelium covering the cusp along the line of closure 
6.  Roughening and subsequent thickening of the surface lining the valve 
7. Button hold or fish mouth opening caused by shortening of cardiac tendenae 
8.  Calcification of the affected cusp. 

Myocardial Lesions
Gross Appearance
1. Heart increased in weight from oedema, inflammation and, in advance cases, hypertrophy. 
2. Small, pale, oval or lemon shaped focal lesions (Aschoff bodies) visible in the heart wall be­hind posterior mitral cusp. 

Microscopic Appearance
Acute Stage
1. Inflammatory oedema of the interstitial connective tissue. 
2..Infiltration of connective tissue with fibroid and cellular exudate, mainly polymorphs. 
3. Aschoff body, which comprises hyaline necrosis of collagen bundles surrounded by a zone of endothelioid cells and lcucocytes. It often contains giant cells which are relatively small with fewer nuclei or a convoluted nucleus. 

 

Fig. 8.1. Rheumatic Myocarditis

Subacute Stage
1.  Polymorphs disappear giving way to lymphocytes and mononuclears 
2.  Oedema subsides with perivascular fibrosis 
3.  Aschoff bodies lie along the blood vessels. 

Pericardial Lesions (Acute Pericarditis)

Gross Appearance
1.  Sero-fibrinous, inflammation 
2.  Fluid exudate is small in amount, never purulent 
3. Fibrin deposited on both surfaces of pericardium (bread and butter appearance) 
4. 1-2 white patches of thickened pericardium 
5. Calcification 
6. Adherent pericardium. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Acute inflammatory activity, with an occasional Aschoff body in the subendothelial tissue. 
2. The surface endothelium is cast off, successive layers of fibrin are laid down. Subsequently, this becomes organized by invasion of the new vessels and fibroblasts. 
3. The inflammatory cells are mainly lymphocytes and plasma cells with occasional polymorphs. 

Aortic Lesions
Gross Appearance 
1.  Reddish elevation in the intima. 
2.  Aorta crossed by a series of ridges, above the aortic valve- 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Intima comprises cellular, vascular connective tissue. 
2.  Elastic fibres of the media are destroyed. Hydropic degeneration in muscle fibres. 
3. Adventitia shows masses of fibrinoid oedema, perivascular Aschoff body and connective tissue infiltration. 

BACTERIAL ENDOCARDITIS
(Infective endocarditis)

Classification

Service

 

1.  Subacute bacterial endocarditis

 

Acid

 

(i) Alternations in blood flow which induce jet effects and zones of turbulence with low pressure pockets

 

Fast

 

(ii)  Formation of sterile platelet-fibrin thrombi

 

Bacilli

 

(iii)  Bacteraemia

 

Enter

 

(iv)  Elevated titres of agglutinating antibodies for the infecting organism

 

Intestine

 

(v) Infecting organisms, Streptococcus viridans (95% cases), anaerobic streptococci and enterococci

And

 

2. Acute bacterial endocarditis

 

 

 

(i)  Occurs in an otherwise normal heart

 

 

 

(ii)  Infecting organism, Staphylococcus aureus (50-80%), pneumococcus, Streptococcus pyogenes

Education

 

3. Endocarditis associated with cardiac surgery

 

 

 

(a)  Early infection with

 

Same

 

 

(i) Staphylococcus epidermidis

 

Dame

 

 

(ii) Diphtheroids

 

Coming

 

 

(iii) Corynebacteria

 

 

 

(b)  Late infection as in subacute bacterial endocarditis

Enterprise

 

4. Endocarditis associated with drug addiction e.g. intravascular injection of heroin. The infecting organisms are :

 

Session

 

 

(i) Staphylococcus aureus (50%)

 

Court

 

 

(ii) Candida

 

Punishes

 

 

(iii) Pseudomonas

 

Every

 

 

(iv) Enterococci

 

Sinning

 

 

(v) Streptococcus viridians

 

Saint

 

 

(vi) Staphylococcus epidermidis

 

SUBACUTE BACTERIAL ENDOCARDITIS

Course. 6 weeks to several months 

Etiology. Infection occurs on previously damaged heart. 

Predisposing Factors

1. Rheumatic lesion 75-95% cases 
2. Congenital bicuspid aortic valve 
3. Age. Commonly 20-30 years. Any age may be 3. infarcts may lead to abscess formation 
4. Sex. Thrice commoner in males 
5. Upper respiratory tract infection 
6.  Tooth extraction and tonsillectomy. 

Causative Organisms

Streptococcus viridans (95% cases) 
Anaerobic streptococci 
Enterococci. 

Pathogenesis

1.  Alterations in blood flow which induce jet effects and zones of turbulence with low pressure pockets. 
2. Formation of sterile platelet fibrin thrombi 
3.  Bacteraemia 
4.  Elevated titres of agglutinating antibodies for the infective organism. 

Pathology

1.  Mitral valve is most often involved, aortic valve is involved less frequently. 
2. Tricuspid endocarditis is a rare condition amongst drug addicts and in patients with vascular catheters. 
3. Vegetations 
(i) Friable, bulky, bacteria-laden 
(ii) Most commonly on heart valves 
(iii)  May occur singly or multiply on one or more valves 
(iv)  A few millimeters in size 
(v) Do not encircle the entire free margins of valve leaflets (cf'rheumatic fever) Microscopically, the vegetations appear as irregular, amorphous, tangled mass of fibrin strands, platelets, blood cell debris and masses of organisms. 

Sequelae

1.  Fragmentation and embolism of vegetations may lead to myocardial infarction 
2. Infarcts of spleen, kidneys and brain 
3. Infarcts may lead to abscess formation. 
4.  Suppurative pericarditis may result from penetration of heart wall or by lymphatic permeation 
5. Interventricular septal defect, caused by burrowing infection 
6. Sudden valvular insufficiency 
7. Bacterial endaortitis 
8. Bacteraemia leading to infections of kidneys, spleen and brain 
9. Metastatic abscesses. Small petechial haemorrhages or microabscesses in the nail beds or skin. 

Laboratory Findings

1. Progressive microcytic hypochromic anaemia 

2.  Leucocyte count usually normal with raised polymorphs 

3.  Blood culture may reveal causative organism 

4.  Complement-fixation reactions, specific for causative organism 

5.  Rheumatoid factor present in later stages, in about half the patients. 

ACUTE BACTERIAL ENDOCARDITIS

Etiology

1.  Occurs most commonly in previously normal hearts. 

2. The commonest causative organism is Staphylococcus aureus. Pneumococcus and Strepto­coccus pyogenes are infrequently involved. 

Pathology
1.  Vegetations larger than in subacute bacterial endocarditis, may be several centimeters in size. 
2. Vegetations cause perforation of the underlying valve leaflet, or erosion of valve margin or chordae tendinae or both. 

Other changes and sequelae are same as in subacute bacterial endocarditis. 

MYOCARDIAL INFARCTION

Causes of Coronary Occlusion

1.  Atherosclerotic narrowing of coronary artery: 
(i) The main stem of left coronary artery and the first part of its anterior descending branch. 
(ii) The first portion of the right coronary artery. 
(iii) The beginning of the circumflex branch of the left coronary artery. 

2. Haemorrhage into an atheromatous plaque resulting in: 
(i)  Complete occlusion of the lumen by expansion of the atheroma. 
(ii)  Rupture of the atheroma and subsequent thrombus formation. 

3. Organization of a thrombus. 
4. Suphilitic aortitis. 
5. Embolus, from a vegetation on aortic valve. 
6. Effort and stress. 

Gross Appearance

1. The area involved includes: 
(i)  Anterior part of interventricular septum 
(ii)  Apex 
(iii) Anterior part of wall of the left ventricle. (Right ventricle generally escapes because of collateral circulation established by Thebasian vessels), 

2. The infareted area is irregular in shape, yellow, and often surrounded by a red zone. 

3. The larger areas may undergo softening lead­ing to rupture of the heart. 

4. If the endocardial surface is involved, a mural thrombus will be formed on the necrotic area; if pericardial surface is involved, there will be a patch of pericarditis. 

5. Embolism, sometimes fatal, may occur as a result of mural thrombus becoming detached. 

6. Gradually infarct becomes replaced by the fib­rous tissue, so that it is represented by a white patch of scar visible both on the endocardial and on the cut surface with corresponding thinning of the wall of ventricle. 

Microscopic Appearance

1-6 hours
1. Stretching and waviness of myocardial fibres 
2. Nuclei elongated 
3. Cytoplasm excessively eosinophilic 
4.  Glycogen content low. 

6-24 hours
1. Evidence of coagulation necrosis 
2. Interstitial -oedema 
3. Fresh haemorrhage 
4.  Scant marginal eosinophilic exudation. 

1- 7 days
1. Neutrophilic exudation increased 
2. Dead fibres become more coagulated 
3. Nuclei become pyknotic and disappear 
4. Cross-striations becomes indistinct 
5.  Cytoplasm filled with finely dispersed fat droplets 
6.  Fibrovascular ingrowth at the margins toward the end of first week. 

1-6 weeks

Fibrovascular tissue entirely replaces the area of necrosis; in large infarcts this process may take several months, 

 

Fig. 8.2. Infarct of Myocardium (Second week).

  B. Biochemical Changes
1.  Succinic dehydrogenase. May be reduced as early as two hours after the onset of acute symptoms and is soon lost completely. 
2.  Serum glutamic oxaloacetic transaminase (SGOT). It rises 2-20 times with 24 hours; returns to normal in 3-6 days. 
3.  Loss of glycogen. It is the earliest demonstrable microscopic change. 

HEART IN HYPERTENSION

Gross Appearapce

Compensated Stage
1.  Heart increased in size and weight 
2.  Left ventricular wall thickened 
3.  Volume of left ventricular chamber diminished (concentric hypertrophy). 

Decompensated Stage
1.  Heart wall stretched 
2.  Thickness of left ventricular wall diminished; chamber becomes dilated 
3.  Hypertrophy and dilatation of all heart chambers 
4. Frequently, evidence of associated atherosclerosis. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Individual fibres healthy with no sign of deizeneration 

2.  Nuclei often elongated; some assume bizarre shape. 

CONGENITAL HEART DISEASE

Classification

 

A. Acyanotic group

 

Paying

 

1. Patent ductus arteriosus

And

 

2. Atrial septal defects

Valued

 

3. Ventricular septal defects

Customers

 

4. Coarctation of aorta

Enter

 

5. Ebstein's disease

 

B. Cyanotic group

 

A

 

1. Aortic bulb malformations

Timely

 

2. Transposition of great vessels

Entry

 

3. Truncus atresia

 

 

4. Tricuspid atresia

 

 

5. Aortic atresia

 

 

6. Pulmonary stenosis

 

 

7. Anomalies of venous return

Patent Ductus Arteriosus

1.  Twice more common in females 
2.  Blood flows from aorta into the pulmonary artery 
3.  No cyanosis 
4. Condition is compatible with a long and active life; in majority of cases, however, life expectation is considerably shortened 
5.  Common complication is development of  Streptococcus viridans endarteritis. 

Atrial Septal Defects

1.  Commonest and least important congenital cardiac abnormality 
2.  Four times more common in females 
3.  Right atrium and right ventricle dilated and hypertrophied 
4.  Enormous dilatation of pulmonary artery 
5.  Aorta small and hypoplastic 
6.  No cyanosis till cardiac failure sets in; patient may live for 30-50 years. 

Lutenbacher's Disease

Combination of atrial septal defect with mitral stenosis (congenital or rheumatic). Unlike in isolated mitral stenosis, left atrium is not dilated as the blood passes into the right atrium. 

Ventricular Septal Defect (Rogers' Disease)

1.  Right ventricular hypertrophy, dilatation and  failure 
2.  Cyanosis absent except in terminal stages 
3.  Left ventricle also dilated. 

Coarctation of Aorta

Infantile Type

1.  Constriction proximal to ductus, between ductus and subclavian artery 
2.  Ductus remains widely patent 
3.  Commonly associated with other cardiac anomalies 
4.  Not compatible with continued life; found in stillborns and young infants. 

Adult Type

1.  The constriction is at or just distal to the ductus, which is obliterated 
2.  Other anomalies are rare 
3.  Arterial hypertension in the upper part of the body; large pulse volume in the arm and small in the leg; palpable or visible vessels along dorsal border and angle of scapula. 

Ebstein's Disease

1.  Downward displacement of the tricuspid valve 
2.  Upper part of right ventricle becomes functional part of right atrium 
3.  No cyanosis, course of circulation is normal. 

Malformation of Aortic Bulb 

1.  Septum of aortic bulb is pushed to the right 
2.  Aorta is abnormally large and arises partly from the right ventricle 
3.  Usually associated with ventricular septal defect and pulmonary stenosis 
4. Hypertrophy of right ventricle 
5. Foramen ovale remains open and may be of considerable size. 

Tetrology of Fallot
1. High ventricular septal defect 
2. Pulmonary stenosis 
3. Dextraposed over-riding aorta 
4.  Right ventricular hypertrophy. 

Eisenmenger's Complex
1. High ventricular septal defect 
2. Dextraposed over-riding aorta 
3.  Right ventricular hypertrophy. 

Tranposition of Great Vesseis

1.  Results from failure of normal spiral twisting in aortic bulb. 

2. Pulmonary artery arises from left ventricle, aorta arises from right ventricle. 

3. Condition is incompatible with extrauterine life but may be compensated for a time by: 
(i) Patent ductus arteriosus (ii) Patent foramen ovale (iii) Atrial septal defect (iv) Ventricular septal defect. 

Truncus Arteriosus

1. Aorta and pulmonary artery arise from a common stem vessel, truncus arteriosus. 

2. Truncus arises from both the ventricles, overriding a ventricular septal defect; interventri­c~ilar septum may occasionally be absent. 

3. Atrial septal defect commonly present. 

Tricuspid Atresia

1.  Right ventricle under-developed; absent in  extreme cases. 
2. Atrial septal defect. 
3. Pulmonary artery small, arising from under-developed right ventricle. 
4. Usually blood reaches lungs from the aorta by a patent ductus arteriosus. 

Aortic Atresia

1.  Aortic orifice hypoplastic 
2.  Ascending aorta hypoplastic or atretic 
3.  Left ventricle poorly developed or absent Pathogenesis 
4.  Circulation of blood. Left atrium - right 
 atrium --> right ventricle --> pulmonary artery --> ductus arteriosus --> aorta. 

Pulmonary Stenosis

1. Stenosis of pulmonary valve 
2. Right ventricle hypertrophied 
3. Often atrial septal defect. 

Anomalies of Venous Return

1.  Superior vena cava or inferior vena cava or both may open into left atrium. 
2.  Some of the pulmonary veins may open into the right atrium. 

ARTERIOSCLEROSIS

Types of Arteriosclerosis

1.  Atherosclerosis (Atheroma) 
2.  Monckeberg~s sclerosis (Calcification of media) 
3.  Diffuse arteriolar sclerosis (Diffuse hyperplastic sclerosis). 

ATHEROSCLEROSIS

Etiology

A

 

1. Age. The incidence increases with age, upto 85 years.

Second

 

2. Sex. Atherosclerosis is more common in males, till the age of 75-85 years, beyond which the incidence is equal. It is rare in premenopausal women. Incidence in women increases with heavy smoking and prolonged oral contraceptive therapy. 

Floor

 

3. Familial predisposition. It is more due to com­mon predisposing factors in the family rather than any hereditary predisposition. 

Resident

 

4.  Risk factors

 

He

 

(i) Hyperlipidaemia

 

Has

 

(ii) Hypertension

 

Come

 

(iii) Cigarette smoking

 

Darling

 

(iv) Diabetes mellitus

Pathogenesis

1. Imbibition of lipids. Results from lipaemia caused by high fat content of the food. High blood cholesterol level predisposes to atherosclerosis in cases of. 
(i) Diabetes mellitus 
(ii) Nephrotic syndrome (iii) Myxoedema 
(iv) Xanthomatosis 

2. Changes in the vessel wall. Such changes may determine localisation of lesion. Degeneration of the mucopolysachharides of ground substance of intima may lead to deposition of lipids. Capillary haemorrhage resulting from vascularisation of the lesion provides an abundant supply of lipids. 

3. Thrombosis. Thrombotic incrustations of the intima occur with material derived from the blood, the platelets in early stages and the fibrin deposits later. The lesions are superficial to begin with but later become incorporated in the intima. 


 


 

Fig. 8.3. Coronary artery severely narrowed by atheroma

ig. 8.4. Atheroma of Aorta 

(Atheromatous plaques 
in the central zone)

Fig. 8.5. Atherosclerosis

F. 

Gross Appearance

1.  The most severe changes are seen in aorta, particularly the abdominal aorta; more marked in descending than ascending aorta; also marked around mouths of intercostal and lumbar arteries. 

2. Initially, fatty degeneration of intima in the form of irregular yellowish patches or streaks often arranged in a longitudinal direction; occasionally erosion of surface may occur. 

3. Later, these patches become distinctly raised, increase in extent, thickness and become confluent. 

4. if a well formed patch is incised, yellowish pultaccous material is found in deeper part of intima, next to media, being separated from the lumen by connective tissue layer, at times thick making the patch firm and of wheatish colour on surface view. 

5. At a later stage, the covering of the patch may give way and the pultaceous material may be discharged into the blood stream; an atheromatous ulcer is thus formed. 

6.  The affected aorta undergoes dilatation and occasionally aneurysm follows: 

Microscopic Appearance

J. Sudanophilic lipid accumulates in the stellate cells of intima, in macrophages, and endothelial cells. 
2.  Later, the musculoelastic layers of intima may be saturated with extracellular lipid; the laminae become swollen, degenerated and merge into the accumulation of fatty material. 
3.  The superficial part of the patch is composed of thin laminae of connective tissue with lipid storing cells between them. 
4.  The internal elastic lamina becomes greatly stretched and later breaks up into irregular fragments and granules. 

Effects
1.  Aneurysm 
2.  Thrombosis and embolism 
3.  Liriche syndrome 
4.  Ischaemic atrophy and fibrosis of the myocardium 
5.  Cerebral sclerosis and atrophy 
6.  Infarction 
7.  Haemorrhage. 

Monckeberg's Sclerosis

Affects mainly the vessels of the limbs; exampla,, are pipestem radials and tortuous, prominent temporals. It is a senile degenerative condition unrelated to hypertension. 

Gross Appearance

1.  Fatty degeneration of media 
2.  Calcium deposited in the degenerated tissue; vessel becomes hard and brittle. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. The muscle fibres undergo fatty change with degeneration, fragmentation and deposition of lime salts, which may be in the form of fine granules or large masses. Rarely bone with bone marrow may be detected. 

 

Fig. 8.6. Monckeberg's sclerosis.

2. other coats are often normal; atheroma is often associated producing marked occlusion as seen in senile and diabetic gangrene of leg. 

Diffuse Hyperplastic Sclerosis

Generalised hypertrophy of arterial wall with subsequent fibrous replacement; caused by hypertension; also termed arreriolosclerosis. 

GrossAppearance

1.  The arterial wall is firmer and thicker 
2.  The arteries are longer and tortuous 
3. The lumen is wider except in minute branches where it is narrow owing to thickening of intima 
4.  The condition is generalised but renal and mesenteric arteries are affected more 
5.  Progressive hypertrophy of left ventricle; later when heart begins to fail dilatation also occurs. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. Hypertrophy and hyperplasia of the circular muscle fibres of media and longitudinal muscle fibres of the intima next to internal elastic lamina. 
2. Distinct fibrosis of the media as muscle fibres are partially replaced by fibrous tissue. 
3. Internal elastic lamina becomes thickened; very often new laminae can be seen in the process of being split off. 
4. The elastic tissue in other coats also increased. 

ANEURYSMS

An aneurysm is a space or sac formed by the widening or extension of the lumen of an artery and containing blood or clot. 

Classification

 

A. Depending upon the nature of aneurysm

 

 

1. True aneurysm. One formed by slow dilatation of an artery and enclosed within the stretched vessel wall or when this is no longer recognizable, the surrounding connective tissue.

 

 

2. False aneurysm. One produced by rupture of the vessel, the blood or clot being enclosed from the start by the surrounding tissues. 

 

B.  Depending upon the morphology of the aneurysm

Snail

 

1. Saccular aneurysm

Can

 

2. Cylinderical aneurysm

Fight

 

3. Fusiform aneurysm

Cat

 

4. Cirsoid aneurysm

And

 

5. Arteriovenous fistula

Attack

 

6. Arteriovenous communication

Dog

 

7. Dissecting aneurysm

 

C. Depending upon pathology of aneurysm

 

 

1. Syphilitic aneurysm

 

 

2. Atheromatous aneurysm

 

 

3. Dissecting aneurysm

 

 

4. Infective aneurysm

 

 

5. Cerebral aneurysm

 

 

6. Traumatic aneurysm 

 

 

7. Racemose aneurysm

Syphilitic Aneurysm

Etiology
1.  Manifestation of tertiary stage of syphilis 
2.  Occurs usually at 40-50 years of age 
 
 

Fig 8.7. Types of aneurysm

3.  Commonest sites are: 
 (i) Aortic arch 
 (ii) Thoracic aorta 
(iii) Main branches of aortic arch. 

Effects

1. Pressure on surrounding structures leads to syndrome of superior mediastinal compres­sion; the great veins may be displaced and undergo thrombosis resulting in congestion of the head and neck, and opening of collateral channels. 
2. Dysphagia due to pressure on oesophagus. 
3.  Retention pneumonia due to pressure on bronchus. 
4.  Paralysis of left vocal cord due to affection of recurrent laryngeal nerve. 
5.  Erosion of the body of vertebrae. 
6.  Rupture into a cavity or chest wall. 

Atheromatous Aneurysm

Etiology 

1.  Occurs after 50 years of age. 
2. Forms as a result of penetration of atheromatous patches or damage from calcified plaques impinging on the media. 
3. Affects mainly abdominal aorta. 

Effects
1.  Rupture with retroperitoneal haemorrhage leading to death. 

2.  Thrombosis of aorta or its branches producing ischaemia of legs, kidneys, etc. 

3. Pressure effects not marked. 

Dissecting Aneurysm

1.  Commonest after 50 years of age. 
2. Results from incomplew rupture of aorta due to degenerative and cystic changes in the media. 
3. Elastica and muscle replaced by metachromatic mucoid substance (Erdheins medial degeneration). 
4.  Small areas of necrosis with softening (medionecrosis). 

Effects

1. In rupture shortly above the aortic cusps, blood commonly passes backwards and within a few hours enters the pericardial sac causing death. Intrapericardial rupture may be preceded by signs of coronary occlusion from pressure upon these vessels at their origin. 

2. In rupture distal to ductus arteriosus, the blood may flow through a new channel from the aperture of entry to the point of re-entry in the lower abdominal aorta when the patient survives for some time. Occasionally a dissecting aneurysm may remain localised. 

Infective Aneurysm

Etiology
Occurs at the beginning of the aorta as a result of direct extension of the organism from vegetations in bacterial endocarditis, mainly the staphylococcal type. 

Effects 
1.  Cerebral haemorrhage 
2.  Cerebral thrombosis 
3.  Pulmonary haemorrhaec. 

Cerebral Aneurysm

Etiology

1.  Common site is circle of Willis and its branches 
2.  Occurs at all ages 
3.  Caused by congenital weakness of the arterial wall 
4.  At times, found in apparently normal brain. 

Effects

1.  Subarachnoid haemorrhage 
2.  Intracerebral haemorrhage. 

Traumatic Aneurysm

Caused by injury to the vessel wall by a stab or bullet wound, or by spicule of fractured bone. 

Racemose Aneurysm

1. A form of arteriovenous fistula. 

2. Appears as a pulsatile swelling consisting of Causative organisms. Pyogenic bacteria, syphilis, tortuous and dilated arteries and veins in tuberculosis, viruses, fungi, parasites. intercommunication. 
3.  Common in scalp with atrophy of underlying bone. 

4. Results from contusion of scalp; sometimes congenital. 

ARTERITIS

Etiology 

Indian

 

 

A. Infectious arteritis

 

People

 

 

1. Pyogenic infection

 

Set

 

 

2. Syphilis

 

To

 

 

3. Tuberculosis

 

Visit

 

 

4. Viruses

 

Fauzia

 

 

5. Fungi

 

Palace

 

 

6. Parasites

Tennis

 

 

B. Traumatic arteritis

 

Indian

 

 

1. Irradiation

 

Tennis

 

 

2. Trauma

 

Company

 

 

3. Chemicals

 

Vellore

 

 

4. Vascular toxins

Company

 

 

C. Noninfectious necrotizing arteritis

 

People

 

 

1. Polyarteritis nodosa

 

Hung

 

 

2. Hypersensitivity angitis

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Henoch-Schonlein purpura 

 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Essential mixed cryoglobulinaemia

 

 

 

 

 

(iii) Associated with malignancy

 

 

 

 

 

(iv)  Connective tissue disorders

 

 

Same

 

 

 

a. Systemic lupus erythematosus

 

 

Rascals

 

 

 

b. Rheumaioid arthritis

 

 

Did

 

 

 

c. Dermatomyositis

 

 

Raid

 

 

 

d. Rheumatic fever

 

 

Salon

 

 

 

e. Scleroderma

 

With

 

 

3. Wegener's granulomatosis

 

T

 

 

4. Temporal arteritis

 

T

 

 

5. Takayasu's arteritis

 

T [3 Trucks]

 

 

6. Thromboangitis obliterans

INFECTIOUS ARTERITIS

Causative organisms. Pyogenic bacteria, syphilis, tuberculosis, viruses, fungi, parasites. 

Modes of Infection

A.  Direct invasion from: 
1. Bacterial pneumonia 
2. Caseous tuberculous reactions 
3. Abscesses 
4. Meningitis. 

B. Haematogenous spread. Infective endaortitis results from bacterial endocarditis or septicaemia. 

Pathology
1.  Oedema, fibrin precipitation and leucocytic infiltration in the affected arterial wall. 
2. Endothelial surface may be covered with exudate. This predisposes to intravascular thrombosis or rupture of artery. 
3. Inflammation usually extends to perivascular tissues. 
4. In prolonged cases, fibroplastic scarring, which may cause narrowing or total oblitera­tion of lumen. 

POLYARTERITIS NODOSA

Etiology

1.  Collagen disease caused by hypersensitivity. 
2.  Asthma may precede or may develop during the course of disease. 
3. Hypersensitivity factor is supported by the fact that identical lesions have been found in cases of serum sickness and hypersensitivity to sulphonamides. 

Gross Appearance

1.  Mainly affects arteries of gastrointestinal tract, kidney and heart. However, brain, lung and skin may also be affected. 
2.  Innumerable number of inflammatory nodules scattered along the artery like peas in a pod. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Increased permeability of the vessel wall. 
2.  The earliest change is oedema and escape of fibrinogen into the wall with formation of fibrin. 
3.  Fibrinoid necrosis of media, later of other coats. 
4. Fragmentation of elastica predisposing to aneurysm formation. 
5. Infiltration of all coats, initially by polymorphs and eosinopbils, later by lymphocytes. 
6. Involvement of intima resulting in small infarcts in heart, kidneys and other organs, and diffuse changes in renal parenchyma resembling glomerulonephritis 

 

Fig 8.8. Polyarteritis nodosa

Effects

Aligarh

1.  Acute abdominal symptoms, due to involvement of mesenteric arteries

Medicos

2.  Muscular pain

Association

3.  Albuminuria and haematuria, due to involvement of renal arteries

New

4.  Neuritic pains

Delhi

5.  Death due to ruptured aneurysm

 

TEMPORAL ARTERITIS
(Giant CeIlAitefitis)

1. Chronic inflammatory process involving temporal arteries of elderly persons, extending to arteries of scalp and face. 
2. Etiology not known. 
3. Bears close resemblance to polyarteritis nodosa, a hypersensitivity condition. 

Gross Appearance

1. In addition to temporal arteries, the lesions are also present in aorta, radial, subclavian, femoral, coronary, renal, mesenteric and retinal arteries. 

2. The vessel can.be felt as cord like swelling. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Inflammation spreads from adventitia to media. 
2. Marked thickening of the intima due to formation of a zone of loose cellular connective tissue 
3. Vessel wall thickened; thrombosis may occur. 
4.  Foreign body giant cells in response to disintegration of elastica. 
5.  Eosinophils numerous. 

AORTIC ARCH SYNDROME
(Takaysu SyndromelPalseless disease)

Etiology

1.  Predominantly a disease of young women in the reproductive years (young female arteritis). 
2.  Probably hyperergic in character. 
 

Gross Appearance

1.  Thickening of the wall of arch of aorta and of the origin of main vessels arising from it. 
2.  Thrombosis. 

Microscopic Appearance

Same as in temporal (giant cell) arteritis; hence also called giant cell aortitis. 

ENDARTERITIS OBLITERANS

Etiology 

1. Atherosclerosis involving the muscular arteries of lower extremities, with associated thrombosis. 
2. May be seen in small arteries in areas of chronic inflammation, e.g., adjacent to the tuberculous cavities of the lung or in the base of peptic ulcer. 
3. Also occurs in the blood vessels of a region where active circulation is no longer needed as in: 
(i)  Hypogastric arteries and ductus arteriosus after birth 
(ii)  Arteries of uterus and ovaries in old age 
(iii)  Uterine arteries after pregnancy. 

Pathology

1. Obliteration or narrowing of arterial lumen due to formation of a mass of well vascularised concentric laminae of cellular connective tissue in intima. 


 

Fig. 8.9. Endarteritis obliterans. 

2. New elastic tissue is laid down independently of internal elastic lamina and may appear as a layer under the endothelium or as a number of small new laminae at various points in the intima. 

CARDIOVASCULAR SYPHILIS

Types of Syphilitic Lesions

1.  Lesions in the heart 
 (i) Aortic incompetence 
 (ii) Myocardial ischaemia 
 (ii) Gumma. 

2. Lesions in the arteries

(i) Endarteritis

(ii) Mesaortitis

(iii) Aneurysm. 

Lesions in the Heart

Incompetence of the aortic valve is the commonest form and is due to involvement of cusps or the valve ring. The cusps are elongated and pendulous but do not become adherent or calcify. The mitral valve is not affected but secondary incompetence may result from left ventricular dilatation. 

Myocardial ischaemia may follow narrowing of the orifices of the coronary arteries by intimal fibrous plaques formed over areas of mesaortitis or by cicatericial contraction of healing lesions. This results in diffuse myocardial fibrosis and angina pectoris, but myocardial infarction is rare. Death is oftensudden. 

Gumma of the heart is very rare. It forms a tumour like mass in the wall of a ventricle or in the interatrial septum where it may cause heart block. It is found in both congenital and acquired forms of the disease. 

Interstitial inyocarditis occurs in congenital syphilis and spirochaetes are often numerous occurring in clumps throughout the cardiac muscle. There is variable amount of fibrous tissue proliferation around them. 
Cardio-vascular Svstern 93 

Lesions in Arteries

Syphilitic endarteritis and periarteritis occur in small arteries. There is intimal and adventitial fibrosis associated with infiltration of lymphocytes and plasma cells around them. These changes are due to presence of treponemata in the adventitia. In some cases the change is diffuse and a number of vessels show general thickening, while in others it is of a patchy or nodular type. 

Syphilitic Aortitis

Gross Appearance 
1.  The first visible lesions are greyish white, transluscent areas of thickening in the intima of considerable extent and with little tendency to degenerate. 
2. Latter they extend and fuse together forming areas with wavy or slightly wrinkled surface; whilst intima in the parts between appears healthy. 
3.  At places absorption of the tissue may occur with formation of stellate scars. 
4.  At times, localised depressions which are potential aneurysms. 
 5. At later period of life, yellow patches of atheroma, often in a severe form. 
6.  Commonest site is aortic arch; the part immediately above aortic valve is involved first; infrequent in abdominal aorta. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Earliest change is cellular infiltration around vasa vasorum in the adventitia attended by periarteritis and endarteritis. 
2. Infiltration extends to media and at places widens out into irregular cellular areas with formation of new thin-walled blood vessels. 
3. This leads to breaks or windows in the elastic fibres. 
4. The elastic tissue is usually absorbed but gummatous necrosis may occur. 
5. At a later period, cellular infiltration is followed by fibrous patches in the media in which no muscle or elastic tissue is present. 
6. In the intima overlying these medial lesions, the connective tissue is increased and swollen and new vessels often extend from t)ie media usually without cellular infiltration present in other coats. 
7. Intimal thickening is probably compensatory, secondary to the thickening of media, and not a part of the syphilitic lesion proper. 


 

Syphilitic aortitis 

Atheroma 

1. Site of affection: 

Commonest in the arch of aorta. 

Commonest in the lower part of aorta. 

2.  Site of lesion: 

Primarily media is involved; Intima may be secondarily involved. 

Primarily intima is involved; Media shows little or no change. 

TUMOURS

The tumours arising from the blood vessels are: 

1. Haemangioma 
2. Sclerosing Haemangioma 
3. Haemangio-endothelioma 
4. Haemangiopericytoma 
5. Kaposi's sarcoma. 

1.  Haemangioma

It is of two types: 
(i) Capillary haemangioma. It is a network of newly formed capillaries filled with blood. The neoplasm affects only one segment of a vessel, from which buds of endothelium grow out. and form new vessels. The cells may proliferate to such an extent that they may obliterate the lumen. The common site is the skin, but it may occur in the mucous membrane of the nose, lip, tongue, gum, or rectum, in which there may be severe haemorrhage. 
(ii) Cavernous haemangionia. It is very less common and has the structure of erectile tissue. It consists of large blood spaces or sinuses lined with endothelium. The common site is liver, where it may be multiple. It is also found in the skin especially on the lip, where it forms a raised mass, the overlying skin generally shows a bluish tinge and a gentle pressure may succeed in emptying the tumour. It may infiltrate the subcutaneous tissue and underlying muscles. 

2. Sclerosing Haemangioma

The capillaries become partially or completely obliterated, while only segregated groups of endothelial cells remain. It may be difficult or impossible to determine the vascular origin of such a lesion. 

Microscopically three different elements may be present in varying proportion: 
(i) Spindle shaped cells arranged either in tight curlicues or grouped as fasciculi; the later arrangement suggesting a neurofibroma. 
(ii)  Foamy macrophages filled with lipid. 
(iii) Haemosiderin pigment also contained for the most part within phagocytic cells. The pigment may be so abundant as to be mistaken for melanin. 

The histiocytes may fuse to form foreign body giant cells. Both haemosiderin and the lipid may be presumed to be the result of haemorrhage from capillaries undergoing destruction. 

3. Haemangio-endothelioma

It is a true neoplasm of the vascular endothelium. It may be benign or malignant. 

Benign haemangio-endothelioma occurs chiefly in the skin but may occasionally be found in the viscera, especially the liver and spleen. It forms well circumscribed firm mass, a few centimetres in diameter and reddish grey in colour. Microscopically it consists of masses and sheets of spindle shaped endothelial cells, uniform in size and appearance, with large vascular spaces surrounded by these masses of cells. 

Malignant haemangio-endotlielioma, also called haemangio-endotheliosarcoma, may occur any­where in the body. It forms a large, pale, soft mass with ill defined margins, and frequent central areas of necrotic softening and haemorrhage. Microscopically it shows the familiar malignant picture of cellular pleomorphism, anaplasia and numerous mitoses. The tumour is locally invasive and spread takes place by the blood stream, with the formation of distant metastases. 

4. Haemangiopericytoma

In this tumour, the cells, derived from pericytes, lie outside the vascular sheath and are closely packed about the numerous capillary sized vessels which are lined by normal endothelium. The neoplastic pericytes usually resemble epithelium, but it they become spindle shaped, haemangiopericytoma may easily be mistaken for a vascular fibrosarcoma or leiomyosarcoma. 

The tumour occurs most often in the extremities and is slow growing and painless. 

5. Kaposi's Sascoma

This very rare lesion is also known as idiopathic multiple haemorrhagic sarcoma. Multiple bluish. red patches occur in the skin and occasionally in viscera. the disease is of long duration. At first the skin lesions may resemble capillary haemangiomas but in the course of time, they become cellular, neoplastic and invasive. 

 


 

 

Chapter 9 : Urinary system

ACUTE GLOMERULONEPHRITIS

Etiology

1. Secondary to infection in some site of the body; commonest cause is haemolytic strepto­coccal infection of the respiratory tract, other organisms may be pneumococcus, or Streptococcus viridans. 
2.  Nephritic symptoms appear 7-21 days after the onset of infection. 
3. May be associated with tonsillitis, dental sepsis, cervical adenitis, parotitis, subacute bacterial endocarditis, scarlet fever, measles, smallpox, diphtheria. 

Gross Appearance
1. Kidney is enlarged, sometimes considerably 
2. Consistence reduced 
3. Capsule tense, strips with ease 
4. Outer surface smooth, pale grey or red, mottled 
5. Cuts with reduced resistance. 

Cut Surface
1. Buldging, soft and moist. 
2. May bleed freely, depending upon the degree of accompanying hyperaemia. 
3. Cortex moderately or considerably thickened. 
4. Striations indistinct or broken. 
5. Glomeruli, appear as tiny white spots giving cortex a sanded appearance. 
6.  Pyramids may be slightly swollen, but are practically normal. 
7.  The peripelvic fat and pelvis normal. 

Microscopic Appearance

Tubular Lesions

1.  Retrogressive changes in tubular epithelium, affecting particularly that of proximal convoluted tubules. 
 (i) Cloudly swelling 
 (ii) Fatty degeneration 
 (iii) Hydropic degeneration 
 (iv) Hyaline degeneration 
 (v) Necrosis. 

2. Desquamative nephritis. Excessive desqua­mation of the degenerated and necrotic epithelium. 
3. Granular albuminous precipitate in the tubules and in the subcapsular space of glomerulus. 
4. Hyaline casts in the tubules; may show adherance of epithelium, leucocytes, or erythrocytes. 
5. Finely or coarsely granular epithelial, leuco­cytic, blood and fibrin casts may be observed. 
6. Hyperaemia and interstitial oedema. 
7. Occasionally, slight infiltration of lymphocytes and plasma cells. 

Glomerular Lesions

Glomerular lesions may of three types. 

A. Acute degenerative glomerulitis

1. Blood in the subcapsular space and adjacent tubules; resulting from deterioration of the cells of capillary loops. 
2.  Glomerular lesions not widespread. 

B. Acute exudative glomerulitis
1. Non-suppurative lesion. 
2. Polymorphs present in the tuft, subcapsurar space and tubules. 
3. Rarely, tuft contains tiny abscesses.. 
4. Endothelial cells of capillaries swollen altering the glomerular function. 
5. Fibrin may be deposited in subcapsular space, often with blood. 

C. Acute proliferative glomerulitis 

Most common type may be of two forms: 

1. Intracapillary form: The entire tuft is consider­ably enlarged and occupies the entire capsular space. The capillary loose are free of blood, due to swelling and proliferation of the capillary endothelium. Occasionally, a few polymorphs may be observed in the capillary loops and interstitial connective tissue. 

2. Extracapillary or subcapsular form: Swelling or proliferation of the epithelium underlying the cap­sule of Bowman. The mass of cells may form a circular rim around the glomeruli or a crescentic mass. 

SUBACUTE GLOMERULONEPHRITIS

Gross Appearance
(Large white kidney) 

1.  Enlarged, slightly or considerably 
2.  Capsule strips easily 
3.  Exposed surface is smooth and pale. 

Cut Surface

1.  Marked swelling and pallor of the cortex 
2.  Pyramids unusually dark 
3.  Consistence soft. 

Microscopic Appeamnce

1.  Glomeruli enlarged 3-4 times; without blood. 
2.  Thickening of the capillary basement membrane (membranous glomerulonephritis). 
3. Erythrocytes, desquamaed epithelium, albu­min and fibrin aceumulato in subcapsular space; usually confined to one part (epithelial crescent). 

 

Fig. 9.1. Acute proliferative glomerulonephritis 
1. Glomeruli lose circular shape 
2. Tufts encroaching the tubules 
3. Increased cellularity

Fig. 9.2. Subacute glomerulonephritis

Fig. 9.3. Chronic glomerulonephritis

4. Degenerative changes in the tubules due to lack of blood supply to medullary portion. 
5. Cloudy swelling, fatty degeneration, or necrosis in convoluted tubules. 
6. Collections of small round cells in the interstital tissue. 

CHRONIC GLOMERULONEPHRITIS

 

Gross Appearance

Sri

 

1.  Size initially normal; later shrunken with granular surface

Ram

 

2.  Red, pale or mottled with yellow foci

College

 

3.  Cuts with increased resistance

 

Cut Surface

Few

 

1.  Flat; in advanced cases retracts and is firm

College

 

2.  Cortex narrowed; striations obscure

Boys

 

3.  Border between cortex and medulla ill-defined

Giving

 

4.  Glomeruli mostly white

Mercy

 

5.  Medulla narrowed but less than cortex

Petition

 

6.  Peripelvic fat increased in amount

Punished

 

7.  Pelvic mucosa normal 

Again

 

8.  Arteries often sclerotic

 Microscopic Appearance

1.  Renal archetecture completely lost. 
2.  Some glomeruli show extreme hyalinisation. 
3. Several glomeruli atrophic and shrunken but their capillaries still allow passage of some blood. 
4.  Other glomeruli hypertrophied. 
5.  Convoluted tubules show extreme degree of atrophy. 
6. Some tubules appear normal or more often are dilated and lined by high epithelium with papillary buds projecting into the lumen; when dilatation is marked, the cells become low or even flattened. 
7. Interstitial tissue increased. 
8. Arteries supplying the fibrosed, atrophic areas show fibrous thickening of intima causing gArrpydgg of lumen (disuse atrophy). 

PYELONEPHRITIS

Etiology

Causative Organisms

Even

1. Escherichia coli (50%) 

Active

2. Aerobacter aerogenes

Patriotic

3. Proteus vulgaris

Politicians

4. Pseudomonas pyocyanea

Can

5. Coagulase positive staphylococci 

Have

6. Haemolytic streptococci

Emergency

7. Enterococci

Modes of Infection

1.  Ascent from below in: 
 (i) Infancy 
 (ii) Pregnancy 
(iii) Old persons - due to prostatic enlarge­ment, cancer of cervix and uterine prolapse. 

2. Haematogenous. 

Predisposing Factors

1. Diabetes mellitus 
2. Previous parenchymatous damage 
3. Urethral obstruction. 

Gross Appearance

The lesions may be local or diffuse. The changes vary with the stage of the disease. 

A. In acute stage
1. Kidney swollen and congested 
2. Pelvis bright red and filled with pus 
3. Yellow spots under the capsule representing areas of suppuration. 

Cut Surface 
1. Patching areas of suppuration; spherical in cortex and linear in pyramids. 
2. If suppuration is progressive, abscess cavities form with gradual destruction of renal tissue. 
3. Outline of calyces destroyed 
 

B. In chronic cases


1.  Little frank suppuration. 
2. Inflammation extends in scattered areas destroying the renal tissue but followed by healing, fibrosis and contraction (contracted granular kidney). 
3. The depressed scars on the surface tend to be dark and saddle shaped, appearing U-shaped on cut surface. 


 

Fig. 9.4. Acute pyelonephritis (Late stage : Fibrosis developing)

Microscopic Appearance

1. Small abscesses with widespread interstitial infiltration of streaky linear round cells and polymorphs. 

2. Renal tubules, destroyed and replaced by scar tissue. 
3. Many tubules, especially in the scarred areas, are lined by flattened epithelium and filled with dense, acidophilic colloid like material. 
4. Periglomerular fibrosis is marked even when the glomeruli are intact. 
5. Round cell infiltration or fibrosis in the renal pelvis. 
6.  Arteries in the affected areas show endarterities obliterans. 

Fig 9.5 Chronic pyelonephritis

HYDRONEPHROSIS

Causes of Hydronephrosis

 

A. Intrinsic

 

 

 

1.  Congenital

 

 

 

 

(i)  Abnormalities in the posterior urethra

 

 

 

 

(ii)  Valve-like mucosal folds at pelviureteric junction

 

 

 

2. Acquired

 

 

 

 

(a) In the ureter

 

 

 

 

(i) Calculus

 

 

 

 

(ii) Stricture

 

 

 

 

(iii) Kinking

 

 

 

 

(iv) Accidental ligature

 

 

 

(b)  In the bladder

 

 

 

 

(i) Calculus

 

 

 

 

(ii) Spasm of internal sphincter

 

 

 

(c)  In the urethra

 

 

 

 

- Stricture urethrae

 

B. Extrinsic

 

 

 

 

(i) Pelvic tumours

 

 

 

 

(ii) Enlarged prostate

 

 

 

 

(iii)  Aberrant branch of renal artery pressing the ureter

Gross Appearance

1. Pelvis and calyces are greatly dilated. 
2. Pyramids are destroyed first, followed by cortex until kidney is finally converted into a thin walled lobulated bag of watery fluid. 
3. The greatly distended calyces are separated by incomplete septa. 
4. Ischaemia produced by the pressure of re­tained fluid causes destruction of the renal parenchyma. 
5. If infection is superimposed the walls of the sac become thicker and the lining more rough. 

Hydronephrotic fluid is relatively sterile as continuous circulation is maintained by: 
1.  Pyelovenous back-flow from the minor calyces into the straight veins at the base of pyramids. 
2.  Pyelotubular back-flow which increases with dilatation of the tubular system. 
3.  Possibly the lymphatic channels also. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Initially only tubular atrophy; glomeruli normal. 
2. Later, glomeruli are fibrosed and renal parenchyma is reduced by fibrous tissue 
3. Even in advanced cases, glomeruli as well as tubules in some areas appear fairly normal. 

Complications

1. Hypertension 
2. Uraemia leading to death. 

ARTERIOLAR NEPHROSCLEROSIS

Types of Nephrosclerosis

1.  Benign hypertensive nephroscierosis 
2.  Malignant hypertensive nephrosclerosis 
3.  Senile nephroscierosis. 

Benign Hypertensive Nephrosclerosis

Gross Appearance
(Primary contracted Granular kidney) 
Unevenly granular 
Reduced in size 
Red in colour 
Consistence firm and elastic 
Capsule thickened but not markedly adherent 
On stripping, the surface is mottled and granular. 

On Cut Section
1.  Cortex atrophied, without normal markings. 
2.  Parenchyma presents a reddish mottling or strippling. 
3.  Arteries thick-walled and prominent, particularly in boundary zone; also more numerous. 
4.  Medulla diminished in thickness but less in proportion to cortex. 
5.  Pelvic fat increased in amount. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Cortex shows areas of fibrosis alternating with less affected areas. 
2. Walls of the intralobular arteries are sclerotic; may show fatty change. 
3. Intima of small arterioles greatly swollen, hyaline and contains much fat. 
4. Glomeruti irregularly arranged in the connective tissue around the arteries. 
5. Tubules atrophied; lined with small cuboidal cells. 
6. Fibrous tissue contains patches of lymphocytic infiltration. 
7. Colloid casts in the connecting tubules. 
8. Larger arteries show hypertrophic changes and fibrosis. 

Malignant Hypertensive Nephrosclerosis

Gross Appearance
1. Size normal or slightly diminished 
2.  Surface uneven with reddish spots due to congestion and haemorrhage. 

On Cut Section
1.  Reddish areas in the cortex, running perpendicularly. 
2.  Renal artery and branches show marked sclerosis. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. Patches of interstitial change (cellular and fibrotic). 
2. Small arteries show great intimal thickening due to concentric layers of connective tissue; lumina much dilminished. 
3. Arterioles show hyaline and fatty change in intima; fibrinoid necrosis in the walls. 
4.  Necrosis may extend to the roots of glomerufi. 
5.  Glomeruli show irregular and intense capillary congestion with haemorrhage in the space. 
6.  Secondary proliferation of capsular epithethelium may follow. 

Senile Nephrosclerosis

Gross Appearance
1. Kidneys small in size 
2. Capsule thickened and adherent 
3. Depressed areas with finely granular surface 
4. Certain portions show extreme atrophy 
5. On cut section. Cortex in depressed areas may be reduced to a mere line, while in the other parts it is less affected. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Groups of sclerosed glomeruli irregularly drawn together. 
2. Tubules Atrophied, with propotionately less overgrowth of connective tissue. 
3. At places without atrophy, renal tissue may be relatively unaffected; the preceding changes are observed in atrophied areas only. 
4.  Atheroma is commonly present in large arteries. 

Causes of Contracted Granular Kidney

Bata

1. Benign hypertensive nephrosclerosis

Shoe

2. Senile nephrosclerosis

Company

3. Chronic glomerulonephritis

Can

4. Chronic pyelonephritis

Pay

5. Polyarteritis nodosa

Donation

6. Diabetes mellitus

Gross Appearance
1.  Glistening, greyish yellow flecks beneath the capsule and deeper in the cortex. 
2.  These foci project from the cut surface giving the appearance of shining grains of sand. 
3.  In later stages, these flecks may be associated with small irregular scars. 

Microscopic Appearance 
1. Spherical nodules of interstitial inflammatory cells which invaginate the wall of a tubule into its lumen. 
2. The infiltrate consists of histiocytes, lympho­cytes, and rarely plasma cells along with a few eosinophils. 
3. Cholesterol crystals, in the tubular lumen, amidst Epid macrophages, other mononuclear cells, polymorphs and cellular debris. 
4. Glomeruli and tubules atrophied only in inflammatory areas;  normal otherwise. 

Haemosiderosis and Haemoglobinuric Nephrosis
Paroxysmal cold hamoglobinuria is a rare disorder which occurs chiefly in congenital syphilis. There is haemosiderosis of proximal tubules. Kidney function remains unaffected. 

RENAL SYPHILIS

Syphilitic Lesions in the Kidney

Can

1. Congenital interstitial nephritis

Girls

2. Gumma

Stay

3. Syphilitic nephrosis 

For

4.  Focal interstitial nephritis

Holiday

5.  Haemosiderosis and haemoglobinuric nephrosis

Congenital Interstitial Nephritis

The kidney of congenital syphilis is characterised by interstitial inflammation in association with great numbers of treponemas in the interstitial spaces, in the tubular lumen and among the tubular epithelial cells. 

Gumma
1.  Syphilitic gumma of the kidney is rarely seen 
2.  The histology is that of gumma in other organs 
3. It is probable that multiple irregular scars in the kidn6ys of syphilitic individuals are the healed gummas. 

Syphilitic Nephrosis

1.  Manifests as sudden onset of nephrotic syndrome, without renal insufficiency. 
2.  Usually in the secondary stage of syphilis. 

Syphilitic Focal Interstitial Nephritis

Asymptomatic damage to the kidney in secondary stage of syphilis. 

RENAL CALCULI

Structure of Renal Calculi

The calculus consists of a nucleus of organic matter around which urinary salts are deposited in concentric layers which are bound together by a colloid matrix of organic matter. The salts, al­though crystalline in the urine, are in the form of amorphous granules in the calculus. The calculi may consist of. 
1.  Uric acid and urate 
2.  Calcium oxalate 
3.  Calcium and ammonio-magnesium phosphate. 

Mode of Formation
The following factors are held responsible for the formation of renal calculi. 

1. Infection. Infection is important in the secondary phosphate stone which is a common consequence of cystitis associated with enlarge­ment of the prostate. It is probable that a mild infection is the starting point of all the uric acid and oxalate stones in the kidney, although, it is not readily detected like the gross infection which is responsible for the secondary phosphate stones. The type of the stone depends upon the reaction of the urine and that depends upon infection. A uric acid or oxalate stone is formed when the urine is acidic. Infection with pyogenic cocci turns the urine alkaline and the stone becomes coated with phosphate. Subsequent infection with Esch. coli may bring back an acidic reaction with deposition of uric acid or calcium oxalate. 

2. Concentration of the crystalline salts. The relation of colloids of the urine to the crystalloids is probably of great importance. The presence of an abnormal colloid or absence of a normal one may cause crystalloids to be precipitated, especially if they are present in excess. 

3. Parathyoid tumour. This is commonly associated with bilateral and recurring calculi. As a result of hyper-parathyroidism, calcium is removed from the bones, the blood is flooded with calcium and this tends to be deposited in the renal pelvis. Such stones have high content of calcium and phosphates. 

4. Vitamin A deficiency. Lack of this vitamin leads to keratinization and desquamation of the epithelium of the renal pelvis which may form the nidus for a stone. It also affects the urinary colloids so that they fail to hold the crystalloids in solution. 

5. Nephrocalcinosis. The term refers to the depo­sition of calcium and phosphorus in the renal tubules or in the interstitial tissue of the kidney. The condition is characterized by hypercalcinuria, negative calcium balance and evidence in skiagram. It is often associated with the formation of calculi. 

6. Prolonged immobility. When patients such as paraplegics are confined to bed for long periods unable to move their limbs, the bones tend to become decalcified and phosphate stones are often formed. 

DIABETIC NEPHROPATHY

Diabetic Glomerulosclerosis

The glomerular lesions of diabetic nephropathy are of three types: 
 (i) Nodular 
 (ii) Diffuse 
 (iii) Exudative. 

The nodules are usually situated at the periphery of the affected glomerulus. These are eosinophilic and show a laminated appearance when stained with periodic acid Schiff reagent. The initial lesion probably starts within the capillary wall. The hya­ 
line mass increases in size, projects into and finally obliterates the capillary lumen. There is great variation in size of the nodule in different glomeruli, in their frequency within a single and in their distribution in different parts of the kidney. The nodular lesion is the most characteristic pathological abnormality of the disease but it correlates less with the impairment of the renal function than does the diffuse lesion. 

The diffuse glomerular lesion is more common than the nodular lesion and is the main cause of the reduced glomerular filtration rate and azotaemia characteristic of the later stages of diabetic glomerulosclerosis. The capillary walls are thickened by deposit of a substance rich in polysacharide. The basement membrane is probably first involved, with later extension to endothelial and epithelial cells. In the earlier stages, the changes are uneven within the same glomerulus and in different parts of the kidney. Later the whole glomerulus becomes hyalinised and bloodless and there is atrophy of the corresponding tubule. The diffuse lesion may occur without any evidence of nodular change but whenever there are nodular lesions, the diffuse change will be present in the other glomeruli. 

The exudative lesion is the least common and least characteristic abnormality of the glomerulus in diabetic nephropathy. It consists of an eosinophilic structureless crescentic area surrounding the periphery of a lobule of a glomerulus. It stains more 
strongly eosinophilic than the nodular or diffuse lesion. The exudative lesion is only found in the kidneys affected by diffuse glomerulosclerosis, and is a late manifestation of diabetic nephropaihy, usually associated with severe vascular disease elsewhere. 

Other changes in diabetic nephropathy include usually severe renal vascular disease with hyaline change in the wall of arterioles and secondary areas of ischaemic atrophy. Pyelonephritis often occurs in diabetes mellitus especially in the later stages of diabetic nephropathy. Distal tubular or papillary necrosis is of frequent occurrence. 

ACUTE RENAL FAILURE

Causes

 

I. Pre-renal Causes

 

Company

 

1. Circulatory failure

 

 

 

(i) Cardiac

 

 

 

(ii) Peripheral

 

 

 

(iii) Occlusion of renal vessels

Secretary

 

2. Severe fluid and electrolyte imbalance

Arun

 

3. Allergies and over-whelming toxaemias

Arora

 

4. Addisonian crisis

 

II. Renal Causes

 

An

 

1. Acute glomerulonephritis

Anchor

 

2. Anoxic tubular nephrosis

To

 

3. Toxic tubular nephrosis

Anchor

 

4. Acute pyclonephritis

Poetry

 

5. Pyemic kidney

Program

 

6. Papillitis necroticans

Before

 

7. Bilateral cortical necrosis

Every

 

8. Eclampsia

Month

 

9. Malignant nephroselerosis

Rolls

 

10. Radiation nephritis

 

III. Post-renal Causes

 

O

 

1. Obstruction in ureters

O

 

2. Obstruction in bladder

O [3 Options]

 

3. Obstruction in urethra

Effects

Uraemia is associated with headache, drowsiness, twitching of extremities, convulsions, coma and a group of other symptoms and signs. The features disclosed by biopsy are variable, but,there are renal lesions, degenerations of hypertrophic heart, cerebral edema, ulcerative ileocolitis and increased amount of urea in the renal cortex. Often bronchopneumonia is present as a terminal event. 

CHRONIC RENAL FAILURE

Causes

Ganesh

 

1.  Glomerulonephritis

Prasad

 

2. Primary tubular disease

 

First

 

(i) Fanconi syndrome

 

Read

 

(ii) Renal tubular acidosis

 

Her

 

(iii) Heavy metal poisoning, e.g., lead

 

Profile

 

(iv) Phenacetin poisoning

Vaid

 

3.  Vascular disease

 

Men

 

(i) Malignant nephroselerosis

 

In

 

(ii) Ischaemic disease of the kidney

 

Central

 

(iii) Collagen disease

 

Park

 

(iv) Polyarteritis nodosa

 

Did

 

(v) Diffuse systemic sclerosis (scleroderma)

 

Do

 

(vi) Disseminated lupus erythematosus

 

Miracle

 

(vii) Multiple myelomatosis

In

 

4. Infections

 

 

 

(i) Chronic pyelonephritis

 

 

 

(ii) Tuberculosis

Medical

 

5.  Metabolic renal diseases

 

Doing

 

(i) Diabetes mellitus

 

A

 

(ii) Amyloidosis

 

Great

 

(iii) Gout

 

Harm

 

(iv) Hyperparathroidism

 

Madam

 

(v) Milk-alkali syndrome

Care

 

6.  Congenital anomalies of the kidney

 

 

 

(i) Hypoplastic kidneys

 

 

 

(ii) Polycystic kidneys

Unit

 

7. Urinary tract obstruction

 

 

 

 (a) Upper

 

 

 

 

(i) Calculi 

 

 

 

 

(ii) Peri- ureteric fibrosis

 

 

 

 

(iii) Neoplasms

 

 

 

(b)  Lower

 

Please

 

 

(i) Prostatic enlargement

 

Send

 

 

(ii) Stricture urethrae

 

Candles

 

 

(iii)  Congenital anomalies of bladder,  neck, urethra

Fanconi Syndrome

Characteristics 

A

1.       Aminoaciduria

Good

2.       Glycosuria

Person

3.       Proteinuria

Pays

4.       Polyuria 

Lower

5.       Low plasma inorganic phosphate

Charges

6.       Chronic acidosis

Secretly

7.       Severe rickets resistant to vitamin D therapy

  The condition usually becomes apparent in early childhood and death generally occurs before puberty. There is a widespread deposition of cystine in different tissues (cystinosis), the cause of which is not known although it implies a profound 
disturbance in aminoacid metabolism. There is a gross defect in the proximal tubules of the kidney, resulting in imperfect reabsorption of aminoacids, glucose, phosphate, bicarbonate, etc. The proxi­mal tubule is shorter than normal and is joined to 
the glomerulus by a narrow swan like neck. The syndrome is inherited as a mendelian recessive character with no abnormality in the heterozygotes. 

A similar entity generally referred to as adult Fancony syndrome has been found as a familial condition in adults. It is not associated with cystine deposition and presents as a form of osteomalacia. Such biochemical abnormalities as the aminoaciduria and glycosuria may be recognized prior to development of any clinical symptoms. 

NEPHROTIC SYNDROME

The Nephrotic syndrome (or Lipid nephrosis) is a clinical complex consisting of :- 

Please

1.       Proteinuria, principally albuminuria

Help

2.       Hypoproteinaemia with a reversal of the normal albumin: globulin ratio

His

3.       Hypercholesterolaemia

Little

4.       Lipiduria with oval fat bodies and lipid masses and crystals.

Orphan

5.       Oedema in the form of anasarca and effusions

 

Additional features (Impure or complicated Nephrotic syndrome

He

 

(i) Haematuria

Has

 

(ii) Hypertension

Paid

 

(iii) Pyuria

Amount

 

(iv) Azotaemia

Etiology

 

A. Idiopathic

 

B. Systemic disease

 

 

1.       Diabetes mellitus

 

 

2.       Amyloidosis

 

 

3.       Systemic lupus erythematosus

 

 

4.       Syphilis

 

C. Kidney disorders

 

 

1.       Chronic glomerulonephritis

 

 

2.       Subacute glomerulonephritis

 

 

3.       Renal vein thrombosis

 

D. Chemical agents

 

 

1.       Trimethadione

 

 

2.       Gold salts

 

 

3.       Mercury

 

 

4.       Bee stings

 

 

5.       Poison oak

Vast majority of the cases of nephrotic syndrome are idiopathic. Only rarely the cause is known. The following theories have been forwarded to explain the etiology of idiopathic nephrotic syndrome :- 

(i) A preceding streptococcal infection. In an established case of nephrosis, subsequent recurrent streptococcal infections affect the disease process adversely. 
(ii)  Auto-immune response. Deposition of globulin has been demonstrated in human nephrotic kidney by fluorescent staining techniques. 
(iii)  Chemical toxins. 

Pathogenesis

Once the glomerular lesion, i.e., abnormality of the epithelial foot processes and subsequent basement membrane thickening, is established, oedema in nephrotic syndrome follows proteinuria. Albumin is the main protein lost though other protein fractions like alpha and gamma globulins also are lost considerably. Proteinuria is mainly responsible for hypoproteinaemia. Protein intake is also low because of accompanying anorexia and diminished absorption of ingested proteins, because of intes­tinal oedema. This may further add to hypoproteinemia. 

Hypoproteinaemia leads to decreased colloidal osmotic pressure allowing escape of water into cellular tissue. This starts the oedema and sets up the factors which contribute further to accumu­lation of fluid in the body. 

The escape of water from plasma leads to reduction of blood volume leading to hormonal disturbances concerned with water and electrolyte regulation. There is increased secretion of antidiuretic hormone (ADH) and aldosterone. Aldosterone retains sodium and alongwith that more and more water is retained. However, the retained water cannot be held in circulation because of hypoproteinaemia and is lost to the extracellular tissue causing further reduction in blood volume and the whole cycle repeats. 

Like the interstitial tissue in all other organs, that of the kidney is also water-logged. This raises intrarenal hydrostatic pressure with its effect on venular patency. This raised internal venular resistance reduces the effective glomerular filtration and also increases tubular water absorption. The tense stretched capsule of the swollen kidney might be responsible for autonomic nerve stimulation causing afferent arteriolar spasm reducing glomerular filtration. 

The cause of hyperchlolesterolaemia is not fully understood. It is believed that it results from increased synthesis of cholesterol and of lipoproteins, and can be induced by certain nephrotoxic sera. 


Chart 9.1. Pathogenesis of nephrotic syndrome

TUMOURS 

Classification

 

I. Kidney Proper

 

 

1.  Tumours of renal tubules

 

 

 

(i) Adenoma 

 

 

 

(ii) Carcinoma

 

 

2.  Embryonal tumours

 

 

 

 Wilm's tumours

 

II. Renal Pelvis

 

 

 

(i)  Papilloma

 

 

 

(ii) Papillary carcinoma

 

 

 

(iii) Non-papillary carcinoma

 Renal Adenoma

Gross Appearance
Macroscopic appearance. They are small yellow nodules frequently multiple, usually 1 cm or less in diameter but occasionally large circumscribed but often encapsulated. They arise in areas damaged by vascular occlusion thus appearing as compensatory hyperplasias. 

Microscopic appearance. The tubules may be ir­regular or dilated, papillary processes may project into them. Some of the cells are small, dark or compact, but others may be large clear cells, so as to resemble those of the clear cell carcinoma. The capsule, if at all present may be penetrated by tumour cells. 


 

Fig. 9.6. Papillary adenoma of kidney

Fig. 9.7. Clear-cell carcinoma of kidney.

Fig. 9.8 Wilm's tumour.

Renal Carcinoma (Nephroma)

Macroscopic appearance. The tumour arises in the upper or lower pole but more often in the middle portion of the kidney. It begins near capsule and enlarges to form a globular mass. Fibrous tissue may form a capsule around the tumour. The tumour is soft and in the cross-section is bulging, o yellow colour, bleeds freely and is often lobulated by fibrous trabeculae. There are numerous foci and masses of necrosis and haemorrhage; the tumour, often, compresses and distorts the pelvis and may invade it. Extension into the tributaries of the renal vein, into the main renal vein and even upto the vena cavae is not infrequent. 

Microscopic appearance. It varies greatly. The most common form is made up of large cuboidal or polyhedral cells with clear vesicular cytoplasm which may contain fat or glycogen. The nuclei are small, fairly dense and often eccentric. These cells grow in bands and papillary projections from a delicate fibrous reticulum. containing many capillaries which may give an alveolated character to the tumour. Necrosis, haemorrhage and blood pigment are common, other tumours are made up of smaller cells with granular cytoplasm and dense, centrally disposed nuclei. In these tumours, the cells are usually in sheets and masses. In either form acini may be found and these are often papilliferous, However, there may be mixtures of these types of cells with preponderance of one or the other. The supporting connective tissue is richly vascularized. 

Metastases are most frequent in lungs, liver, adrenals and bones and less frequent in kidney, spleen, heart and brain. 

Wilm's tuniours (nephroblastoma). This is the commonest malignant tumour of early childhood. It usually occurs during the first three years of life but may rarely occur in adults. It may attain an enormous size, nearly filling the abdomen. Quite 
frequently it is bilateral. There is no haematuria and pain because the renal pelvis is not invaded. 

The tumour, which commences in the cortex, is 2 grey, soft and has a homogeneous character of a sarcoma. It tends to destroy the whole kidney and may spread to neighbouring organs. Distant meta­stases by the blood stream are not frequent. 

 The microscopic appearance varies in different parts of the same tumour. The general character is sarcomatous. The cells may be round or fusiform. Glandular elements are often present; smooth muscle and striated muscle are not uncommon and in rare cases there may be cartilage and bone. 

CONGENITAL DISORDERS

Classification

 

A. Abnormalities in the amount of renal tissue

A

 

1. Agenesis

Heavy

 

2. Hypoplasia

Loss

 

3. Large kidney

Suffered

 

4. Supernumerary kidneys

 

B. Abnormalities of position, form and orientation

 

 

1. Displacement of kidneys

 

 

2. Horseshoe kidney

 

C.  Cystic diseases

 

AGENESIS OF KIDNEY

1.  Bilateral agenesis of kidneys is incompatible with life and is found only in still-born babies. 

2. Unilateral agenesis is compatible with adequate renal function. The other kidney is enlarged in size. 

Causes

1.  Unilateral absence of nephrogenic primordium. 
2.  Failure of Wolffian duct to make contact with mesodermal mass. 

Pathology
1. There is generally no evidence of kidney. 
2. Occasionally, a small undifferentiated connective tissue mass 2-3 cm in size, may be present. 
3. The renal artery and the renal vein may be absent or rudimentary. 
4. Ureteric remanant may be present. 
5. The functional kidney is enlarged in size (compensatory hypertrophy). 

HYPOPLASIA

Renal hypoplasia means the failure of the kidney to attain the normal size. 
1. It may be bilateral. The patient usually dies during infancy or childhood when infection or stone further reduces renal function. 
2. Oligomeganephroma. The kidney is hypoplastic but the remaining nephrons are markedly hypertrophied. 

 


 

 

Chapter 10 : Respiratory system

ACUTE BRONCHITIS

Etiology

1.  The irritant may be bacterial, mechanical, or toxic. 

2.  Causative organisms: 

Prime

(i) Pneumococcus

Minister

(ii) Micrococcus catarrhalis

Sending

(iii) Streptococci 

Some

(iv) Staphylococci

Bonanza

(v) Bacillus influenza

3.  May complicate any infectious fever, particularly typhoid. 

4.  Produced by dust, steam, poisonous gases and other irritants. 

Gross Appearance
The mucous membrane of trachea and large bronchi is red, swollen and covered with tenacious exudate which may be mucoid or purulent. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Mucosa greatly congested. 
2.  Infiltration with leucocytes, mainly lymphocytes. 
3.  Ciliated epithelium desquamated. 
4.  Mucous glands distended with mucus and show marked catarrhal change. 
5.  Lumen of bronchi filled with pus. 

CHRONIC BRONCHITIS

Etiology
Chronic bronchitis is seldom a primary entity. It is rather a complication of some preexisting pathological condition which may lie in the heart, the nasal sinuses or the bronchi themselves. Combined with any of these may be added prolonged and excessive smoking. 

1. Chronic heart disease, valvular or myocardial, is probably the most important cause on ac­count of continued congestion of the bronchial tree which weakens its resistance to bacterial infection from the nose and throat. 

2. Infection in the nasal sinuses is another common cause. An antrum or a sinus may be a reservoir of infection from which the bronchi are continually being reinfected. The same is true of septic conditions in the oral cavity. 

3. Dilatation of the bronchi, i.e., bronchiectasis is now k.iown to be a predisposing condition in many cases of chronic bronchitis. With dilatation of the lumen the condition becomes ideal for continuance of infection, for efficient drainage becomes difficult or impossible. 

4. Cigarette smoking, when prolonged and persistent is related to chronic bronchitis. It interferes gravely with the beating of the respiratory cilia whose constant motion, when normal, keeps the bronchial tubes clean of mucus. 

Gross Appearance

1.  Surface of the bronchial mucosa is dark red and appears trabeculated. 
2.  It may be dry or covered with viscid mucus or pus. 
3.  The bronchi are thickened and inelastic. 
4. Dilatation of the bronchi, particularly of basal bronchi which are thin, atrophic and stretched. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Desquamation of the surface cells.
2.  The normal ciliated columnar epithelium becomes cuboid or flat. 
3.  Epithelial hyperplasia at some places; atrophy at others. 
4.  The submucosa shows fibrous hyperplasia. 
5.  Peribronchial inflammation with cellular infiltration and fibrosis of bronchial walls. 
6.  In more advanced cases, small abscess formation in the bronchi and peribronchial tissues. 

BRONCHIAL ASTHMA

Etiology
1. Hypersensitivity to pollens, dust, drugs, and bacteria. 
2.  Heredity. Family history of bronchial asthma or some other form of allergy. 
3. Psychosomatic factor. Precipitated by emo­tional stress, operating through the pituitary­adrenal axis. 

Gross Appearance
1.  Lungs voluminous and emphysematous, filling the entire pleural cavity. 
2. Areas of emphysema alternate with areas of atelectasis or collapse. 
3. The small and medium sized bronchi are occluded with thick, tough, tenacious mucus, which is responsible for atelectasis. 

Microsopic Appearance

1. Mucosa thickened and oedematous. 
2. Infiltration with eosinophils with some lymphocytes and plasma cells. 
3. Basement membrane shows, hyalinised thickening. 
4. Bronchial muscle hypertrophied. 
5. Submucous glands swollen and very active. 
6. Bronchial wall thickened with partial or complete obliteration of lumen by plugs of mucus. 
7.  Distant pulmonary parenchyma shows emphysema alternating with atelectasis. 

BRONCHIECTASIS

Etiology
1.  Infection 
(i)  Produces bronchial wall inflammation, weakening and further dilatation. 
(ii) Extensive bronchial and bronchiolar damage causes endobronchial obliteration, with atelectasis distal to obliteration and subsequently bronchiectasis around atelectatic areas. 

2. Obstruction 
(i) After bronchial obstruction, e.g., by tumours or foreign bodies, air is resorbed from the airways distal to obstruction with resultant atelectasis. 
(ii) With atelectasis, the elastic forces within the lobe disappear, so that the airways become 1ax resulting in dilatation of walls of those airways. 

Gross Appearance
1. May be diffuse (cylinderical form) or localised (saccular form); the former is more common. 
2. The left lung is more often involved than the right; lower lobes more often than the upper owing to stasis, only one lobe may be affected. 
3. The size of cavity depends upon the size of bronchus. 
4. The cavity is filled with pus which stagnates there owing to insufficient drainage, and still further weakens the wall of bronchi. 
5. The mucosa is hypertrophic and may form tumour like, highly vascular papillary masses, later there may be atrophy. 
6. The smaller bronchi and bronchioles are dila­ted to such a degree that they extend to the pleural surface. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  The dilated bronchi show chronic bronchitis. 
2.  The bronchial wall and tissue is infiltrated with chronic inflammatory cells. 
3.  The mucosa may be hypertrophic or atrophic. 
4. In advanced cases, the muscle, glands, elastic tissue and even the cartilage may be replaced by fibrous tissue. 
5. Bronchial musculature and elastic tissue des­truction weaken the wall and allow dilatation to occur. 
6. Bronchial arteries much enlarged; rich ana- B. Metastatic pneumonia stomosis with pulmonary arteries develops. 

Complications

Poor

 

1.  Pulmonary 

 

B

 

(i) Bronchopneurnonia

 

A

 

(ii) Abscess

 

G [Bag]

 

(iii) Gangrene

Patients

 

2. Pleural

 

Detain

 

(i) Dry pleurisy

 

Every

 

(ii) Empyema

 

Person

 

(iii) Pyo-pneumothorax

Pay

 

3. Pericarditis

Subsidised

 

4. Septicaemia and pyaemia

Charges

 

5. Cerebral abscess

   

PNEUMONIA

Classification based upon Etiology 

A

 

A. Bacterial pneumonia

 

 

 

 

1. Specific bacterial pneumonia

 

Please

 

 

(i) Pneumococcus 

 

Send

 

 

(ii) Streptococcus

 

Some

 

 

(iii)  Staphylococcus

 

Fried

 

 

(iv)  Friedlander's bacillus (Klebsiella pneumoniae)

 

Mutton

 

 

(v)  Mycobacterium tuberculosis

 

Here;

 

 

(vi)  Haemophilus

 

Every

 

 

(vii)  Escherichia coli

 

Body

 

 

(viii) Bacillus proteus

 

Paying

 

 

(ix) Pseudomonas pyocyanea

 

Tremendous

 

 

(x) Treponema pallidum

 

 

 

2. Bacterial pneumonia secondary to general infection

 

Any

 

 

(i) Anthrax

 

Person

 

 

(ii) Plague

 

Bidding

 

 

(iii) Brucellosis

 

Double

 

 

(iv) Diphtheria

 

Sum?

 

 

(v) Salmonella infections

Minister

 

B. Metastatic pneumonia

Visited

 

C. Viral pneumonia

 

 

 

1.  Specific viral pneumonia

 

I

 

 

(i) Influenza

 

Punished

 

 

(ii) Psittacosis

 

Many

 

 

(iii) Mycoplasma

 

A

 

 

(iv) Adenovirus infection

 

Rascals

 

 

(v) Respiratory syncytial virus

 

 

 

2. General viral infections

 

My

 

 

(i) Measles

 

Chain

 

 

(ii) Chickenpox

 

Stolen

 

 

(iii) Smallpox

 

In

 

 

(iv) Infectious mononucleosis

 

His

 

 

(v) Herpes zoster

 

Lab

 

 

(vi) Lymphocytic choriomeningitis

Ram

 

D.  Rickettsial pneumonia

 

 

 

 

- Q fever

Pura

 

E.  Protozoal pneumonia

 

Traveling

 

 

(i) Toxoplasmosis

 

In

 

 

(ii)  Interstitial plasma-cell pneumonia (Pneumocystis carinii)

 

A

 

 

(iii) Amoebiasis

 

Motor

 

 

(iv)  Malaria

At

 

F. Aspiration pneumonia

 

 

 

 

(i) Infective aspiration pneumonia

 

 

 

 

(ii)  Inhalation pneumonia

Moga

 

G. Miscellaneous

 

Few

 

 

(i)  Fungus infection

 

People

 

 

(ii)  Parasitic infestations

 

Are

 

 

(iii)  Allergic pneumonia

 

Playing

 

 

(iv)  Pneumonia due to chemical and physical agents

 

Ludo

 

 

(v)  Lipoid pneumonia

 Classification based upon Mode of Spread

 

1. Acute Pneumonia

Ludhiana

 

(i)                Lobar pneumonia

Boys

 

(ii)  Bronchopneumonia or lobular pneumonia

 

 

 

(a) Non-suppurative 

 

 

 

(b) Suppurative

 

 

 

(c) Tuberculous

Entertain

 

(iii)  Embolic pneumonia

Heavily

 

(iv)  Hypostatic pneumonia

 

2. Chronic Interstitial pneumonia

 

 

(i) Sequel to acute inflammation

 

 

(ii)  Extrinsic

Complications of Pneumonias

Only

1. Organisation of exudate and fibrosis

Single

2. Suppuration

Ladies

3. Localised suppuration

Get

4. Gangrene of the lung

Paid

5. Pericarditis

Entry

6. Empyemia

Before

7. Bacterial endocarditis

Arrival

8. Acute arthritis

 
 
 

LOBAR PNEUMONIA

Etiology
1. Caused by pneumococcus 
2. Allergy plays an important role 
3. A previous infection of the respiratory tract may sensitize the lungs so that pneumonia may result from subsequent infection. 

Predisposing Factors

Pretty

1. Profound fatigue

Clothing

2. Chill

In

3. Injury to the chest

Simple

4. Severe fractures

Designs

5.  Debilitating disease

Coming

6.  Chronic alcoholism

Pathology
Inflammatory response has four stages. 

A. Stage of congestion 

1.  Lasts for about 2-4 hours 
2.  Vascular engorgement 
3.  Intra alveolar fluid with few neutrophils 
4.  On gross examination involved lobe is heavy, boggy, red, and subcrepitant 

B. Stage of red hepatisation 
1.  Increasing numbers of neutrophils. 
2.  Precipitation of fibrin to fill alveolar spaces. 
3. Lung architecture obscured by massive confluent exudation. 

 

Fig. 10.1. Lobar pneumonia -Red hepatisation


4.  Extravasation of red blood cells giving red colour on gross examination. 
5.  In some areas fibrin strands cross the alveolar wall through pores of Cohn. 
6.  Fibrinous or fibrinosuppurative pleuritis. 
7. On gross examination the lobe appears distinctly red, firm, and airless, with a liver like consistence. 

C. Stage of Grey Hepatisation 
1.  Accumulation of fibrin continues. 
2.  Progressive disintegration of white cells and red cells. 
3. The exudate composed of disintegrating white cells, fibrin, and red cells contracts to leave a clear zone adjacent to alveolar wall. 
4.  The alveolar septa generally intact. 
5.  Pleural reaction of fibrin and white cells more advanced; at times, empyema. 
6.  On gross examination, greyish brown, dry surface. 

D. Stage of Resolution 
1. Occurs 8-10 days after onset, in untreated cases with a favourable outcome. 
2. The consolidated exudate within the alveolar spaces undergoes progressive enzymic digestion to produce a granular, semifluid debris that is either resorbed, ingested by macrophages, or coughed up. 
3.  Normal lung parenchyma is restored to a normal stage. 
4. Pleural reaction may similarly resolve; more often, it undergoes organisation, leaving fibrous thickening or permanent adhesions. 

Complications

Little

 

1. Lung abscess

 

Fine

 

2. Fibrosis (carnification)

 

Paid

 

3. Pneumococcal septicaemia

 

Party

 

(i) Pericarditis

 

Entered

 

(ii) Endocarditis

 

Pushp

 

(iii) Peritonitis

 

Mahal

 

(iv) Meningitis

 

Same

 

(v) Suppurative arthritis

 

Morning

 

(vi) Metastatic abscesses

BRONCHOPNEUMONIA
 (Lobular Pneumonia)

Etiology

Indian

 

1.       Infancy and old age

 

Industries

 

2.       Infecting organisms

 

Some

 

(i) Staphylococci

 

School

 

(ii) Streptococci

 

Principal

 

(iii) Pneumococci

 

Has

 

(iv) Haemophilus influenzae

 

Punished

 

(v) Pseudomonas aeruginosa

 

Child’s

 

(vi) Coliform bacilli

 

Father

 

(vii) Fungi (candida, aspergillus, mucor)

Union

 

3.       Underlying diseases

 

Women

 

Whooping cough

 

May

 

Measles

 

Soon

 

Scarlet fever

 

Dominate

 

Diphtheria

Gross Appearance

1. Lobular consolidation patchily distributed; more often multilobar, frequently bilateral and basal, at times involving single lobe. 
2. Well-developed lesion are slightly elevated, dry, granular, grey-red to yellow, and poorly delimited at their margins, 3-4 cm in diameter. 
3.  Confluence of these foci occurs in severe cases, producing total lobar consolidation. 
4. Small abscesses, when organism is pyogenic. 
5. The consolidation may ultimately resolve or may become organised to leave residual foci of fibrosis. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.       Bronchi, bronchioles and adjacent alveolar space filled with suppurative exudate containing neutrophils. 
2. Bronchial wall swollen and extensively invaded by leucocytes. 

 

Fig 10.2 Bronchpneumonia

Complications

Ladies

1. Lung abscess

Entering

2. Empyema

Same

3. Suppurative pericarditis

Motel

4. Metastatic abscesses

LUNG ABSCESS

Etiology

 

1. Causative organisms

 

Senior

 

(i) Streptococcus viridans

 

Sub

 

(ii) Staphylococcus aureus

 

Superintendent

 

(iii) Streptococcus pyogenes

 

Police

 

(iv) Pneumococci

 

 

2. Modes of infection

 

 

 

(i)  Aspiration of infected material in

A

 

 

(a) Acute alcoholism

Cunning

 

 

(b) Coma

And

 

 

(c) Anaesthesia

Shrewd

 

 

(d) Sinusitis

Doctor

 

 

(e) Dental sepsis

 

 

Antecedent primary bacterial infection

Post

 

 

(a) Post-pneumonic 

Mortem

 

 

(b) Mycotic infection

Begun

 

 

(c) Bronchiectasis

 

 

(iii)  Septic embolism

 

 

 

(a) Thrombophlebitis

 

 

 

(b) Bacterial endocarditis (right sided)

 

 

(iv)  Neoplasia

 

 

 

(a) Bronchogemc carcinoma 

 

 

 

(b) Metastatic carcinoma

 

 

(v)  Miscellaneous

Pain

 

 

(a) Penetrating chest injuries

In

 

 

(b) Infection of neighbouring organs such as oesophagus, spine,

subphrenic space, or pleural cavity

Heart

 

 

(c) Haematogenous

Gross Appearance

1.  Diameter varies from a few.millimetres to 5-6 ceritimetres. 
2. Usually close to or in contact with pleura. 
3. Begins as a focus of inflammation followed by central necrosis resulting in pus filled cavity. 
4. Enclosing wall initially ill-defined, later more discrete. 
5. Thrombosis of blood vessels is frequent leading to extensive necrosis. 
6. Abscess usually single at first; secondary abscesses may develop at any time due to aspiration of infected material into other segments. 
7. A chronic abscess may show epithelialisation of its wall from the bronchus. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. An acute abscess with dense infiltration of polymorphs and varying number of mononuclear phagocytes. 
2. Alveolar walls are destroyed. 
3. As the condition becomes chronic, fibroblasts multiply and a wall of fibrous tissue is built up around the abscess. 

PULMONARY TUBERCULOSIS

1. Primary infection (Ghon lesion) 

2. Secondary infection: 
(i) Healing with fibrosis 
(ii) Chronic fibrocaseous tuberculosis 
(iii) Acute tuberculous pneumonia 
(iv) Acute miliary tuberculosis. 

Primary infection or Ghon lesion and etiology of tuberculosis have been described in chapter 6 on Granulomata. 

Healing with Fibrosis
1.  Commonest type of secondary infection. 
2.  Lesion is usually at the apex, occasionally at hilum. 
3.  Appears as small depressed scar, better felt than seen, frequently adherent to chest wall. 
4. Black pigment consists of carbon particles contained within phagocytes arrested due to backage of lymphatics by fibrosis.
5. Lime salts usually present and seen in the skiagrams. 

Chronic Fibrocaseous Tuberculosis

1. Cascous tissue breaks down and a cavity forms. 
2. The softened tissue is discharged into a bronchus and coughed up in sputum (Open tuberculosis). 
3. The bronchial wall issoftened and undergoes dilatation, so that the cavity is formed partly as a result of caseation, softening and partly a result of bronchiectasis. 
4. Cavities are formed first and are largest at the apex, later other cavities may be formed in lower lobes. 
5. The cavity may be traversed by bronchi and blood vessels; erosion of blood vessels may lead to serious or even fatal haemorrhage. 
6. Fibrosis is seen as a thickening of the bronchi, blood vessels and pleura, and as numerous white strands on cut surface. 
7. Healing takes place by scarring or by the cavity becoming filled with caseous material. 
8.  The bronchial lymph nodes are either uninvolved or only to a slight degree. 

The characteristics of fibrocaseous tuberculosis, thus are: 

1.  Consolidation and caseation 
2.  Cavity formation 
3.  Acinar lesions 
4. Fibrosis 
5.  Relative escape of trachcobronchial lymph nodes. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. The basic lesion is the tubercle consisting of epithelioid cells and lymphocytes with caseation and giant cells. 
2.  As the tubercles fuse to form larger masses, caseation becomes marked. 
3. The elastic tissue remains intact and holds the caseous material together; in secondary pyo­genic infection this tissue is destroyed and softening soon develops. 
4. Proliferation of fibroblasts and fibrosis are marked, when patient's resistance is good. 
5.  The arteries may show endarteritis obliterans. 
6.  Surrounding alveoli may contain cellular exudate. 

Acute Tuberculous Caseous Pneumonia

1. Lesions ulcerate through the bronchial wall in many places and the infection spreads widely throughout the lung by inhalation. 
2. The lesions fuse together to form large caseous areas which may involve entire lobe or lung,, giving appearance of grey hepatisation in lobar pneumonia. 
3. Acute cavities may form in the consolidated tissue but these are seldom large. 
4.  Pleurisy and bronchitis present. 
5.  Tracheobronchial lymph nodes enlarged and caseous. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Rapid caseation and destruction with no evidence of resistance. 
2. Alveoli are filled with an acute cellular exu­date, mainly mononuclears; exudate becomes rapidly caseous so that all detail is lost. 
3. Elastic tissue is destroyed and no reticulum fibres are formed between cells in the alveoli. 

Acute Miliary Tuberculosis

1.  Results when a caseous focus discharges its contents into a blood vessel. 
2. A caseous bronchial lymph node may become adherent to a branch of pulmonary artery and open into that vessel, giving rise to tubercles in only one lung. 
3. More often the vessel is a vein, tubercles are found in all the organs including lungs, the patient often dies of tuberculous meningitis. 
4.  Lungs are intensely congested and studded with minute tubercles. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Tubercles seen all over the lung framework. 
2.  Alveoli arc either empty or contain catarrhal cells. 
3.  Tubercles present the usual caseous centre, epithelioid cells, lymphocytes are giant cells. 

PULMONARY INFARCTION

Etiology

There are two varieties, the embolic and thrombotic. 

The embolus may consist of :- 
1. Blood clot 
2. Intracardiac vegetation 
3. Air 
4. Particles of fat 
5. Neoplasm. 
6. Parasites - Hydated daughter cyst 
7. Droplets of aminotic fluid containing meconium. 

Pulmonary thrombosis may occur in: 
1. Acute and chronic lung diseases 
2. Mitral stenosis . 
3. Secondary process in pulmonary embolus 
4. Phlebitis migrans 
5.  Postoperative period. 

Predisposing Causes 

1.  Cardiac diseases - mitral steriosis, bacterial endocarditis 
2.  Venous stasis 
3. Child birth 
4. Operations on anterior abdominal wall 
5.  Immobilisation of lower limbs; fracture femur 
6.  Pneumoperitoneum 
7.  Vaginal douching with soapy water in attempt at abortion. 

Gross Appearance
1.  Generally in the lower lobe and multiple. 
2.  Extend to the periphery of the lung substance with apex pointing to the hilum. 
3.  The infarct is red, haemorrhagic because of double blood supply. 
4. Infarct appears as a firm, bright red wedge­shaped area, the base of wedge covered by a thin pleural exudate. 
5.  Raised above the surface and firm. 
6.  Cut surface is dry. 
7.  Infaret, may be barely visible or may involve greater part of a lobe. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Alveoli are stuffed with blood. 
2.  Outlines of alveoli not visible due to necrosis of alveolar walls. 
3.  Thrombosis of vessels within the infarct frequent. 

ATELECTASIS

Types

1.  Atelectasis neonatorum 
 (i) Primary (congenital) 
 (ii) Secondary. 
 2. Acquired atelectasis 
 (i) Obstructive 
 (ii) Compressive. 

Primary (Congenital) Atelectasis

Etiology 
1.  Premature birth 
2. Intrauterine hypoxia: (i) Retroplacental haemorrhage (ii) Premature separation of placenta (iii) Kinking of umbilical cord (iv) Twisting of cord around the neck. 

Gross Appearance
1.  The lungs are collapsed, red-blue, non-crepitant, flabby and rubbery. 
2.  Lung sinks in water. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. The alveolar spaces are uniformly small. 
2. Collapsed appearance. 
3. Surrounded by thick septal wall. 
4. A prominent cuboidal epithelium lines the alveolar sacs. 
5. Air spaces contain granular proteinaceous precipitate mixed with amniotic debris. 

Secondary Neonatal Atelectasis

Etiology
1.  Aspiration of amniotic fluid or blood. 
2.  Respiratory infection with excessive secretions. 
3.  Hyaline membrane disease of the newborn. 

Gross Appearance
Pleural surface mottled; red-blue in depressed areas and pale-pink to grey in crepitant areas. 

Microscopic Appearance
Areas with changes in primary atelectasis alternating with areas of hyperinflation (compensatory emphysema). 

Acquired Atelectasis

Etiology

 

1. Obstructive atelectasis

Farida

 

(i) Foreign body

And

 

(ii) Accumulation of mucus

Amit

 

(iii) Abdominal operations

Bestow

 

(iv) Bronchial tumours

Elegant

 

(v) Enlarged lymph nodes

Training

 

(vi) Tuberculous stenosis

 

2. Compression atelectasis

My

 

(i) Massive pleural effusion

Energetic

 

(ii) Emphyema 

Pet

 

(iii) Pneumothorax

To

 

(iv) Tumour

Consume

 

(v) Cardiomegaly

Eggs

 

(vi) Elevated diaphragm

Gross Appearance

1. May involve all lobes (acute massive collapse leading to death after abdominal operations) but most often is lobar or segmental. 
2. The collapsed lung parenchyma is shrunken below the level of surrounding lung substance. 
3. Red-blue, rubbery, subcrepitant with a wrin­kled overlying pleura. 
4. When portion of a lobe is affected, the adjacent parenchyma becomes overinflated (compensatory emphysema). 

Microscopic Appearance

1. The collapsed alveoli become slit-like; lung appears to have too much tissue and too little air. 
2.  Septal vasculature congested and dilated due to loss of compressive force of air. 

EMPHYSEMA

Pathogenesis
Emphysema develops by operation of two factors: 2 
(i) Degeneration of the walls of alveoli 
(ii) Increased alveolar pressure. 

Increased intra-alveolar pressure is the more important factor. This pressure is increased due to trapped air. It is generally believed that trapping of air is as a result of obstruction of the small bronchi and bronchioles by plugs of mucus. The obstruction is of the check-valve type, which allows air to be drawn in during inspiration but prevents it from passing out during expiration. Obstruction may be spasmodic or permanent. Spasmodic obstruction is exemplified by paroxysmal bronchial asthma, in which the development of emphysema is a constant threat. 

The majority of cases of emphysema, however are slow and insidious in onset. It is hard to visualize a 4. plug of mucus, remaining unaltered in a - small bronchu s and acting as a check valve over long periods. It is possible that the basic lesion is an obliteration of the bronchioles from bronchiolitis and that the air enters and leaves the alveoli by the back door route of pores of Cohn, by which entry of air from neighbouring lobules, occurs more readily than does exit. If such a person has a chronic cough, there is distension of alveoli with destruction of their walls. The mucus plugging of bronchial passage is prevented normally by the ciliary movements. The health of the cilia may be interfered with by viral infections, e.g., influenza, by bacterial infections tuberculosis and chemical agents, e.g., toxic gases. 

Impaired nutrition of the alveolar walls will impair their elasticity. This impairment may be a result of ischaemia. This weakness of alveolar wall is an­other factor in the pathogenesis of emphysema. 

Types of Emphysema

Chatur

 

1. Chronic obstructive emphysema

 

Central

 

(i) Centrilobular or focal

 

Police

 

(ii) Panlobular or diffuse

 

Post

 

(iii) Paraseptal

 

Indore

 

(iv) Irregular

Chalaaq

 

2. Compensatory emphysema

Sub

 

3. Senile atrophic emphysema

Inspector

 

4. Interstitial emphysema

Chronic Obstructive Emphysema

Types

1. Centrilobular emphysema. The central or proximal parts of acini are affected, while distant alveoli are spread. This is the commonest type. 
2. Panlobular emphysema. The acini are uni­formly enlarged from the level of respiratory bronchiole to the terminal blind alveoli. 
3. Paraseptal emphysema. The proximal portion of acinus is normal but the distal part is mainly involved. 
4. Irregular emphysema. The acinus is irregularly involved; almost invariably associated with scarring. 
Gross Appearance
1.  The lungs are very voluminous, very pale and dry, may completely cover the heart. 
2. Large vesicles may be found projecting on the 1. surface, especially at anterior and inferior sharp margins (bullous emphysema). 
3. Cross-section is pale and fine spongy. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Atrophy of the alveolar walls. 
2. Alveoli wide and shallow. 
3. Bases of alveoli are flattened with loss of normal zig-zag lines. 
4. Capillary bed greatly diminished in volume. 
5. Bronchopulmonary veins greatly enlarged. 
 

Fig. 10.3. Emphysema. 

Compensatory Emphysema
1.   Most frequent in the neighbourhood of des tructive disease of the lung, e.g., tuberculosis, abscess, or tumours. 
2. Parts of the lung bordering the foci of atelectasis are emphysematous. 
3. Gross appearance and microscopic appearance same as in chronic obstructive emphysema. 

The term compensatory emphysema is misnomer as there is no necrosis, an essential feature of  emphysema; the better term is compensatory overinflation. 

Senile Atrophic Emphysema
1. Small lung type of emphysema occurring in old age. 
2. Caused principally by atrophy of walls of air spaces. 
3. The air spaces appear to remain in an inspi­ratory phase because of failure of expiratory collapse. 
4. Capillary bed is reduced; lung is pale. 
5. On cross-section, air-spaces are clearly visible. 

Interstitial Emphysema
1. Occurs when air finds entry into the interstitial tissues of lungs as a result of tearing of alveoli by needle puncture, rib-fracture, and stab or bullet wound. It may also be caused by violent coughing. 
2. Innumerable small air bubbles are situated in the interstitial tissues of the lung, along the course of vessels and under the pleura. 
3. The emphysema may extend into the mediastinal tisues and by way of cervical fasciae into the neck. 

BRONCHOGENIC CARCINOMA

Gross Appearance
Gross appearance varies greatly and is better described under 4 types based on the distribution of disease. 
A. Nodular form 
B. Diffuse infiltrative form 
C. Peripheral form 
D. Miliary carcinosis. 

They may represent, in part, different stages of the same process. 
A.  Nodular form
1.  Most common form, present near the hilum. 
2.  Firm, greyish white, poorly circumscribed mass of tissue, showing varying degree of necrosis. 
3.  Poorly vascularised, friable, often associated with constriction of larger bronchi. 
4. Affects middle and lower lobes more exten­sively thfin the upper lobe, but may invade the entire lung. 
5.  Extensions may be seen for a short distance along the bronchi and the blood vessels. 
6. May project into the lumen of the bronchus as a papillary mass, block it completely, and cause atelectasis. 
7. Extends outward for a considerable distance into the surrounding tissue.and may fuse with enlarged bronchial lymph nodes; at times large and multiple metastases. 

B. Diffuse infiltrating form

The turnour masses are found irregularly distributed throughout the lung, poorly vascularised, pallid and necrotic, of irregular size sometimes fusing to form large masses. 

C. Peripheral form

1.  Less frequent; arising from a small bronchus. 
2.  Tend to be more circumscribed and silent. 
3.  Secondary changes may be atelectasis, bronchiectasis and abscess formation. 

D. Miliary carcinosis

There are innumerable nodules, a few millimeters in diameter, usually situated along the course of lymphatic vessels. 

Associated findings (common to allforms)
1. Atelectasis, more marked in nodular form. 
2.  Bronchopneumonia. 
3.  Lung abscess. 
4.  Chronic adhesive pleurisy, more marked in peripheral form. 
5.  Peribronchial and mediastinal lymph node involvement. 

Microscopic Appearance

There are three histological types. 
A.  Epidermoid (Squamous cell carcinoma) 

B.  Anaplastic (Small cell or reserve cell carcinoma 

C.  Adenocarcinomatous (Adenocarcinoma). 

A. Epidermoid carcinoma:

1.  Shows marked differentiation. 
2.  Arises from bronchial epithelium which has undergone metaplasia. 
 

Fig. 10.4.. Bronchogenic carcinoma

Such areas are frequently seen in the bronchial lining quite apart from the presence of bron­chiectasis. 
4.  Squamous metaplasia is especially common in the lining of bronchiectatic cavities. 
5. Occasionally the tumour cells appear as polygonal cells without much differentiation making distinction from anaplastic types difficult. 

B. Anaplastic carcinoma:
1. Consists of short spindle cells loosely arranged in the alveoli. 
2. These cells arise from the deepest layer of the bronchial epithelium. 
3.  At places, they may be arranged around the blood vessels or stroma. 

C.  Adenocarcinoma:
1.  Composed of cubical or columnar cells. 
2.  The cells are mucus secreting. 
3.  The growth may be papillomatous or scirrhous 


 

Fig. 10.5. Bronehogenic. carcinoma -Sites of metastases. 

Spread
The tumour spreads in 3 ways. 
1. Spread through the lung, mainly by perivascular and peribronchial lymphatics with the for­mation of new nodules at a distance from the primary tumour. There may be extension to surrounding structures, e.g., pericardium, parietal pleura, and heart. 
2. Spread to lymph nodes is constant; first the regional lymph nodes (tracheobronchial and mediastinal) and later more distant ones (supraclavicular, cervical, retroperitoneal) may be involved. 
3. Spread to distant organs is very common. The frequently involved organs are liver, brain, bone, kidneys, and adrenals; less commonly pancreas and thyroid may be involved. 

ALVEOLAR CELL CARCINOMA
(Bronchiolar Carcinoma)

1.       Often diffuse; may affect both the lungs; yet localised excisable tumours may occur. 
2. Epithelial cells extend widely in the air spaces. 
3.  The cut surface has a glairy mucoid appearance owing to the mucin. 
4. Papillary processes are common. 
5. Alveoli are filled with mucin. 
6. Dense pleural adhesions are common. 
7. Metastases in regional lymph nodes and distant organs. 


 

Fig. 10.6. Alveolar Cell Carcinoma


 

BRONCHOADENOMA

Fig 10.7 Bronchoadenoma

1. Characterised by its long duration with repeated haemorrhages. 
2. The tumour is usually an adenomatous polyp growing in a main bronchus and causing obstruction of the lumen as well as haemorrhage. 
3. Microscopically, it consists of epithelial cells, uniform in type or arranged in cylindrical form around spaces in glandular formation. 
4. Origin of the tumour is disputed; it may arise  from basal cells in bronchial mucosa or even from epithelized alveoli. 
5. Invasion of the surrounding parenchyma and some lymphatics. 

 


 


 

Chapter 11 : Alimentary system

PEPTIC ULCER

Etiology
The theories of causatiou are summarised below: 
1. Inflammation
(i) Bacterial., Acute ulcers are commonly found after death from acute infectious diseases. 
(ii) Non-bacterial: Gross and histological evi­dence of gastritis of lesser curvature, antrum and duodenal bulb is invariably present with ulcer. 

2. Trauma. Rarely onset of symptoms occurs shortly after blow to upper abdomen. 

3. Infarction or vascular theory. Based upon: 
(i) Crator appearance of the lesion. 
(ii) Autopsy demonstration of defect in gastric wall, appearing like infarct. 
(iii) Demonstration of thrombosed vessels in the base of ulcer. 
4. Chemical theory. Peptic ulcer occurs only in those portions of digestive tract exposed to action of gastric juice (acidic). 
5. Neurogenic or psychosomatic theory. Emotional stimuli cause hypersecretion of gastric juice. 
6. Mucosal resistance. Damaged mucosa cannot resist the action of the normal acid in the gastric juice. 
7. Mechanical theory. Spices, irritants and rough foods promote development of ulcers. 

Gross Appearance

A. Acute Peptic Ulcer
1.  Usually small, may be single, multiple, or in large numbers with a wide distribution. 
2.  Rarely produce symptoms other than haemorrhage. 
3.  Usually heal without visible scar. 

B.  Chronic Peptic Ulcer
1.  Mostly single; at lesser curvature or pyloric canal. 
2.  Great size, with complete penetration of muscular coat. 
3.  The base may be formed by outer coat of stomach wall. 
4. The floor is smooth and fibrous with induration of the surrounding tissues. 
5. Large ulcers may completely penetrate the wall and extend to the adjacent structures viz. pancreas and liver., 
6.  Occasionally an ulcer may burrow into the large bowel resulting in gastrocolic fistula. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Active peptic ulcer shows relatively little exudate, little more than some necrotic material on the floor and at the margins. 
2. In chronic stage, ulcer crator is lined by a thin zone of fibrinoid necrosis under which is a layer of granulation tissue showing leucocytic infiltration. 
3. The muscular coat is completely severed and replaced by fibrous tissue which spreads around at the margins to form adhesions to surrounding structures. 
4. In the floor, arteries show endarteritis obliterans. 
5.  At the margin, mucosal epithelium may show active regenerative change. 
6. Fragments of mucosa may be burried in the fibrous tissue during the ulcerative process and a false impression of malignant change. 

Complications

 

 

1. Acute

 

 

 

Polite

 

(i) Perforation

 

 

Head

 

(ii) Haematemesis

 

 

Master

 

(iii) Melaena

 

 

 

2. Intermediate

 

 

 

 

 

-          Residual abscess

-           

 

 

3. Chronic

 

 

Sane

 

 

(a)  Stenosis

 

 

Please

 

 

(i) Pyloric stenosis

 

Take

 

 

(ii). 'Teapot'deformity

 

Home

 

 

(iii) 'Hour glass'contracture

People

 

 

(b)  Penetration into surrounding viscera­

 

Pay

 

 

(i) Pancreas 

 

Little

 

 

(ii) Liver

 

Bit

 

 

(iii) Bile duct

 

Carefully

 

 

(iv) Colon

Can

 

 

(c) Carcinoma

 

Unite

 

 

(d) Ulcer cachexia

 

TUMOURS OF STOMACH

Classification

 

I. Benign Tumours

 

 

 

1.  Epithelial

P

 

 

(i) Papilloma

A

 

 

(ii) Adenoma

D [Pad]

 

 

(iii) Diffuse gastric polyposis

 

 

2. Mesenchymal

Low

 

 

(i) Leiomyoma

Fibre

 

 

(ii) Fibroma

Food

 

 

(iii) Fibroleiomyoma

Not

 

 

(iv) Neurofibroma

Liked

 

 

(v) Lipoma

Here

 

 

(vi) Haemangioma

Lightly

 

 

(vii) Lymphangioma

 

II. Malignant Tumours

 

 

 

(i) Carcinoma

 

 

 

(ii) Sarcoma

CARCINOMA OF STOMACH

Etiology
1. Exact etiology unknown 
2. Precancerous conditions., 
 (i) Chronic gastric ulcer 
 (ii) Chronic atrophic gastritis. 
3. Predisposing factors:- 
(i) Faulty eating habits 
(ii) Drinking 
(iii) Pernicious anaemia. 
4.  Occurs around 60 years age, may occur much earlier 
5. Blood group. Patients belonging to blood group 'A' are more likely to have carcinoma at cardia, those with blood group '0' are likely to have carcinoma at fundus. 

Gross Appearance
The commonest site is the pyloric region, usually within an inch of but not including the pylorus. Next in frequency is lesser cuvature and least frequent is fundus. Gross appearance is of three types. 

A.  Large cauliflower (Fundal polypoid) type : 
1.  Large, soft fungating mass projecting into lumen of stomach. 

 

Fig. 11.1. Types of Gastric Carcinoma. 

2.  Ulceration of surface gives rise to infection and haemorrhage. 

B. Malignant Ucer (Antral excavating) type: 

1.  Tumour is only slightly elevated and becomes ulcerated early. 
2.  The edges of ulcer are raised and rounded. 
3.  Diameter much larger than usual peptic ulcer. 
4. Cut surface shows much thickening of the wall with yellow flecks of necrosis and sometimes nodules on serous surface. 

C. Diffuse infiltrating (Leather bottle) type:

1.  No real tumour is seen but there is great thickening of the stomach wall. 
2.  Localised form occurs at the pylorus with dense ring of sclerotic tissue which causes pyloric stenosis, and marked dilatation of stomach. 
3. Cut surface is greatly thickened and hard. 

Microscopic Appearance
A. Polypoid type: 
1. Normal mucosa is replaced by atypical glandular tubules which penetrate the muscularis mucosa, spread widely in the submucous coat and may finally appear on the serous surface. 
2.  The glands are lined by one or several layers of cells with large hyperchromatic nuclei. 

B. Anaplastic type: 
1.  Glandular acini are poorly formed or completely absent. 
2. Cancer cells are arranged in masses of single columns separated by dense scirrous stroma. 
3. Several cells contain droplets of mucin. 
4. When the mucin production is excessive, the tumour is converted into a soft gelatinous mass (mucoid carcinoma). 
5. The cells are distended and finally destroyed by clear mucinous material. 

Spread

Local

 

A. Local spread

 

 

 

1.  In the stomach wall

 

 

 

2. Neighbouring structures

 

Please

 

 

(i) Peritoneum

 

Open

 

 

(ii) Omentum

 

Other

 

 

(iii)            Ovaries

 

Laundry

 

 

(iv) Liver

 

Packet

 

 

(v) Pancreas

Sorting

 

B. Spread to the lymph nodes

 

 

 

1.  Regional lymph nodes

 

 

 

2. Along the thoracic duct to supraclavicular and cervical glands, particularly on the left side

House

 

C. Haematogenous spread to:

 

Let

 

1. Liver

 

Lovely

 

2. Lungs

 

Cute

 

3. Central nervous system

 

Kites

 

4. Kidneys

 

Blow

 

5.  Bones

REGIONAL ILEITIS
(Crohn's disease)

Etiology
The etiology is disputed. 
1. Intestinal allergy to certain foods 
2. Mesenteric lymphatic obstruction 
3.  A variant of chronic ulcerative colitis. 

The predisposing factor is emotional stress. 

Gross Appearance
1. Lesions mostly limited to small intestine, usually the terminal ileum near the ileo-caccal opening. 
2. The affected part is thick and rigid; the mucosa presents lumpy thickening known as cobblestone appearance. 
3. Surface usually ulcerated. 
4.  Hypertrophied mucosa between the ulcers projects in a polypoid manner. 
5. Great thickening of the wall results in marked narrowing of the lumen and chronic obstruc­tion. 
6. The proximal segment of bowel is dilated. 
7. Mesentery is stiff and greatly thickened. 
8. Adhesion of the bowel to neighbouring structures results in slow perforation and fistula formation. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Marked oedema of submucosa and, to a lesser degree, the other coats. 
2. Varying degree of ulceration and lymphocytic infiltration. 
3. At an early stage, non-caseating granulating foci with large number of mononuclear phagocytes and foreign body giant cells. 
4. In the later stages, ulceration may obscure and obliterate the primary lesion in submucosa but giant cells may still be found in the regional lymph nodes. 
5. As the disease progresses, fibrosis and cicaterisation dominate. 

ULCERATIVE COLITIS

Etiology

Etiology unknown: 
1. Abnormal activity of proteolytic enzyme, lysozyme. 
2.  Auto-immune process has been suggested on the basis of antibodies to colonic mucosa. 
3.  Allergic hypersensitivity to milk protein. 
4. Emotional stress causing hypermotility and muscular spasm of colon with, subsequent mucosal ischaemia. 

Gross Appearance

1. Rectum and sigmoid colon most commonly affected; en6re colon may be affected; at times disease is restricted to right side of colon (segmental colitis) or occasionally the terminal ileum (reflux ileitis). 

2. Ulceration, begins in the rectum at tips of the mucosal folds immediately over the longi­tudinal muscle bands. 

3. The mucosa is intensely congested and bleeds easily. 

4. Later the ulcers coalesce, giving rise to larger irregular areas of denudation of mucosa, the floor of which is formed by circular muscle fibres. 

5. Between the ulcers especially in long standing cases, islands of swollen hyperplastic mucosa persist. 

6. In some cases numerous polypoid masses are seen (pseudopolyposis). 

7. There may be extensive mucopurulent discharge and haemorrhage from the ulcerated areas. 

8. Attempts at healing take place during remissions but fibrous thickening and stenosis of lumen are uncommon. 

9. During relapses, the colon is markedly spastic and normal sacculation is lost at an early stage. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. The earliest lesions found in the mucosal crypts, which become distended with poly­morphs, cosinophils, red cells and mucus. These lesions are called crypt abscesses. 
2.  The lining epithelium js flattened,, degenerated and usually deficient in ohe area. 
3. The lesion is the consequence of more ex­tensive ulceration produced by coalescence of numerous crypt abscesses. 
4. Ulceration seldom extends more deeply. than the submucosa; the base is formed of vascular granulation tissue with large number of lymphocytes and plasma cells. 
5. The islands of hyperplastic mucosa with great inflammatory infiltration persist t-.ere and there but true adenomatous polyps occur very rarely. 
6. At a later stage of healing, the colon is lined by fibrous tissue over which a flattened epithelia] layer spreads but full regeneration of the mucosa is rare. 

AMOEBIC COLITIS

Etiology
1. Caused by a protozoon, Entamoeba histolytica. 
2. Gradual in onset; incubation period 10-90 days. 
3. Infection occurs through ingestion of cysts. 

Gross Appearance

1. The organisms enter the wall of colon through the mucosa ad settle in the submucosa where they liberate oroteolytic enzyme causing tissue necrosis. 

2. The first visible lesion is the formation of swol­len, congested patches in the mucosa, central parts of which become soft and yellowish, as necrosis occurs. 

3. The mucosa then gives way and an ulcer is formed with undermined margins. 

4. Such ulcers, as they spread, become confluent first in their deeper parts. 

5. The bridges then give way and ulcerated areas are greatly increased. 

6. A considerable part of the bowel may thus have lost its mucosa while in the intervening parts, fragments of mucosa in process of disintegration and separation are present. 

7. Gangrene of the mucosal patches may be superadded. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. The prominent feature is an intense inflamma­tory oedema with little leucocytic infiltration. 
2. Subsequently there is necrosis of the tissues around the entamoebae which multiply and spread in the submucous tissue and thus the necrotic process goes on. 
3. The amoebae are found at margins of ulcers, often in considerable numbers, chiefly in submucous coat. 
4.  Occasionally they penetrate the small intestinal veins and may be seen inside the vessels. 

Complications
1.  Chronicity. 
2.  Intestinal stenosis. 
3.  Faecal fistula and necrotising ulceration of  skin. 
4.  Amoebic hepatitis. 
5.  Tropical abscesses. 
 
 

Ulcerative Colitis

Crohn's Disease

1. Colon 

Thin 

Thick 

2. Mucosa 

(i) Eroded surface (ii) Pseudopolypi 

(i) Cobble-stone appearance 


(ii) Linear ulcers 

3. Microscopic appearance

(i)  Cellular infiltration 


(ii)  Crypt abscesses 
iii)  Erosion of mucosa and submucosa 

(i) Giant cells 


(ii) Eosinophil 
(iii) Sarcoid like lesions 
(iv) Lymphoedema 

4. Complications 

(i) Perforation (ii) Haemorrhage iii) Carcinoma 

(i) Fistulae (ii) Strictures (iii) Intestinal obstruction. 

Ulcerative Colitis vs. Crohn's Disease 
TYPHOID INTESTINE

1.  Affects mainly the Peyer's patches and solitary follicles in the lower part of ileum. 
2. The lesions may be restricted to a few centi­metres above the ileo-cacal valve or may extend proximally. 
3. The typhoid lesion progresses through the following stages: 
(i)  Acute inflammatory swelling of lymphoid tissue. 
(ii)  Necrosis. 
(iii)  Separation of the dead tissue, with formation of ulcers. 
(iv)  Process of healing. 
4. In the early stages, lymphoid tissue becomes swollen and prominent. 
5. The Peyer's patches are considerably raised and their surface has convoluted appearance as parts are fixed by connective tissue bands, whilst the intervening portions swell. 
6. Necrosis then occurs irregularly in the inflammed patch and the swelling becomes more marked; epithelium gives way and ulceration starts. 
7. The dead tissue then inbibes the colouring matter of bile and becomes yellowish brown and ultimately almost black. 
8. Ulceration commences at the margin as the dead tissue is gradually softened and separated. 
9. The process of healing beg ins when the necrotic debris has been separated and the floor has been cleaned. 
10. Epithelium grows over the surface and under­neath it, a layer of fibrous tissue forms. 
11. The lymphoid tissue and usually also the mucosal glands are not usually fully restored. 
12. Completely healed ular has a smooth silky appearance often studded with, minute pig­mented points. 
13. There is never any tendency to cicatericial narrowing of the bowel. 
14. Comparatively rapid spread of necrotic Pro­cess, sometimes leads to perforation and general peritonitis with fatal results. 

Microscopic Appearance

1. Enlargement of Peyer's patches due to congestion and a great increase of nongranular cells derived from reticuloendothelial cells which have become swollen and spherical. 
2. Other cells are monocytes and lymphocytes. 
3. Infiltration of similar cells may be seen extending along the lymphatics of mucous and submucous coats for a considerable distance around and also deep down in the muscular coat. 
4. Haemorrhages occur and increase the swelling. 
5.  There may be some fibrinous exudate. 
6. Polymorphs are absent from the affected area except at the margins, whenthe dead tissue is in process of separation. 
7. Patchy necrosis appears and gradually extends; the patches appear structureless from loss of nuclear staining. 
8. Many of the large cells in the vicinity act as phagocytes and digest remains of cells and nuclei as well as red corpuscles. 
9. Necrosis in the affected tissue is apparently due to the presence of typhoid bacilli though thrombosis of small vessels also may play a part. 

VIRAL HEPATITIS

Types
1.  Infective hepatitis 
2.  Serum hepatitis 
3.  Yellow fever. 

Infective Hepatitis

Gross Appearance
1.  The liver is small and extremely soft. 
2.  The capsule is wrinkled because of rapid shrinkage. 
3.  All the lobules are equally affected. 
4. The cut surface may resemble spleen, presents light yellow and darker red areas; yellow colour is due to remaining necrotic cells being bile-stained, while red colour represents areas in which cells have vanished leaving nothing but sinusoids filled with blood. 

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Widespread necrosis of parenchymal cells. 
2.  The sequence of cellular changes is: 
(i) Detachment from one another. 
(ii)  Disruption of trabeculae. 
(iii)  Swelling and hyaline eosinophilic change in the cytoplasm. 
(iv)  Shrinkage, bile-staining and necrosis. 
(v)  Karyolysis and autolytic disappearance of the dead cells. 

3. Inflammatory cells and often polymorphs are seen in the portal areas; there may be endophlebitis of portal veins. 
4.  In the remaining part of the lobules, the cellular filtrate is largely lymphocytic. 
5. The Kupffer cell and sinusoidal lining cells Portal Cirrhosis enlarge and proliferate. 

Serum Hepatitis
Acquired through use of inadequately sterilized syringes and administration of infected scrum. The lesions are same as in infective hepatitis. 

Yellow Fever
The liver is: 
1.  Enlarged 
2.  Yellow 
3.  Soft 
4.  Friable. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Mid-lobular zonal necrosis, widespread but not confluent. 
2.  Haemorrhages and often extreme fatty change in the surviving cells. 
3. Hyaline or finely granular eosinophilic masses appear in the cytoplasm of the surviving cells and ultimately embrace the entire cells (Councilman lesion). 
4.  The nucleus has inclusion bodies, which appear as tiny, round, eosinophilic masses. 
5.  Little or no inflammatory reaction. 

LIVER CIRRHOSIS

Types
1. Portal (alcoholic) cirrhosis 
2. Postnecrotic cirrhosis 
3. Metabolic (pigment) cirrhosis 
(i)  Cirrhosis associated with haemochromatosis 
(ii)  Cirrhosis associated with Wilson's disease. 
4. Biliary cirrhosis 
5. Miscellaneous 
(i)  Cardiac cirrhosis. 
(ii)  Syphilitic cirrhosis 
(iii)  Neonatal and juvenile cirrhosis. 

Portal cirrhosis
Etiology
1. Infective hepatitis. 
2. Alcoholism - by causing partial starvation, gastritis and due to hepatotoxoic action on liver. 
3. Nutritional deficiency. 
4. Chemical poisons 
Carbon tetrachloride 
Chloroform. 
Tetrachlorethane. 

5. Infections 
Malaria 
Schistosomiasis 
Syphilis. 

Gross Appearance

1.  Liver initially much larger due to fatty change; later atrophic. 
2. Consistence very firm due to large amount of fibrous tissue; difficult to cut. 
3. Surface finely nodular. 
4. Cut surface correspondingly nodular and greasy. 
5.  The nodules are uniform in size, 2-3 mm diameter with varying colour. 
6.  Islands of liver tissue may show no abnormality, but are usually golden yellow because of fatty change. 
7.  Often brownish colouration caused by deposition of iron pigment. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  The earliest change is proliferation of connective tissue in the portal space. 
2.  Fatty infiltration of parenchyma cells in early stages. 
3. As the disease progresses, groups of liver cells are separated by broad strands of fibrous tissue. 
4. Lobular arrangement is lost as there is no central vein at the centre of islands which represent new formation due to regeneration hyperplasia. 
5. The portal vein does not drain into new nodules which get their blood supply from hepatic architecture. 
6. Hyaline droplets (mallory bodies) in the cyto­plasm representing acidophilic degeneration. 
7. Bile ducts more numerous, there is evidently a proliferation of biliary epithelium which estab­lishes connection with new group of liver cells. 

Post-necrotic Cirrhosis

Etiology
1.  Viral. May follow massive liver cell necrosis. 
2.  Toxic agents. Cincophen, arsphenamine, trinitrotoluene, etc. 

Gross Appearance

1. Liver firm, with nodular surface. 
2. Nodules much large and confined mostly to right lobe. 
3. The left lobe is reduced in size, sometimes to a strip of fibrous tissue. 
4. Cut surface shows nodules; much bigger than in portal cirrhosis, colour of cut surface is brownish. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Fibrous bands enclose groups of normal looking liver lobules. 
2. In sections from left lobe, the bands are too thick and prominent with hardly a few parenchymal cells. 
3. Cellular infiltration, predominantly lymphocytic, is more marked. 
4.  Slight intimal sclerosis of medium-sized portal veins. 
5. Fatty change is inconspicuous involving fewer cells. 
6. Focal necrosis and regeneration activity are well marked. 

Biliary Cirrhosis
Etiology 
A. Secondary biliary cirrhosis . 
1 Biliary obstruction: (i) Gall stones (ii) Tumours (iii) Biliary atresia (iv) Stricture of extrahepatic bile duct.
2. Biliary infection. 

B,  Primary biliary cirrhosis 
- believed to be of immunologic origin. 

Gross Appearance

1. Liver enlarged and green. 
2. Capsular surface smooth in early stage, micronodular later. 

Microscopic Appearance

Stage I : Florid duct lesion
1.  Septal and interlobular bile ducts show individaal cell damage. 
2. The ducts are surrounded by dense infiltration of round cells (lymphocytes, monocytes, his­tiocytes, plasma cells) and occasionally eosinophils as well as typical granulomas with Langerhan's giant cells. 
3. With increasing damage, the duct epithelial cells eventually rupture. 
4.  Within the liver lobules, focal round cell infiltrations may be present along with central cholestasis. 

Stage II : Ductular proliferation 
1.  Increasing fibrosis, inflammation and ductular proliferation. 
2.  Larger ducts are reduced in number, granulomas are less common. 
3.  Lesions more widespread involving most of the portal areas. 

Stage III : Scarring 
1.  Inflammatory reaction decreases. 
2. Collagenous septa are seen extending from the portal tracts into and around the hepatic lobules. 

Stage IV : Cirrhosis 
1.  Marked reduction in number of bile ducts. 
2.  Regenerative nodules and round cell infiltrations may be present. 

Complications of Liver Cirrhosis
1.  Portal hypertension 
2.  Hepatic failure 
3. Ascites 
4. Bacterial infections 
5. Carcinoma of the fiver. 

GALL STONES

Types of Gall Stones
1. Pure cholesterol stones 
2. Pure pigment stones 
3. Mixed stones (commonest). 

Characteristics
Cholesterol Stones
 (i) Practically always single 
 (ii) Yellow in colour 
(iii) Triradiate or polyradiate (iv) Mostly present in Hartmann's pouch (v) Sometimes, may be silent. 
Commonly found in fatty fertile females around forty years of age. 
 
 

Pigment Stones
 (i) Size of a rice grain 
 (ii) Multiple 
(iii) Made up of bilirubin (iv) Present commonly in ducts (v) Associated with haemolytic disorders (vi) Greenish blue in colour. 

Mixed Stones

(i) Composed of. (a) Cholesterol (b) Bile pigment (c) Calcium (d) Proteins. 

(ii)  Always multiple 
(iii)  Faceted 
(iv)  Formed in crops 
(v)  Commonest to occur 
(vi)  Cut section shows concentric rings with calcium deposit at the periphery 
(vii) X-ray appearance of a hollow ring. 

Formation of Gall Stones

Three factors play a role in the formation of gall stones. 
1. Infection. Infection is the principal factor. All the infected or mixed stones are associated with cholecystitis. Cholesterol is held in solution in the bile in loose chemical complexes with the bile salts. The infected gall bladder absorbs bile salts rapidly but cholesterol very slowly so that the latter tends to precipitate. When a nucleus of cholesterol is established bilirubin is laid down around it to form a mixed stone. 

2. Stasis. Stasis facilitates the lying down of various constituents of the stones while continuous stream prevents it. In pregnancy, the gall bladder does not empty in response to a fatty meal. Thus gall stones are commoner in the women, especially in multipara. Stasis may also lead to infection which further predisposes to the stone formation. 

3. High bile cholesterol. Deposits of cholesterol in the mucosa may become pedunculated detached and form the starting point of calculi. 

Complications

I. Local: 
A. Stone remaining in gall bladder 
1. Acute cholecystitis: (i) Perforation (ii) Generalised peritonitis (iii) Abscess. 
2.  Mucocele 
3.  Empyema 
4.  Malignancy 
5.  Biliary cirrhosis due to pressure atrophy and fibrosis of liver parenchyma). 
 

B. Stone passing outside the gall bladder 
 1. Obstructive jaundice 
 2. Gall stone ileus 
3.  Cholecysto-colic fistula. 

II. General: 
1.  Neuritis 
2. Dyspepsia 
3. Myocarditis. 

ACUTE CHOLECYSTITIS

Etiology

1.  Causative organisms: 
 (i) Escherichia coli 
 (ii) Non-haemolytic streptococci. 

2. Chemical irritants: (i) Bile salts (ii) Acids. 

3.  Cystic duct occlusion: 
 - Calculi. 

Gross Appearance
1. The wall of the gall bladder thickened. 
2. Serous surface congested and covered with fibrinous exudate. 
3. Mucosa bright red or purple. 
4. Lumen distended, if obstruction of cystic duct is complete. 
5. Fluid appears purulent but frequently consists of an emulsion of cholesterol crystals. 

Microscopic Appearance
1.  Marked inflammatory oedema 
2.  Polymorphs relatively few in number. 

CHRONIC CHOLECYSTITIS

Etiology
1.  Gall stones 
2.  Acute cholecystitis. 

Gross Appearance

1. Bluish colour of normal gall bladder is lost, surface may be opaque. 
2. Sometimes yellow owing to an accumulation of subserous fat. 
3. Wall is thickened and fibrosed. 
4. The cavity size may be normal, dilated or contracted. 

5. Obstruction may result from inflammatory oedema, cicatericial contraction or impaction of stone at the neck leading to dilatation and thickening. 
6. The cavity is filled with clear, colourless, watery fluid secreted by lining epithelial cells (mucocele of gall bladder). 

7. The bile pigment is absorbed and no more can enter owing to obstruction. 
8. Cystic gland at the neck of gall bladder is usually enlarged. 
9. The folds of mucosa are thickened and swollen. 
10. The absorbing and concentrating power of the gall bladder is greatly impaired or lost. 

Microscopic Picture

1.  Marked lymphocytic infiltration with some plasma cells and eosinophils. 
2.  Folds of mucosa are thickened owing to oedema. 
3.  Marked increase in elastic tissue. 

CHOLESTEROLOSIS OF GALL BLADDER
 (Strawberry Gall Bladder)

Etiology

1.  Abnormal absorption of cholesterol from the bile by epithelial cells of gall bladder. 
2.  Lymphatic and venous stasis. 
3.  Failure of mucosa to secrete cholesterol. 

Gross Appearance

1. Wall usually a little thickened. 
2. Mucosa studded with minute, yellow flecks like the seeds of a strawberry. 
3. The intervening mucosa is yellow-green and intact. 
4. The gross appearance may be modified by accompanying chronic cholecystitis. 

Microscopic Appearance
1. Enlargement and distention of mucosal folds into club shapes with aggregations of round to polyhedral histiocytes, within these clubbed ends. 
2. The cells have a foamy, reticulated, fat-laden cytoplasm and small, round, dark, prominent nuclei. 
 

Fig. 11.2. Cholesterolosis of gall bladder. 

3. When the deposit becomes more massive, these cells may die; release of lipids gives rise to the precipitation of cholesterol crystals in the subepithelial region and a subsequent inflammatory reaction of white cells, giant cells and fibroblasts. 

 


 

 

Chapter 12 : Miscellaneous topics

BREAST DISORDERS

Selerosing Adenosis (Fibrosing Adenosis)

Etiology

1. Commonly follows incomplete involution after an interrupted pregnancy or lactational. failure.
2.  Associated with proliferating lesion, e.g.,
papilloma.

Gross Appearance

1.  In early stages, grey firm nodules a few
millimeter in diameter, irregularly distributed.
2. Later, these fuse to form a grey firm fibrous mass fairly well defined, one or several millimetres in diameter.

Microscopic Appearance

The nodule is well defined but not. encapsulated.
There are four distinct phases:

1. Florid phase. There is oedema and irregular proliferation of both epithelial and myoepithelial elements.
2. Phase of epithelial atrophy. There is atrophy of the true epithelial elements. The myoepithelial cells produce a corded appearance which simulates infiltrative carcinoma.
3. Phase of collagenisation. The myoepithelial elements undergo collagenisation which increase the resemblance to scirrhous carcinoma.
 

4. Phase of fibrosis. Fibrosis ultimately dominates the picture leading to atrophy. The acini have a tendency to break up into small groups or clumps of cells. At this stage, it is easily mistaken for carcinoma in frozen sections.


Fig 12-1 Sclerosing adenosis

, Collagen Tissue

Classification of Breast Tumours

I.  Benign tumours
1. Fibroadenoma:
(i) Intracanalicular
(ii) Pericanalicular.

2. Duct papilloma.
 

II. Malignant tumours
1. Carcinoma: (i) Scirrhous carcinoma (ii) Medullary carcinoma (iii) Adenocarcinoma (iv) Duct carcinoma (v) Paget's disease.

Benign Tumours

Sarcoma(i) Primary (ii) Generalised.

Fibroadenoma. A fibroadenoma occurs chiefly in young women originating perhaps at puberty and growing during the years of developing sexual activity. It is commoner in nulliparae than in those who have borne children. It is slowly growing tumour but growth may be more rapid during adolescence, in pregnancy and towards menopause. Two varieties are recognised. -

The intra-canalkular fibroadenoma is the commoner variety. As the hyperplasia involves particularly the specialised. connective tissue of the lobules, the tumour is more of a fibroma than an adenoma. It is usually well encapsulated, has a soft consistence and a rather moist appearance. The cut surface may show many narrow slits, sometimes little masses can be distinguished enclosed within small spaces. The encapsulation may be only partial the tumour blending on one side with the surrounding breast tissue. Microscopically, there is a great proliferation of loose connective tissue of open structure which invaginates the wall of the duct projecting into the lumen to form polypoid masses, and producing great dilatation, elongation and distortion of the ducts. The ordinary connective tissue stroma of the breast takes no part in the overgrowth. The lobules of the surrounding tissue often show hyperplasia.

The pericqnalicular fibroadenoma is a much harder tumour and seldom becomes as large as the preceding variety. it is well encapsulated and has a characteristic mobility when palpated. The cut-surface is white, dry and homogeneous.

Microscopically there is a proliferation of glandular and fibrous tissue. The new connective tissue surrounds the ducts without invaginating them. The picture suggests less active growth than that of the preceding variety.

The distinction between the two forms, however, is not fundamental. No fibroadenoma is entirely of one variety. The division is made on the basis of predominant lesion,

Duct-papilloma (Adenocystoma). The papilloma projects into a Mated duct, usually in the nipple. At first it is composed of a series of folds but as it increases in size the folds or villi adhere together so that the surface becomes relatively smooth. Finally, it descends the ducts and becomes a solid compact mass.
Microscopically, the turnour consists, at first of numerous delicate villi covered by epithelium. As it increases in size and the processes are pressed together, adhere and interlace, gland like spaces are formed so that the appearance becomes adenomatous. The blood vessels are numerous and thin walled so that haemorrhage is common.

Carcinoma of Breast

Carcinoma of breast is of five types;
1. Scirrhous carcinoma
2. Medullary carcinoma
3. Adenocarcinoma
4. Duct carcinoma
5. Paget's disease.

Scirrhous Carcinoma. This is the commonest form of mammary growth occurring in women between the ages of thirty five and sixty five. The growth is situated most often in the upper outer quadrant of the breast. Usually, the growth arises in the substance of the gland fairly close to the nipple, but occasionally an outlying lobule is affected first. Both breasts may be affected simultaneously or in succession. The tumour is mall in size but invading the breast in all directions and it has no capsule. It is fibrous and light grey or pinkish grey in colour. Scattered through the tumour, there are often pale fibrous streaks and pinhead yellow spots of necrotic epithelial tissue.

Microscopically, the tumour is composed of spheroidal epithelial cefis in a stroma of fibrous tissue. The spheroidal cells are believed to be derived firom ductal epithelium. The stroma is abundant and composed of tough fibrous tissue. The elastic lamina of the ducts shows striking overgrowth. Stroma is less dense, often, towards the periphery of the tumour and the epithelial cells are present in great number.


Fig. 12-2 Breast - scirrhous carcinoma.

Atrophic scirrhous carcinoma but very hard and fibrous and fixed to adjacent  structures. Metastasis is very late. Microscopically there are small islands and delicate strands of spheroidal epithelial cells, embedded in dense fibrous tissue.
Medullary (encephaloid) carcinoma It is softer and more cellular than scirrhous variety. The epithefial cells are spheroidal or sometimes columnar. The tumour occurs mostly in the developed breast of a young woman. It grows and disseminates at an early age.
Acute cancer of pregnancy and lactation represent an extreme form of the encephaloid type. It isa highly malignant tumour and leads to an early death, often within a few months. The. breastbecomes diffusely swollen and painful and dilated veins appear under the skin. The tumour is very vascular. On section, the tumour presents a soft, haemorrhagic, infiltrating mass, often with large areas of necrosis. Microscopically, the epithelial cefls show every sign of extreme malignancy. The anaplasia may be so great that the turnour resembles a sarcoma.

Adenocarcinoma. This is a rare tumour of the breast. In its fully differentiated form, it is of soft consistence and may become quite bulky; but is of slow growth, low malignancy and may remain localised for a long time. The microscopic appearance is that of gland spaces surrounded by columnar epithelium.

Duct-carcinoma. This tumour usuaUy arises from one of the large ducts near the nipple. The growth may originate from duct papilloma. Owing to fusion of the papiflary processes, a gland like condition way be produced. The tumour is only slowly invasive. Bleeding from nipple is a common complaint.

Paget's disease. The disease begins with a chronic  eczema of the nipple. After some years, cancer ofThe atrophic scirrhous carcinoma is an extremebreast develops. The skin lesion is malignant, but variety of the ordinary form. It is found in shrivel- I of very slow growth and without glandular involveled breasts, especially in old age and forms a tumour ment. The breast tumour may be rapid growth. The
of very slow growth and low mafignancy. The breastis shrunken, the nipple deeply retracted and the  eczematous area at the nipple is usually bright redskin over the tumour puckered. The tumour is small  and either moist or dry and scaly.

Microscopically, the skin in the affected area shows marked epidermal hypertophy before ulcerationtakes place. The most characteristic feature is the  presence of peculiar structures known as Paget'scells. There are large, clear, vacuolated cells withsmall pyknotic nuclei. They look like clear spacespunched out of the epidermis. They are most abundant in the basal layers, but may permeate theentire thickness of the epidermis. The underlying  dermis shows infiltration with lymphocytes andplasma cells. In the later stages, there is ulceration of the epidermis.

BONE TUMOURS

Osteogenic tumour:
  (i) Benign osteoblastoma

(ii) Osteosarcoma (osteogenic sarcoma)
(iii) Parosteal sarcoma.

Chondrogenic tumours:
(i) Chondroma
(ii) Chondrosarcoma.

Collagenic tumours:
(i) Giant cell tumour (Osteoclastoma)
(ii) Fibrosarcoma.

Myelogenic tumours.
(i) Ewing's tumour
(ii) Reticulum cell sarcoma  
(iii) Multiple myeloma (Plasma cell myeloma).

Osteogenic Sarcoma

Etiology

1.  Occurs commonly in second decade of life.
2.  Males slightly more affected.
3. Commonest -site is the lower limb, especially lower end of femur; other common sites ard humerus, scapula, upper ends of tibia and fibula; about one half of tumours are close to knee joint.

Gross Appearance

1. Fusiform mass at the end of the bone which fades away on the shaft.
2. Later the periosteum is perforated with rapid dissemination of the growth in soft parts.
3. The consistence varies with the amount of bone formed; the tumour may be very soft or sarcomatous or firm and fibrous, or hard and bony.
4. Usually grey, may be highly vascular and haemorrhagic.
5. Necrosis and softening are common.

Microscopic Appearance

1.  Tumour cells are osteoblasts of three types:
(i)  Small spindle cell with hyperchromatic nucleus and poorly defiried cytoplasm.

(ii) Large spindle cell.

(iii) Polyhedral cell.

2.  Giant cells of tumour or foreign body type.

Giant Cell Tumours (Osteoclastoma)

Etiology

1.  Occurs commonly between 20-30 years of age.

2.  Important predisposing factor is trauma.

3. Usual sites ate lower end of femur, lower end of radius, upper end of tibia; occasionally bones of jaw and skull.

Gross appearance

1. Soft, dark red, haemorrhagic mass, sometimes with yellowish areas.
2. There may be great expansion of the end of  bone.

Microscopic appearance

1. Spindle shaped cells, incorrectly termed as stromal cells, but are really the basic mononuclear cells of the tumour.


Fig. 12.3. Giant cell turnour.

2. Multinucleated giant cells of osteoclast type which are largest of all giant cells.

3. The giant cells may represent a development of the mononuclear spindle cells, perhaps representing an absorption phase of activity.

The tumour tends to become malignant.
 

Ewing's Tumour

Etiology

 


1. Occurs under the age of 25 years. 

2. Males more commonly affected. 

3.  Affects diaphysis of bones usually upper and lower parts of femur and tibia, upper parts of humerus and fibula, and pelvis.

Gross Appearance

1.  Very soft, resembling brain tissue.
2. Starts in the medullary cavity, from which it invades and widens the bone canals, expands the cortex and irritates the periosteum to lay down layers of new bone.
3. The bulk of turnour is subperiosteal, the medullary cavity becoming narrowed or even occluded by new reactive bone.

Microscopic Picture

1. The cells are round or polyhedral.

2. Very uniform in appearance with round nucleus and ill-defined cytoplasm.
3. They are closely packed together and are arranged in sheets or columns.


Fig. 12.4 Ewing's tumour

 


 

 

Chapter 13 : General Bacteriology

 

MORPHOLOGY OF BACTERIA

Microscopy
A. Direct microscopy
1.   Equipment.
(i) Optical microscope.
(ii) Bacterial suspension.
(iii) Hollow-ground glass slide - a slide with a hollow of approximately 1.25 cm. in diameter ground out on one surface.
(iv) Cover-slip.

2. Technique:

(i)  Cover the hollow with a thin layer of vaseline Brand Petroleum Jelly.
(ii)  Place a drop of bacterial suspension on the centre of a clean cover-slip.
(iii)  Lower the slide gently on to the cover-slip so that the drop lies undisturbed in the hollow.
(iv) Turn over the slide and examine the drop under high-power objective after locating the edge under low-power lens, with a diminished light intensity.

B. Dark-ground illumination
1. Used for examination of serous exudates for the presence of spirochaetes.

2. The microscope has a special condenser in which lenses are arranged so that direct rays of light are stopped and the material under view is illuminated by oblique rays. 
3.  Bacteria are seen bright against a dark background.

C. Electron microscopy

1.  Magnifications upto 200,000 can be obtained.
2. A powerful electron beam passes through magnetic fields.

3. The suspension of material is dried on a very thin cellulose film through which the beam passes and the image can be seen.

Shape of Bacteria

1. Coccus. A spherical form; at times oval; may be arranged in long. chains, pairs or clusters, depending upon the mode of division.

2. Bacillus:

(i)  A cylinderical rod.
(ii) Division takes place by transverse fission.
(iii) Variations are a straight rod with square ends or a bent rod with rounded or
  pointed ends.

3. Vibrio. Cylinderical form slightly bent or curved on itself frequently resembling a comma (,).

4. Spirillum. Much like vibrio but with multiple bends or spirals.

5.  Actinomyces. With long branching filaments or mycelia.
6. Spirochaete. Long, flexible organism twisted spirally around its long axis and motile without flagella.
7.  Pleomorphism. Variation in shape.

Size of Bacteria

1.  Measured by a special micrometer eye piece.
2.  The unit employed is a micron (u) which is one-thousandth part of a millimetre.

Bacterial Capsule

1.  Bacteria may have readily demonstrable capsules, e.g., Pneumococcus, Friedlander's Flagella bacillus, a loose undemarcated secretion termed slime layer or too thin a capsule to be seen under optical microscope when it is termed microcapsule.

Demonstration of Capsule
(i) In wet films by negative staining with India ink; seen as clear haloes around the bacteria against a dark black background.
(ii) Serological method Bacterial suspension is mixed with its specific anticapsular serum and examined under microscope. The capsules appears swollen due to increase in its refractivity.

3. Functions of Capsule:
(i)  Prevents phagocytosis and enhances virulence.
(ii)  Protects bacteria from lytic enzymes and other deleterious substances.

Bacterial Spore

1. Oval or spherical bodies within the protoplasm, difficult to stain; also termed endospores.
2.  Occur mainly in Gram-positive bacilli; never in cocci.
3. Spore is formed by localisation of a chromatinlike substance which becomes surrounded by thick, resistant membrane. As the spore develops, the bacterial cell degenerates and finally disappears leaving the spore free.
4.  The spore may be central (equatorial), subterminal, or terminal.
5. Spherical or oval in shape; large, spherical terminal spore, e.g., in tetanus bacilli appears as drum-stick.
6. Resistant to unfavourable surroundings and destructive agents due to relatively. thick impermeable membrane and low water concentration of protoplasm.
7. Under suitable growth conditions, spore germinates by rupture of its membrane into an ordinary organism.

Flagella

1.  Thin, delicate, long threads which appear to pierce the cell wall; help in motility.

2.  Position of flagella
(i) Monotrichate. Single flagellum at one pole.
(ii)  Lophotrichate. Tuft of flagella at one or both poles.
(iii)  Amphitrichate. Single flagellum at both poles.
(iv)  Peritrichate. Flagella completely surrounding the body.
3. Motile bacteria may become nonmotile under certain conditions, but nonmotile bacteria never exhibit motility under any conditions; motility may be lost by:
(i) Leaving cultures at room temperature

(ii) Prolonged incubation
(iii) Cultivation on unsuitable media.

4. Flagella are complete antigens and consist of protein.

Reproduction

1.  Multiply by division or simple fission; no true sexual phase.

2. Line of cleavage is at right angle to long axis in cylindrical forms. Cocci tend to become elliptical immediately before division. In many cases the young forms are coherent till they reach adult size.
3.  Under unfavourable conditions multiplication is difficult and slow.
4. Involution forms. Under conditions unfavourable to growth, the organisms become swollen, granular and less readily stainable. These abnormal cells are termed involution or degeneration forms. These are unviable and fail to grow even on a suitable medium.

CULTIVATION OF BACTERIA

Fluid Media (Broth)

1.  Meat extract broth
Peptone is added to the meat extract to incre- 2. ase the nitrogen content, and sodium chloride to render it isotonic.

2. Digest broth
Prepared by an enzyme digest of protein and does not require addition of peptone.

3.  Peptone water
An aqueous solution of peptone and sodium chloride.

Solid Media

1. Gelatin media. Gelatin melts at high temperatures. Thus gelatin media are too difficult to handle and sterilize.

2. Agar (Agar-Agar) media:
(i)  Liquefies on heating to 98°C and sets at 45°C.
(ii) Not damaged by temperatures of autoclave.
(iii) Employed as a slope, deep culture or a plate.

Enriched Media

Simple media (broth or agar) are at times unsuitable for growth of parasitic bacteria, e.g., pneumococcus, gonococcus, influenza bacillus. The same may be enriched by addition of :-

1.     Serum 10%

2.     Blood 5-10%

3.     Ascitic fluid (10%)

4.     Glucose (1-2%).

The melted agar should be cooled to a temperature of 50-55°C before enriching. Above this temperature proteins become coagulated; below this temperature, there may be premature setting.

Selective Media

1. Chocolate Agar
Blood agar heated to 98°C, favours the growth of influenza bacillus.
(i) by converting haemoglobin into haematin.

(ii) by liberating the contents of corpuscles.

2. Dorset's egg medium
Contents of eggs mixed with 10% (by volume) of water, inspissated or coagulated by heating to 70°C, used for Mycobactehurn tuberculosis. Addition of glycerine enhances its value.
3. Loffler's serum
Inspissated serum; used by isolation of Corynebacterium diphtheriae.

4. Special selective media.
Bacteria of one species grow luxuriously while others are inhibited.
(i)  Desoxycholate citrate medium (for dysentery bacilli).
(ii)  Tellurite medium (for diphtheria bacillus).
(iii)  Wilson and Blair medium (for typhoid bacilli).
(iv)  Lowenstein-Jensen medium (for tubercle bacilli).

Anaerobiasis
Some bacteria do not grow in the presence of free oxygen (anaerobic bacteria); some require greatly reduced oxygen tension (microaerophilic bacteria). The following methods are employed to produce anaerobiasis.

1.       Deep agar tubes

Bacteria intended to be grown are inocculated in deeper part of solid media. 5% glucose is added as a reducing agent.

2.       Brewer's medium
Sodium thioglycolate (1%) and glucose are added to the broth. Agar is also added to prevent air currents. Apart from sodium thioglycolate, other reducing agents are cysteine hydrochloride and ascorbic acid.

3.       Glucose broth
Simple glucose broth is kept in boiling water bath for 5 minutes and sealed immediately with petroleum jelly.

4. Robenson's cooked meat medium
Fresh heart muscle is placed in boiling N/20 sodium hydroxide and allowed to simmer for 20 minutes. Fluid is drained off and meat partially dried on a cloth of filter paper. Meat is placed in a test tube and broth containing 0.5% glucose is added to it. The top of the medium may be covered with melted paraffin or vaseline.

5. Reduced iron medium
Sterile iron pieces or iron nails are added to ordinary glucose broth.

6. Mc Intosh and Filde's jar
It is a jar made up of durable glass with a tight-fitting lid that can be firmly clamped. The lid is pierced by a valve. The undersurface of the lid has a catalyst (palladinised asbestos) surrounded by heating element connected to two terminals. A small tube containing methylene blue as an indicator (loses colour in absence of oxygen) may be placed in the jar. Hydrogen is introduced and current is passed. Oxygen content of the jar chemically combines hydrogen to form water, the volume of oxygen is simultaneously replaced by hydrogen.

DESTRUCTION/ELIMINATION OF  BACTERIA 

Methods Employed  
A. Physical agents  

1. Light
2. Gamma rays

3.  Electricity
4.  Desiccation
5.  Heat
(i) Dry heat
(ii) Moist heat.

B. Chemical agents:
1. Acids
2. Alkalies
3. Oxidizing agents
4. Halogens
5. Alcohol and ether
6. Phenols and cresols
7. Salts of heavy metals
8. Dyes
9. Essential oils
10. Detergents
11. Chlorhexidine
12.  Ethylene oxide.

Bacterial filters:
1.  Diatomaceous; earth (kieselguhr) filters:
(i) Berkefeld filter
(ii) Mandler filter.

2.  Chamberland filters
3.  Seitz filters.

IMMUNITY

Types of Immunity
A. Natural (innate) immunity
1. General
2. Species
3. Racial
4.  Individual.

  B. Acquired:
  1. Active:

(i)               Natural

(ii)              (ii) Artificial.
  2. Passive
   (i) Natural
   (ii) Artificial.

Natural Immunity


1. General natural immunity  

 

 
The barriers to invasion by bacteria are skin, mucous membranes and secretions.  

 (a) Skin. Skin is impervious to bacteria.
(i) Some bacteria, e.g., anthrax bacillus, yellow fever virus can pass through extremely minute abrasion. 

(ii) Others require definite breaches in skin continuity, e.g., streptococci, Clostridium tetani. 

(iii) Extensive traumatic lesions are necessary for Clostridium welchii (gas gangrene organism). 

 

 (b) Mucous membranes
(i) Intestinal mucous membrane is relatively impervious to coliform and anaerobic bacteria but readily penetrated by cholera, typhoid and dysentery organisms.
(ii) Nasopharyngeal mucous membrane is previous to haemolytic streptococci and diphtheria bacilli.
(iii) Organisms of syphilis and gonorrhoea may penetrate intact urethral mucous membrane.
Thus mucous membrane is less potent barrier than skin.

(c) Secretions

 (i)  Gastric juice being acidic is bactericidal.  
(ii)  Vaginal secretion is also acidic and bactericidal.
(iii) Nasal secretion, skin tissue and tears contain a bactericidal substance, lysozyme.

Species Immunity
1.  Certain diseases occur both in man and animals, e.g., tuberculosis, anthrax, Psittcosis, rabies.
2. Many diseases occur in man but not in animals, e.g., syphilis, measles, meningococcal meningitis, poliomyelitis, leprosy; leprosy, however, can be transmitted to an animal, armadillos.

3.  Some diseases of animals do not occur in man, e.g., rinderpest, Johne's disease of warm
   blooded animals.

4. Cold-blooded animals are generally not susceptible to disease of warm-blooded animals.
 

Racial Immunity

1. People of tropical regions are more resistant to yellow fever than others.

2. Coloured races are more susceptible to tuber culosis than white people.
3.  People in some parts of Africa and Mediterranean coast are resistant to falciparum

malaria.

Individual Immunity

1.  People with sound health are more resistant to infections than debilitated people.
2. Alcoholics are more prone to infections than non-alcoholics.   
3.  Patients with sickle-cell trait are resistant to falciparum malaria.
4. Members of homozygous twins are equally resistant or susceptible to leprosy and tuberculosis suggesting genetic factor.

Active Immunity

A. Natural

1. Single attack of an infectious disease may confer life-long immunity, e.g., smallpox, chickenpox.
2. An attack of an infectious disease may confer lasting immunity, e.g., enteric fever.
3.  Subclinical infections may render person partially immune, e.g., tuberculosis.

B. Artificial active immunisation

1. By living attenuated organism, e.g., anthrax vaccipation, smallpox vaccination, rabies vaccination, B.C.G., yellow fever vaccination, oral poliomyelitis vaccination.
2. By killed organism, e.g., TAB vaccination, cholera vaccination.
3. By bacterial extracts or filtrates, e.g., diphtheria toxoid, tetanus toxoid.

Passive Immunity
Short lived, usually for  a few weeks or months.

A.  Natural

1.  Transplacental passage of immune bodis from the mother to the foetus.
2.  Transfer of immune bodies through milk of mother to the infant.

B. Artificial passive immunization by immune serum

1. Antitoxin sera. Diphtheria, tetanus

2. Antibacterial sera. Pneumococcal pneumonia, meningococcal meningitis

3. Antiviral sera. Measles, poliomyelitis, yellow fever

 

ANTIGENS AND ANTIBODIES

Antigens

An antigen may be defined as a substance which when introduced into animal tissue, stimulates the production of substances (known as antibodies)  which react specifically with the original substance  introduced.

The common substances which may act as antigensare bacteria, blood corpuscles, serum, bacterial toxins, vegetable toxins.

Haptenes are the partial antigens which fail to stimulate the production of antibodies but can react in vitro with the serum prepared against their organism.

Barring haptenes of pneumococci which are complex carbohydrates, all the antigens are generally proteins. For being an antigen, the protein must be:

1. Foreign to the animal injected
2. Soluble in the animal tissues
3. Possess a certain minimum molecular size.

Antibodies (Immunoglobulins)
1.  Precipitin. An antibody resulting in a precipitate on reaction with antigen.  Types
2.  Agglutinin. An antibody causing clumping of bacteria or other antigenic particles.

3.  Bacteriolysin. An antibody causing lysis and disintegration of bacteria.

4.  Bacteriocidin.  An antibody that kills the bacteria without producing lysis.

5. Antitoxin. An antibody that neutralizes the toxic effect of a toxin.

Chemically the antibodies are globulins, mostly gamma-globulins.

Site of Production

The antibodies are thought to be produced by the following types of cells.
1. Cells of reticuloendothelial system:
(i)In the spleen
(ii) In the liver (Kupffer cells)
(iii)  In the lymphoid tissue

(iv) In the bone marrow
(v) Wandering macrophages of tissues
 (vi) Monocytes in blood.
2. Lymphocytes
3. Plasma cells.

Classes of Immunoglobulins

Human sera contain IgG, IgA, IgM, IgD and IgM in descending order of concentrations.

Auto-antibodies

Under some circumstances the body develops antibodies capable of reacting with antigens of the same individual. Such antibodies are termed autoantibodies and presumably result from post-natal somatic mutation of the antibody producing cells.

These antibodies are associated with a group of disorders called auto-inintune diseases which include haemolytic anaemia, thrombocytopenic purpura, chronic thyroiditis, Addison's disease chronic pancreatic disease and heart disease.

ANTIGEN-ANTIBODY REACTIONS

1. Agglutination or clumping

2. Precipitation or flocculation

3. Lysis or disintegration

4. Destruction

5. Complement fixation

6. Phagocytosis or intracellular digestion

7. Neutralization.

Agglutination

The antigen inducing agglutination is termed agglutinogen, the corresponding antibody aggititinin and the resultant clumps agglutinate. The medium in which agglutinogen and agglutinin react is termed menstrum. The incomplete or monovalent antibodies do not cause agglutination, though they may combine with the antigen and block it preventing agglutination if suitable agglutinin is added later.

Techniques ofAgglutination

1. Slide test. A thick suspension of antigen and the antiserum are mixed thoroughly on a glass slide and observed through naked eye, hand lens, or low power of the microscope. Slide test is none too conclusive and is used as a mass screening test.

2. Tube test. The bacterial suspension, standardised to the required opacity is tested against serial dilutions of serum. The highest dilution of the serum in which agglutination is visible is called the titre of the serum.

Applications ofAgglutination Reaction

1.  Widal test for typhoid

2. Weil-Felix reaction for typhus fever

3.  Paul-Bunnell test for infectious mononucleosis

4.  Cold-agglutination test for primary atypical pneumonia

5.  Coomb's test for Rh antibodies

6.  Haernagglutination test for blood group typing

7.  Urinary human chronic gonadotrophin test for pregnancy.,

Precipitation

The antigen participating in precipitation reaction is known as precipitinogen and the antibody precipitin.

Differences from Agglutination

1. In agglutination, antigen is a suspension of relatively large particles; in precipitation it is an extremely fine colloidal solution.

2. In agglutination, the agglutinate is formed largely from the antigenic suspension; in precipitation, precipitate is formed mainly by the serum globulin, i.e., the antibody.

3. Precipitate is at times soluble; it may readily dissolve by changing the physical conditions of the test, e.g., a temperature over 55°C.

4. In agglutination test a ~tandard concentration of antigen is tested against serial dilutions of antibody; in precipitation a standard concentration of antibody is tested against serial dilutions of the antigen.

Applications of Precipitation Reaction

1. Precipitation reaction is more sensitive and specific reaction for detection of antigen and is applied in medico-legal laboratories for:
(i) Examination of blood stains
(ii) Examination for semen stains
(iii) Examination for food adulteration.

2.  C-reactive protein test
3.  Streptococcal grouping by Lancefield technique
4. VDRL rest for syphilis
5. Standardisation of toxins and toxoids
6.  Kahn test for syphilis.

Lysis (Disintegration) and Destruction

1.     Bacteriolysis
(i) Cholera vibrios when injected intraperitoneally into immune guinea pigs first lose their motility, then become swollen and granular (involution forms) and finally undergo disintegration.

(ii) Involution forms followed by disintegration also result when normal guinea pig is inoculated intraperitoneally with vibrios premixed with immune serum even if the serum has been heated at 70°C for one hour (Pfeiffer's phenomenon).

The reaction of bacteriolysis is limited to some Gram-negative bacilli.

2. Haemolysis (Cytolysis)
Red blood carpuscles are readily lysed in the presence of appropriate serum.

Bacterial Destruction

Similar to bacteriolysis, but in this type of reaction bacteria are killed without undergoing disintegration.

Complement Fixation

Apart from antigen and antibody, another factor is also involved in antigen-antibody reaction. This factor is known as Complement and consists of at least four components; C, and C2 are heat labile whereas C3 and C4 are heat stable.

Complement is found in the normal serum of all animals; guinea pigs have most marked and constant quantities of complement and serve as a source for laboratory purposes.

Complement Fixation Test

If complement is added to antigen-antibody mixture it completes the antigen-antibody reaction and getsfixed in the process. A further addition of red blood corpuscles (usually sheep RBQ and haemolysin does not result in haemolysis as complement is no longer available in fixed form. If however, the antigen and antibody in the original mixture are not specific for each other, they fail to fix the complement and lysis of RBC results. This is known as complement fixation test.

Complement fixation test can be applied in two ways :-

1. With a known antigen and an unknown serum, e.g., Wassermann reaction for syphilis.

2.  With an unknown antigen and known serum.

Phagocytosis

The cells involved in phagocytosis of bacteria are of two types:

1.  Microphages, which are mainly polymorphs.

2.  Macrophages comprising the large mononuclears and endothelial cells.

However these cells are unable to ingest (phagocytose) the bacteria in the absence of serum indicating that one or more substances in the serum contribute to the process of phagocytosis. Two such substance are:

1. Opsonins, inactivated by heating at 55°C

2.  Bacteriotrophins, heat stable.

Toxin-Antitoxin Neutralization

Toxin are antigenic and when introduced into the body stimulate the production of antitoxins. An antitoxin neutralises the effect of toxin on the body.

Applications of Neutralization Tests

1. Shick test for diphtheria.

2.  Anti-streptolysin-0 test for streptococcal infections.

HYPERSENSITIVITY

Hypersensitivity means a susceptibility of an organism to substances which give rise to little or no reaction in normal members of the same species. It is divided in three groups:
1.  Anaphylaxis, generally produced experimentally in animals.

2.  Atopic hypersensitivity, e.g., asthma, hay fever, urticaria.

3. Bacterial allergy (delayed hypersensitivity), e.g., tuberculin reaction, Frei-test (in lymphogranuloma venereum) and Casoni test (in hydatid disease).

 


 

 

Chapter 14 : Systematic bacteriology

STAPHYLOCOCCUS

Species
1. Staph. aureus

2. Staph. albus

3. Staph. citreus

Habitat
Animal body is the natural habitat; present on the skin, in the nares and gastrointestinal tract frequently causing pyogenic lesions.

Morphology
1. Shape. Spherical

2. Size. 0.7-1.2 µ

3. Arrangement
(a)  On solid media. Grape like clusters
(b)  On fluid media. Pairs, short chains, small groups, or single.

4. Motility. Non-motile
5. Capsules. None
6. Spores. None
Staining
(i)  Readily stained by aniline dyes; Gram positive
(ii)  May be Gram-negative while in old cultures or phagocytosed.

Cultural Characteristics

1. Grow readily on the usual media; temperature range 12-44°C, optimum temperature 37°C

2.  Facultative anaerobes, i.e., multiply both in aerobic and anaerobic conditions.
Optimum pH 7.4-7.6 (slightly alkaline).
In fluid media. Rapid growth; in 24 hours there is marked general turbidity with deposit that disperses on shaking.
On agar plate. The colonies are circular, moist, opaque, smooth and easily picked off. Pigment of variable colour is produced on fresh isolation:
Staphylococcus aureus ... Golden
Staphylococcus albus ... White
Staphylococcus citreus ... Lemon yellow

6. On blood agar plate. Pathogenic strains usually but not always show partial or complete haemolysis in the atmosphere with high carbon dioxide content. Occasionally haemolysis may be observed with non-pathogenic strains.

Biochemical Activity

1. Ferment lactose, glucose, maltose, glucose and mannitol with acid production but with no gas. Mannitol is generally fermented by Staphylococcus aureus - a property that distinguishes it from non-pathogenic strains.

2. Proteolytic activity. Staphylococcus aureus liquefies gelatin more frequently than nonpathogenic cocci. Indole is not produced.

3. Catalase positive.

Toxin Production

1. Alpha toxin

(i) Most important of all toxins and produced in high carbon-dioxide environment.
(ii) Haemolyses rabbit red blood cels; less active with sheep cells, least active with human cells.
(iii)  Antigenic.
(iv)  Found in strains of human origin

2. Beta toxin:
(i) Hemolyses sheep red blood cells with no effect on rabbit cells and human cells.
(ii) Hot-cold phenomenon. With sheep cells haemolysis little at 37°C but is marked on cooling.
(iii)  Found in strains of bovine origin.

3. Delta-toxin:
(i)  Haemolyses sheep red blood cells; less active with rabbit cells and human cells.
(ii)  Found in strains of human origin.

4. Leucocidin. Destroys white blood cells.
5. Enterotoxin. Produces gastro-enteritis.
6. Coagulase.
(i)  Not a true toxin but an antigenic enzyme.
(ii) Found in Staphylococcus aureus but not in saprophytic (i.e., nonpathogenic) staphylococci.

Pathogenicity
The staphylococci tend to produce localised lesions. Most of acute suppurative lesions are caused by taphylococci.
1. Skin lesions:
(i)  Sycosis
(ii)  Carbuncle
(iii)  Impetigo contagiosa
(iv)  Furuncles
(v)  Boils
(vi)  Abscesses

(vii) Wound and burn sepsis.

Deep infection:
(i) Pneumonia
(ii) Osteomyelitis
(iii) Septicaemia
(iv) Peritonitis
(v) Otitis media

(vi) Perirenal abscess.

3. Gastrointestinal infections:
(i) Pseudomembranous enterocolitis, generally a sequel to oral administration of broad-spectrum antibiotics.
(ii)  Food poisoning.

Coagulase Test

1. Tube method. Human plasma is diluted 2-4 times with saline and inoculated heavily with the organism. A known positive organism is similarly tested as a control. The tubes are incubated at 37°C. If coagulation occurs in 2-5 hours, the organism is coagulase-positive.

2. Slide method: The organism is mixed with a drop of plasma on the glass slide. If plasma coagulates the organisms is coagulate positive.

Coagulase-positive (or coagulase producing) organisms usually from aureus pigment, and are termed Staphylococcus aureus. Such organisms are pathogenic.

Coagulase negative organisms are nonpathogenic and include Staphylococcus albus and Staphylococcus citreus.

 

Pathogenic stains

Nonpathogenic strains

1. Coagulase

positive

negative

2. Aureus pigment

produced

Not produced

3. Mannite fermentation

+

-

4. Gelatin liquefaction

+

-

5. Phosphatase test

-

-

Organisms are grown on an agar medium containing phenolphthalein diphosphate in a petridish. If the organisms produce phosphatase, phenolphthalein is liberated free and can be detected by pink coloration on exposure to ammonia vapours.

STREPTOCOCCUS

Species
1. Strept. haemolyticus

2.     Strept. viridians

3.     Strept. faecalis

Morphology
1. Shape. spherical or oval
2. Sim. 0.6-1 µ
3. Arrangement. Arranged in chains'of varying lengths.
(i)  Streptococcus faecalis occurs in pairs of short chains.
(ii) Streptococcus haemoocus and Streptococcus viridans exhibit marked irregularities.

4. Motility. Nomnotile
5. Capsules. Usually without capsules
6. Spores. Nonsporing
7.  Staining. Readily stained by simple dyes; Gram-positive.

Cultural Characteristics

1. Pathogenic species do not grow well on ordinary media and require enrichment with serum, ascitic fluid or blood; nonpathogenic species, e.g., Streptococcus faecalis grow luxuriously on ordinary media.

2.  Optimum temperature 37°C, range 20-42°C
optimum pH 7.4.

3. Facultative anaerobes; grow best in the presence of free oxygen; some strains are microaerophilic (often called anaerobic though erroneously).

4.  In fluid media.
(i) Haemolytic strains tend to give granular deposit with clear supernatant fluid.

(ii) Non-haemolytic strains give well marked general turbidity with only a slight deposit.
(iii)  Viridans strains give both general turbidity and a deposit

Strains with long chain tend to give a deposit, those with short chains, general turbidity.

5. On solid media:
(a)  On nutrient agar
(i) Haemolytic and viridans strains form small, opaque, raised, circular colonies with a granular structure.
(ii)  Streptococcus faecalis gives larger, more opaque, smooth colonies.

(b)  On blood agar. Three types of appearances:
(i) Alpha type. Individual colonies are surrounded by a zone of green coloration which is further surrounded by a thin clear zone of complete lysis (Streptococcus viridans).
(ii) Beta type. Individual colonies are surrounded by a clear zone of complete haemolysis (Streptococcus haemolyticus).
(iii) Gamma type. No change occurs in the medium surrounding the colonies (Streptococcus faecalis).

On repeated subcultures on blood agar the virulence of the organism may be lost without alteration in the appearance of colonies (Matt attenuated); at times, such loss of virulence may leave the colonies smooth, regular and glossy. This change in appearance is associated with "M" type specific antigen.

Biochemical Activity

1. Ferment carbohydrates with acid production

2. Pigment not formed

3. Indole not produced

4. Gelatin usually not liquefied except by some faecalis strains -

5.  Some faecalis strains produce H2S

6.  Litmus milk acidified; clotted by faecalis strains.

Serology

Antigenic structure of streptococcus is extremely complex and has three well-defined components:

1.  Type-specific protein "M" which is stable and related to virulence.
2.  Nonspecific nucleoprotein "P".
3.  Group-specific carbohydrate "C".

On the basis of precipitation reaction with group specific "C" antigen present in the cell wall, haemolytic streptococci are divided in 18 Lancefield groups (Groups A. B, C, D, E, F, G, H, & L, M, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T). All the human strains are found in Group A which on further typing with type specific "M" Protein is divided into 55 types (types 1, 2, 3, etc.)

Classification

The streptococci are classified into α, β, γ-streptococci on the basis of appearance in blood agar.

α -(viridans group) and γ-(enterococcus group) are further classified into species on the basis of physiological and biochemical activities.

β-haemolytic streptococci are classified as described under serology.

Toxin Production

Toxin produced are:
1.  Haemolysin (Streptolysin O and streptolysis S)
2. Leucocidin
3. Fibrinolysin
4. Erythrogenic toxin
5.  Hyaluronidase (by some strains).

These toxins are produced by haemolytic streptococci, particularly of group A.

Dick test
The test is employed for detecting susceptibility to scarlet fever. 0.1-0.2 ml of suitably diluted preparation (skin test dose) of erythrogenic toxin is injected intradermally on one forearm. A heat inactivated preparation of toxin is also given on other forearm as a control. An erythemaatous flush appearing within 8-12 hours and fading in 24 hours
in test forearm but not control forearm indicates susceptibility to scarlet fever.

Pathogenicity

A. Streptococcus haemolyticus
1. Cellulitis
2. Septicaemia
3. Scarlet fever
4. Puerperal fever
5. Eryseplas
6. Pharyngitis and tonsillitis
7. Meningitis
8. Pneumonia
9. Empyema
10.  Otitis media
11.  Hypersensitivity states:
(i) Rheumatic fever
(ii) Acute glomerulonephritis.

12. Secondaary infections, e.g., bronchopneumonia following measles, whooping cough and influenza.

B. Streptococcus viridans
1.  Normal inhabitants of mouth and throat.

2. May cause sepsis following tooth extraction and subsequent bacteraemia; on previously damaged heart valves, bacteraemia causes subacute bacterial endocarditis.

C. Streptococcus faecalis
1.  Normal inhabitants of intestine.
2.  May produce cystitis, pyelitis, and wound infection.

Schultz-Charlton Reaction

Intradermal inoculation of serum, collected from convalescent cases of scarlet fever, into a patient showing the erythematous rash results in local blanching.
This reaction is intended for diagnosis of scarlet fever. The reaction is produced also by streptococcal antitoxin which is more practicable than convalescent serum.

Immunization Against Scarlet Fever

A. Active immunization
Performed by subcutaneous injections of increasing doses of erythrogenic toxin. An initial dose of 500 STD (skin test dose) increasing to 80,000- 100,000 STD in a course of five injections.

B. Passive immunization
The contacts are screened by Dick test and the positive cases are given 5-10 ml of streptococcal antitoxin serum subcutaneously.

PNEUMOCOCCUS

Species
Diplococcus pneumoniae

Morphology
1. Shape. Oval cocci with one end broad and the other pointed (flame shaped or lanceolate appearance).
2. Size. 1µ.
3. Arrangement. In pairs with broad ends adjoining.
4. Motility. Non-motile.
5. Capsule. Polysaccharide capsule enclosing each pair. Capsules demonstrable in fresh specimen and lost on repeated culture.
6. Spores. None.
7. Staining.
(i) Readily stained by aniline dyes; Gram positive.

(ii) Capsule demonstrable as a clear hole in Indian ink preparation.

 

Cultural Characteristics

1.  Grow only on enriched media; temperature range 25-42°C; optimum temperature 37 °C.

2. Aerobes and facultative anaerobes; growth improved by 5-10% CO2.

3. Optimum pH 7.8, range 6.5-8.3.

4. In blood agar.
 (i) After 18 hours incubation the colonies are small (0.5-1.0 mm), glistening, and dome shaped.
(ii)  In older cultures, the colonies are flat with raised edges and central umbonation.

5. In fluid media, e.g., glucose broth, there is form turbidity. Rapid autolysis due to activity of intracellular enzymes. Autolysis enhanced by bile salts and sodium lauryl sulphate

Biochemical Activity

1.  Ferments lactose, maltose, glucose, sucrose and inulin with acid production.

2.  Gelatin not liquefied.

3.  Indole not formed.

Serology

Pneumococcus contains two main antigenic components.

1.  A nucleoprotein, common to all types.

2. A type specific polysaccharide termed specific soluble substance (S.S.S.) because it diffuses into the culture medium or infective exudates and tissues.

Pneumococci isolated from cases of lobar pneumonia are divided into 4 types, I, II, III and IV. On further serotyping, about 80 serotypes are known.

Pneumococci can be typed by:
1.  Agglutination of organism by the type specific antiserum.

2.  Precipitation of the specific soluble substance with the specific serum.

3.  Capsule-swelling reaction.

 

Toxin Production

1.       Pneumococcus does not produce a soluble toxin; the toxic symptoms in pneumococcal infections are associated with specific soluble substances present in the capsule; noncapsulated forms are avirulent.

 

2.       Haemolysin (oxygen liable) and leucocidin are produced but these are too weak to contribute to virulence.

Pathogenecity

Pneumococcus is commensal in the mouth and nasopharynx of many healthy persons. It produces:

1.     Lobar pneumonia

2.       Bronchopneumonia

3.       Empyema

4.       Otitis media

5. Meningitis

6. Arthritis

7. Endocarditis

8. Sinusitis

9. Primary peritonitis in children.

Bile Solubility Test

Addition of bile (or bile salt) to the broth culture of pneumococcus results in lysis of the organisms. 2-4 drops of sodium desoxycholate (1:100) are added to 5 ml of a broth culture of suspected pneumococcus (pH6.6) The mixture is allowed to stand at 37°C The pneumococcal culture gets cleared in 10-15 minutes.

Optochin Sensitivity Test
The test is employed to differentiate pneumococcus from Streptococcus vitidans. Pneumococcus is sensitive to optochin (ethyl cupreidine hydrochloride) whereas Streptococcus viridans is not. A disc impregnated with optochin is applied on the solid culture. A large zone of inhibition of growth occurs with pneumococcus but not with Streptococcus viridans.

Quelling Phenomenon

This is employed for typing of pneumococci prior to serum therapy in lobar pneumonia. Sputum is mixed with a drop of each serum on a glass-side and covered with a cover-slip. After about 5 minutes, the slide is examined under a microscope.
The cocci in the presence of the homologous serum appear swollen with a ground-glass
appearance.

NEISSERIA

Species

1.     N. gonorrhoeae

2.     N. meningitidis.

Morphology

1.  Shape. Spherical or oval cocci.

2.  Size. 0.6 x 0.8µ

3. Arrangement. In pairs with adjacent sides flattened. Long axis of the coccus is at right angle to axis joining the two cocci.

4.  Motility. Non-motile.

5.  Spores. Non-sporing.

6.  Capsules. Non-capsulated.

7.  Staining. Readily stained by aniline dyes; Gram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Do not grow on ordinary media.

2.     Grow on media enriched with animal protein such as blood, serum or ascitic fluid.

3.     Strict aerobes; growth improves in presence of 10% CO2 and high humidity.

4. Optimum pH 7.4-7.6.

5. Optimum temperature 37°C.

6. In fluid media, growth is poor with a slight granular deposit with little general turbidity.

7. On solid media. The colonies are:

(i)  Small (0.6-1.0 mm in N. gonorrhoeae, 1-2 mm in N. meningitidis) with regular edge.
(ii)  Round, convex.
(iii)  Greyish white (N. gonorrhoeae) or bluish grey (N. meningitidis).
(iv)  Translucent.

Biochemical Activity

Very little biochemical activity

1. Ferment some carbohydrates with acid production. Maltose is fermented by N. meningitides but not by N. gonorrhoeae

2. Gelatin not liquefied.

3. Indole not produced.

4. No change in litmus milk.

Neisseria gonorrhoeae (Gonococcus)

Serology

Gonococcus has a complex antigenic structure with a group polysaccharide

and a group nucleoproteins. Two types, type I and type II are described with numerous subtypes. Type I includes most of the strains from acute cases.

 

Pathogenicity

Causes gonorrhoea in human beings only.

 

Nelsseria Meningitidis (Meningococcus)

Serology

Meningococcus has a complex antigenic structure with     :-

1. Group specific polysaccharide

2. Group specific nucleoprotein

3. Type specific polysaccharide

Toxin Production

Meningococcus produces an endotoxin which is difficult to demonstrate.        

Pathogenicity

1. Cerebrospinal meningitis.

2. Chronic meningococcal septicaemia

ESCHERICHIA

Species

Escherichia Coli

 

Habitat

Widely distributed in nature; present in faeces of man and animals, soil, and surface water.

 

Morphology

1. Shape. Rods with rounded ends.

2. Size. 1.3 x 0.6µ

3. Arrangement. Singly or in pairs.

4. Capsules. Found in some strains.

5. Spores. Nonsporing.

6. Motility. Motile by peritrichate flagella.

7. Staining. Stain readily with simple dyes;

Cultural Characteristics

1. Grows readily on ordinary media.

2. Facultative anaerobes.

3. Optimum temperature 37°C, range 10-40°C.

4. Optimum pH 7.4-7.6.

5. In fluid media:

 (i) General turbidity in 24 hours.

 (ii) On further incubation, a deposit readily dispersible on shaking.

6. On solid media:

 (i) On nutrient agar, the colonies are round,­ smooth, raised, greyish, and

semiopaque.

 (ii) On MacConkey's medium. Colonies bright pink.

 (iii) Growth is grossly inhibited on selective media, e.g., DCA or SS agar.

 

Biochemical Activity

1. Ferments glucose, lactose, mannitol, maltose with production of acid and gas.

2. Gelatin is not liquefied.

3. Indole is produced.

4. Methyl red positive.

5. Voges Proskauer test negative.

6. Citrate negative.

7. H2S not produced.

Serology

1. Somatic O antigen.

2. Flagellar H antigen.

3. Surface K antigen - contributes to virulence by inhibiting phagocytosis.

 

Toxin Production

 

1.  Endotoxin, associated with O antigen

2.  Enterotoxin

3.  Haemolysin

 

Pathogenicity

 

Generally a commensal in the intestine; produce:

1.  Diarrhoea, particularly infantile diarrhoea

2.  Cystitis

3.  Pyelonephritis

4.  Peritonitis

5.  Wound infections

6.  Abscesses.

 

SHIGELLA

 

Species          

1.  Sh. Shigae

2.  Sh.flexneri

3.  Sh. Boydii

4.  Sh. sonnei.

 

Morphology

 

1. Shape. Rod shaped bacilli.

2. Size. 1.3 x 0.5µ

3. Arrangement. Single.

4. Motility. Non-motile.

5. Capsules. Noncapsulated.

6. Spores. Nonsporing. 

7. Staining. Readily stained by simple dyes; Gram negative.

 

Cultural Characteristics

 

1. Grows readily on ordinary media.

 

2. Facultative anacrobe.

 

3. Optimum temperature 37°C, range 10-42°C.

 

4. Optimum pH 7.4.

 

5. On fluid media,

(i)   General turbidity in 24 hours.

(ii)  On further incubation, a deposit readily dispersible on shaking.

 

6. On solid media:

(i)   On nutrient agar, the colonies are small, circular, convex, smooth and translucent.

 (ii) On MacConkey's medium, colonies are colourless except Shigella sonnei which produces pale pink colonies.

(iii) Growth is inhibited on Wilson and Blair bismuth sulphite medium.

 

Biochemical Activity

 

1. Carbohydrates.

(i)   Ferments glucose with acid production.

(ii)  Mannitol is fermented by some species; not fermented by Shigella shigae.

(iii)  Lactose not fermented (except Shigella sonnei).

 

2. Methyl red positive

3. Citrate negative.

4. H2S not produced.

 

Toxin Production

 

Shigella shigae produces an exotoxin; Shigella flexneri and Shigella sonnei produce endotoxin.

 

Pathogenicity

 

Shigellae produce bacillary dysentery.

 

SALMONELLA

 

Species

1.  S.typhae

2.  S. paratyphae A

3.  S. paratyphae B

4.  S. paratyphae C

 

 

Morphology

 

1.    Shape. Rod shaped bacilli.

2.    Size. 1.3 X 0.6µ

3.    Motility. Motile by peritrichate flagella.

4.    Capsules. Noncapsulated.

5.    Spores. Nonsporing.

6.    Staining. Readily stained by ordinary dyes; Gram negative.

 

Cultural Characteristics

 

1.    Grows readily on ordinary media.

2.    Facultative anaerobes.

3.    Optimum temperature 37°C, range 15-40 °C

4.    Optimum pH 7.4-7.6.

   

5. On fluid media
(i)  General turbidity in 24 hours.
(ii)  on further incubation, deposit readily dispersible on shaking.

6. On solid media
On nutrient agar, the colonies are large, circular, low convex, smooth and translucent.
(ii) On MacConkey's medium and desoxycholate-citrate, medium, colonies are colourless.
(iii) On Wilson and Blair bismuth sulphite medium, jet black colonies with a metallic sheen.

Biochemical Activity

1. Ferments glucose, maltose, mannitol, dulcite
with acid and gas production, lactose, saccharose and salicin are not fermented.
2. Citrate positive.
3. Produce H2S.
4. Do not liquefy gelatin.

Serology

1.  Flagellar H antigen. Heat labile protein,
strongly antigenic.

2. Somatic O antigen. A phospholipid-proteinpolysaccharide complex; present in the cell wall; weaker than H antigen; heat stable.
3. Surface Vi antigen. Heat labile; analogous to K antigen of Escherichia; lost on repeated culture; weak antigen.

Pathogenicity

1.  Enteric fever.
2.  Gastroenteritis.

Diagnosis of Enteric Fever

1.  Blood culture. Posive in first week and mostly also second week.
2.  Stool culture. Stoll culture is helpful right from first week till convalescence.
3. Urine culture. Positive during 2-4th weeks. Cultures may be made of MacConkey's medium, desoxycholate citrate agar medium and Wilson-Blair medium (most selective).
4. Widal reaction. Test for measurement of H and 0 agglutinins for typhoid and paratyphoid bacilli in patient's serum. Two types of tubes are used;
(i) - A - narrow tube with conical bottom (Dreyer's agglutination tube for H agglutination.

 

1/10

1/20

1/40

1/80

1/160

1/320

1/640

Control

TO

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TH

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AH

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BH

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 (ii)  A short round- bottomed tube (Felix tube) for O agglutination.

Seven dilutions of patient's serum are made in saline 1/10, 1/20, 1/40, 1/80, 1/160, 1/320, 1/640). O and H suspensions of Salmonella typhi (TO and TH respectively) and H suspension of Salmonella paratyphi A and Salmonella paratyphi B (AH and BH respectively) are used as antigens. Control tubes containing the antigen and normal saline are set to check auto-agglutination. The tubes are incubated in a water bath at 37°C overnight Agglutination titres (highest dilution with agglutination) are observed as in the table.
H agglutination is observed as loose, cotton-woolly clumps whereas O agglutination is observed as a disc-like pattern at the bottom of the tube: supernatant fluid in both is clear.

The following factors should be taken into account in interpretation of Widal reaction:

(i)               Agglutinins remain in blood even after convalescence, therefore history of recent illness should be taken.
(ii) Agglutinins appear in the blood at the end ot first week, increase till fourth week after which they show a decline. Therefore a rising titre as demonstrated by 2-3 samples is more conclusive; during first week resultmay be negative.
(iii) Agglutinins appear in the blood of normal persons in endemic areas. Information should be obtained on agglutination titres of normal sera, failing which values of 1/160 or over should be considered significant.
(iv) History of prior immunization should be taken. Immunized individuals will show raised titres for Salmonella typhi, Salmonella paratyphi A and Salmonella paratyphi B whereas patients will have
raised titre for a particular infecting organism.
(v) False negative results are shown by patients with some associated disease, e.g., agammaglobulinaemia, leukaemia, advanced carcinoma.

5.       Phage typing for tracing the source of infection and relationship between cases.

Prophylaxis

TAB vaccine 0.5 ml subcutaneously followed by 1ml subcutaneously after 7-10 days.

PROTEUS

Species

1.     P. Vulgaris

2.     P. mirabilis

3.     P. morgagni

4.     P. rettgefi.

Morphology
1. Shape. Rod shaped; highly pleomorphic showing filaments and curved forms.

2 Size. 0.5 x 1-3 µ

3. Motility. Actively motile by peritrichate flagella

4. Capsules. Non-capsulated.

5. Spores. Non-sporing.

6. Staining. Gram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1. Grow readily on ordinary media.
2. Aerobes and facultative anaerobes.
3. in fluid media, uniform moderate turbidity with slight deposit and ammoniacal odour.

4. On solid media:
(i) On agar plate the growth is 'swarming', a film of growth spreads over the medium and is difficult to distinguish from medium itself. Swarming is inhibited by chloral hydrate:
(ii)  On MacConkey's medium, the colonies are smooth and colourless

Biochemical Activity
1. Ferment glucose with acid and gas production 2. Liquefy gelatin.
3. Produce H2S.
4. Form indole
5. Ecompose urea to ammonia.

Serology
1. Somatic O antigen, thermostable.
2. Flagellar H antigen, thermolabile.
The antigens of proteus are of great importance in that some of them are coincidently homologous with antigens of rickettsial diseases, typhus fever and scrub typhus. Antigen from one strain 'OX 19' is used in Weil-Felix reaction for diagnosis of typhus fever. Another strain 'OX K' is used for diagnosis of scrub typhus. Apart from antigenic similarity, proteus is in no way related to rickettsial diseases.

Pathogenicity
1. Urniary tract infections.
2. Wound infections.

PSEUDOMONAS

Species

1.     Ps. pyocyanea (Ps. aeniginosa)

2.     Ps. mallei.

Morphology

1. Shape. Rod shaped bacilli.
2. Size. 1.5-3 x 0.5µ.
3. Motility. Motile by polar flagella.
4. Capsules. Noncapsulated.
5. Spores. non sporing.
6. Staining. Readily stained by ordinary dyes; usually Gram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1. Grow readily on ordinary media.
2. Strictly aerobic.
3. Optimum temperature 37°C, range, 5-42°C.
4. On fluid media. Dense turbidity with surface pellicle.
5. On solid media:
(i) On nutrient agar, colonies are large, opaque, irregular, with musty, mawkish or earthy smell.
(ii)  On MacConkey's medium and DCA medium. Colourless colonies.

Biochemical Activity

1. Liquefy gelatin.
2. Do not produce indole
3. Ferment glucose and galactose with acid production.
4. Produce green (bluish green in Ps. Pyocyanea, yellowish green in others) pigment. In Ps. pyocyanea the pigment consists of pyocyanin and florescin whereas other species produce florescin only.

Pathogenicity
Present in normal flora of skin and intestine; may produce:
1. Superficial abscesses.
2. Otitis media.
3. Urinary tract infections.

4.  Bronchopneumonia.
5.  Infantile diarrhoea and septicaernia.

 

PASTEURELLA

Species
1. Past. Pestis

3.     Past. septica

Morphology

1.  Shape. Small ovoid rods with rounded ends and convex sides.
2.  Size. 1.5 x 0.6µ
3.  Arrangement. Singly, in chains, or small groups.
4.  Motility. Non-motile.
5.  Spores. Non-sporing.
6.  Capsules. When freshly isolated, viscid capsules.
7.  Staining.
(i) Stained readily by anline dyes; Gram negative

 (ii) Staining is "bipolar" with intervening protoplasm less densely stained than the polar areas.

Cultural Characteristics
Grows on ordinary media; growth slow.
2. Optimum temperature 300-350C.
3. Optimum pH 6.2 7.2.
4. In fluid media:
(i)  Slight general turbidity with floccular deposit.
(ii)  Later surface pellicle forms.
(iii)  When sterile oil or ghee is floated on the surface, the growth occurs downwards
from the under-surface of the oil producing "Stalactites."

5. On solid media:

(i) On nutrient agar, the colonies are small, tran5parent, delicate, colourless, granular and viscid. Later these become opaque, greyish, irregular.
On blood agar the colonies are dark brown due to absorption of haemin pigment.

Biochemical activity

1.     Ferment glucose, maltose, rhamnose, glycerol manitol, after incubation for several days (i.e., weak activity) with acid production.

2.     Litmus milk is not altered.

3.     Gelatin not liquefied

4.     Indole not produced

5.     Broth rendered alkaline.

Pathogenesity

Pasteurella pestis causes plague in rats, which is conveyed to man through rat fleas Past. septica is occasionally isolated from respiratory tract infections and wounds inflicted by animal bites.

BRUCELLA

Species

1.     Br. Abortus

2.     Br. Melitensis

3.     Br. suis,

,Morphology

1.     Minute rods appearing as coccobacilli.

2.     Size : 0.6-1.5 x 0.6 µ

3.     Arrangement. Singly or in short chains.

4.     Motility. Non-motile (except Br. bronchiseptica)

5.     Spores. Non-sporing.

6.     Capsules. Non-capsulated.

7.     Staining.
(i)  Stained readily, by aniline dyes; Gram negative.
(ii)  Bipolar staining.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Grows readily on ordinary media but growth is not profuse.

2.       Strict anaerobes.

3.       Optimum temperature 37°C.

4.       Optimum pH 7.2 7.4.

5.       In fluid media:

(i)  After 24 hours, slight turbidity.
Qi)  On further incubation, moderate turbidity and light deposit.

6. On solid media:
(i)  On agar, smafl, greyish, semi-opaque colonies in 24-48 hours.
(ii)  On potato, yellowish-brown pigment.

Biochemical Activity

1.  Carbohydrates not fermented.
2.  Gelatin not liquefied.
3.  Indole not fromed.
4.  H2S formed by Brucella abortus.

Pathogenicity

Brucella melitensis. Malta kmediterranean or undulant) fever.

Brucella abortus. Abortus fever.

The disease is produced in goats, cattle, horses, sheeps and pigs from which these are conveyed to man.

HAEMOPHILUS

Species

Haemophilus influenzae.

 

1.  Shape. Minute rods with considerable pleomorphism.
2.  Size. 1-1.5 x 0.25µ
3.  Arrangement. None in particular.
4.  Motility. Non-motile.
5.  Capsules. Some strains are capsulated - a quality linked with pathogenicity.
6.  Spores. Non-sporing.
7.  Staining. Relatively difficult to stain; Gram negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Does not grow on ordinary media; grows on blood agar, still better on chocolate agar and Fild's medium. However, growth is never profuse.

2.     Strict aerobe.

3.     Optimum temperature 37°C.

4. On fluid media. Slight general turbidity; some strains give flocculent deposit with little turbidity.           

5. On solid media.

(i) Minute, smooth, transparent, circular colonies in 24 hours.                                                               

(ii)    On further incubation, growth is more marked and colonies become irregular in appearance.

 

Biochemical Activity

 

1. Ferments glucose, maltose, laevulose with acid production.     3.

2. Several strains produce indole.

 

Serology

 

The capsule of H. influenzae contains specific soluble substance (SSS). Six types (a to f) are identified.

 

Pathogenicity

 

Normal commensal in upper respiratory tract; may produce:

 

1. Bronchopneumonia

2. Antrum infections

3. Otitis media

4. Empyema

5. Endocarditis

6. Arthritis

7. Conjunctivitis

8. Meningitis.

 

 

BORDETELLA

Species

 

1.       Bord. Pertussis

2.       Bord. Parapertussis

3.       Bord bronchi­septica.

 

Morphology

 

1.     Shape. Small ovoid cocco‑bacillus; on subculture becomes longer and threadlike.

2.       Size. Average length 0.5 µ

3. Arrangement. In loose clumps with clear spaces in between (thumb print appearance).

4. Motility. Nonmotile.

5. Capsules. Capsulated.

6. Spores. Nonsporing.

7. Staining. Gram‑negative; shows bipolar metachromatic granules on staining with toluidine blue.

 

Cultural Characteristics

1.       Does not grow on ordinary media on first isolation but after several subcultures it is able to grow on ordinary media.

2.       Optimum temperature 37°C.

3.       Strict aerobe

4.       On fluid media, e.g., serum broth Uniform turbidity sometimes with slight deposit.

 

5. On solid media, e.g., blood agar

 (i) Colonies small and transparent in 24 hours.

(ii) On further incubation, colonies become larger, greyish and opaque.

 

Commonly used medium is Bordet‑Gengou glycerine‑potato‑blood agar.

 

Biochemical Activity

 

Biochemically inactive; no action on carbohydrates and proteins.

 

Pathogenicity

 

Whooping cough.

 

 

CORYNEBACTE RIUM

 

Species

1.       C. diphtheria

2.       C. ulcerans

3.       C hoffmanni

4.        C. xerosis.

 

Morphology

 

1.    Shape. Straight or slightly curved rods swollen            at one end (clubbed).

2. Size. 3‑5 x 0.

3. Arrangement. In pairs or small groups; the bacilli are arranged at angle to each other resembling letter L or 'V' (Chinese letter or cuneiform arrangement).

4. Motility. Nonmotile

5. Capsules. Noncapsulated

6. Spores. Nonsporing

7. Staining. Staining reaction uneven; Gram positive; decolourised easily. Granules retain the stain.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Growth scant or ordinary media; more profuse on enriched media. Loffler's serum is the commonly used medium.

2. Optimum temperature 37°C, range 14-40°C.

3. Optimum pH 7.2.
4. Facultative anaerobe.

5. On fluid media:
Moderate turbidity with a well-marked pellicle

On solid media:
(i)  Growth is profuse on Loffler's serum.
(ii) After 24 hours, the colonies are small (1 mm) smooth, circular, opaque, greyish white or creamy, granular and easily emulsified.
(iii)  On further incubation, colonies become irregular.
(iv)  In the presence of potassium tellurite, colonies are greyish-black; many other organisms are killed making this medium selective for corynebacterium.

Classification of C. diphtheriae

Depending upon the appearance of colonies on chocolate tellurite agar, Corynebacterium diphtheria is divided into three types:
1. Gravis. Greyish black, granular, striated colonies with a daisy-head appearance.

2.     Intermedius. Small, discrete, flat, black, granular colonies with a central papilla and slightly irregular edge.

3.     Mitis. Convex, smooth, black, shining colonies.

Biochemical Activity

1. Carbohydrates:
(i) Gravis strains of C. diphtheriae ferment starch and glycogen which are not fermented by intermedius and mitis strains.
(ii) Saccharose is fermented by diphtheroids (i.e., C. hoffmanni and C. xerosis) but not by C. diphthetiae.
(iii)  Ferment glucose, galactose, maltose and dextrin with acid production.

2. Proteins:
(i) Gelatin not liquefied
(ii)  Indole not produced.

Toxin Production

Corynebacterium diphtheriae produces exotoxin. Almost all gravis and intermedius strains produce toxin which is not produced by a few mitis strains. However, the amount of toxin liberated is not related to virulence. Park 8 strain, which is relatively avirulent, produces abundant exotoxin and is universally employed as a source of exotoxin for laboratory purposes.

Minimal lethal dose. The smallest amount of exotoxin killing a 250 gm guinea pig in four days.

Minimal reacting dose. The smallest amount of exotoxin producing a definite reaction on intradermal inoculation into a guinea pig.

Toxoid (Anatoxine). The toxicity of bacterial filtrate may be reduced by adding 0.2-0.4% formalin and incubating at 370C for 4-6 weeks. This modified toxin with intact antigenicity is termed toxoid or anatoxine.

Pathogenicity
Diphtheria.

Schick Test
The test is employed to detect susceptibility to diphtheria. A skin test dose of toxin (corresponding to 1/50 M.L.D. and contained in 0.2 ml) is injected intradermally into the flexor surface of forearm. A similar dose of toxin inactivated by heating at 70°C for 30 minutes is injeted into the other forearm as a control. Readings are taken after 1, 4 and 7 days. Four types of reactions may occur:

1. Positive reaction, Control forearm shows nothing; test forearm manifests a definite local erythema in 24-48 hours, usually well marked by 4th day, then gradually fades away leaving a brownish appearance.
2. Negative reaction. Nothing in both the forearms,
3. Pseudo-reaction. Both forearms show a definite local erythema in 24 hours which subsides rapidly and fades away by fourth day.
4. Combined reaction. Both forearms show a definite local erythema in 24 hours but in the control forearm it takes the course of pseudoreaction whereas in test forearm it follows the course of positive reaction.

The negative reaction and pseudo-reaction indicate the person is immune to diphtheria. Positive and combined reaction suggest susceptibility and need for immunization.

Immunization

A.  Active immunization
1. Toxin-antitoxin mixture. Three doses of 1 ml each intramuscularly at 7-10 days interval; not used at present.
2.  Formol toxoid (FT). A constituent of triple antigen commonly used for immunization against diphtheria, whooping cough and tetanus in older children.
3.  Toxoid-antitoxin mixture (TAM) Three doses of 1 ml each at intervals of 7-14 days.
4.  Toxoid-antitoxin floccules (TAF).
5. Alum-precipitated toxoid (APT). 0.2 ml intramuscularly followed, after one month, by a dose of 0.5 ml. A third dose of 0.5 ml is given at school-going age.
6.Purified toxoid, aluminium phosphate (PTAP). 0.2 ml followed by, 0.5 ml after 1-3 months. 
7. Purified toxoid, aluminium hydroxide (PTAH). 3. 0.2 ml followed by 0.5 ml after 1-3 months.

8. Oral toxoid. Lozenges containing 1500 Lf doses of toxoid and 1500 units of hyaluronidase.

Passive Immunization

500-1000 units of antidiphtheritic serum (ADS) subcutaneously.

Serum Therapy

In mild cases. 2,000-10,000 units. In severe cases. 10,000-50,000 units.

The serum should be administered immediately on clinical diagnosis without awaiting laboratory report. General mode of administration is intramuscular. However, in severe cases intravenous administration should be made for quicker effect.

MYCOBACTERIUM TUBERCULOSIS

Morphology

1.       Shape. Straight or slightly curved rods with rounded ends.

2.       Size. 0.3-0.5 x 1.2 µ

3.       Arrangement. Singly or in small groups.

4.       Motility. Non-motile.

5.       Capsules. Non-capsulated.

6.       Spores. Non-sporing.

7.       Staining.
(i) Staining difficult owing to the presence of fatty and alcoholic materials; Gram positive.
(ii) Resist decolorisation by acids and alcohol (hence the terms acid-fast and alcohol fast).

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Cold blooded types grow readily on ordinary media; human and bovine types are slow to grow even on special media; avian types are mid-way between these two. The commonly used medium is Dorset's egg.

2.     Strict aerobe.

3.     Optimum temperature.
(i)  Human and bovine types. 37°C.
(ii) Avian type. 40°C.
(iii) Cold-blooded type. 25°C.

4.     Optimum pH. 7.0 - 7.6.

5.     On fluid media, e.g., glycerine broth:
(i) Human and bovine type. Greyish-white dull, wrinkled, surface pellicle with no general turbidity.
(ii) Avian and cold-blooded types. Granular deposit without pellicle or general turbidity.
Cultures of all types give a peculiar fruity odour.

6.     On solid media, e.g., Dorset's egg. Dry, friable, confluent colonies with granular or wrinkled surface. The human and bovine types grow slowly and may require 4-6 weeks for extensive growth.

7.     On Dubos medium, small aggregated chains of bacilli known as sepentine cords.

Biochemical Activity

1.     Ferments glucose and maltose with acid production.

2.     Presence of peroxidase and niacin production differentiate M. tuberculosis from other acid-fast bacilli.

Serology

There are three serological types:
1. Mammalian
2. Avian
3. Cold-blooded.

The human, bovine and murine types are serologically homologous and differentiated on other grounds.

Pathogenicity

Tuberculosis.

Immunity

Infection-iminunity results from repeated doses of subclinical infections in person inhabiting endemic areas. This is evidenced by the following:

1.     In endemic areas adults are tuberculin positive.

2.     In adults the disease runs a chronic course whereas in children the course is more acute.

3.     On post-mortem examination, the adults with no history of tuberculosis show localised foci of infection, particularly lymph nodes.

4.     When tuberculous infection is introduced into new area both children and adults run a similar course, i.e., acute one.

Koch's Phenomenon

When, a healthy guinea pig-is injected a small dose of tubercular bacilli, progressive lesions develop and the animal dies ultimately.
When, however, same dose is injected 4 weeks after administration of a minute dose, a small lesion develops which clears rapidly, with no involvement of regional gland.
If the second dose is given too soon after the first, before definite lesion has developed, it results in usual type of fatal reaction.
Koch's phenomenon. Demonstrates that healthy and previously injected animals show different types of reaction to tuberculous infection.

Allergic Tests

1. Von Pirquet Test. 2 drops of undiluted tuberculin are placed on flexor aspect of the forearm about 10 cm apart; light scarification is carried out through the drops. A drop of 50% glycerine is placed and scarified between the two tubreculin points as a control.
In positive reaction, redness and swelling appear at the tuberculin inoculation sites; in 24 hours, papules and at times vesicles may be present; maximum effect is seen in 48 hours after which it subsides. Negative reaction shows slight traumatic effect at all the three sites.
2. Mantoux Test. 0.1 ml of diluted old tuberculin is injected itirradermally into flexor aspect of forearm. The reaction is then obser'ved after 48-72 hours. An area of oedema and induration measuring at least 10 min in diameter is considered positive.
Mantoux test is used as a screening test for BCG  
vaccination, through currently in this country

 

Mantoux positive individuals are also vaccinated.  mannitol,  saccharose and starch with acid

Immunization

Active immunization is done with live attenuated vaccine called Bacille-Calmette-Guerin (BCG). The newborns are given this vaccination within a week. All the children and individuals below 15 years of age, who have not been previously immunized, are given B.C.G. vaccination without prior Mantoux testing.

VIBRIO CHOLERAE

Morphology

1.  Shape. Short curved rods with rounded or
pointed ends (comma-shaped).
2.  Size. 0.3 x 1-5 p.
3.  Arrangement. In singly, in S-shaped pairs or
spirals. (i) Ogawa
4.  Motility. Actively motile with single terminal (ii) Inaba
flagellum.
5.  Spores. Non-sporing.
Capsules. Non-capsulated.

production; lactose fermented late.
6. Litmus milk acidified with clotting.

Serology

Vibrio cholerae prossesses somatic 0 antigen and flagellar H antigen. On the basis of wantigenicity vibrios are classified as under.

A. Group A (cholera and cholera-like vibrios).

1. 0 subgroup I:
(a) Non-haemolytic cholera vibrios: (i) Ogawa (ii) Inaba (iii) Hikojima.

(b) Haemolytic el tor vibrios:

(iii) Hikojima.
2. 0 subgroups II, III, IV, V, VI (Nonagglutin-
6.  able vibrios; mostly haemolytic).

7. Staining. Stained readily with aniline dyes; B. Group B (unrelated to cholera vibrios biocGram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1.  Grows readily on ordinary media.
2.  Optimum pH 370C, range 160 - 420C.
3.  Optimum pH 8.0 (i.e., alkaline reaction).
4.
5.

Aerobic, but not very strictly.
On fluid media:
(i) Moderate turbidity.
(ii) Thick surface pellicle.
(iii) Slight deposit

6.  On solid media. Moist, translucent, greyish, round, and small (1-2 mm) colonies.

Biochemical Activity

1. Indole produced rapidly.
2.  Nitrates reduced to nitrites.
3.  Gelatin liquefied slowly.

4. Ammonia and H2S formed.

5. Ferments glucose, laevulose, maltose,
6. Litmus milk acidified with clotting.

 

Serology

Vibrio cholera possesses somatic O antigen and flagellar H antigen. On the basis of antigenicity, vibrio are classified as under :-

 

Group A (Cholera and cholera like vibrios)

 

 

O Subgroup I :

 

 

 

Nonhaemolytic cholera vibrios

 

 

 

 

Ogawa

 

 

 

 

Inaba

 

 

 

 

Hikojima

 

 

 

Haemolytic el tor vibrios

 

 

 

 

Ogawa

 

 

 

 

Inaba

 

 

 

 

Hikojima

 

 

O Subgroup II, III, IV, V, VI (Nonagglutinable vibrios, mostly haemolytic)

 

Group B (unrelated to cholera vibrio, biochemically and antigenically)

Pathogenicity

Cholera.

ACTINOMYCES

Species

1.     A. bovis

2.     A. madurae

Morphology

1. Shape. Pleomorphic

 (i) In culture: Rods of varying size with branching filaments, clubs and coccal forms.
(ii) In animal tissues: Interlacing, filamentous mycelia with peripheral ends disposed radially and swollen.

2. Motility. Nonmotile.
3. Capsules. Noncapsulated.
4. Spores. Nonsporing.
5. Staining. Gram-positive; peripheral swollen ends of mycelia are Gram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Grow readily on ordinary media. Actinomyces bovis is anaerobic whereas

2.     Actinomyces madurae (often put under separate genus as Nocardia madurae) is aerobic

3.     Optimum temperature 37°C.

4.     Optimum pH 7.2-7.6.

5.     On fluid media. Delayed poor growth as white modular deposit resembling puff-balls, no turbidity or pellicle.

6.     On solid media. Poor delayed growth as small, greyish-white, opaque, convex colonies.

Pathogenicity

Actinomyces bovis. Actinomycosis.
Actinomyces madurae. Madura foot.

BACILLUS

Species

1.     B. anthracis

2.     B. subtilis

Morphology

1.       Shape. Straight or slightly curved rods with truncated ends.

2.       Size. 8 x 0.4 µ

3.     Arrangement. Singly, in chains or in short chains.

4.     Motility. Nonmotile.

5.     Capsules. Capsulated; the entire chain may be enclosed in single capsule.

6.     Spores. Not formed in animal tissue; in culture, spores are central or subterminal and do not buldge.

7.     Staining. Gram-positive and non-acid-fast.

Cultural Characteristics

1.  Grow readily on ordinary media.
2.  Facultative anaerobes.
3.  Optimum temperature 37°C, range 14-43°C.
4.  Optimum pH 7.5-7.8.
5.  In fluid media:
(i) Initially slight turbidity.

 (ii)  Later, flocculent deposit with clear supernatant fluid.

6.   On solid media:
(i) On nutrient agar, opaque, greyish white, reticular colonies with uneven surface.
(ii) On blood agar, slight haemolysis.

Biochemical Activity

1.  Ferment glucose, maltose, sucrose, and salicin with acid production.
2.  Indole not formed.
3.  Gelatin liquefied slowly.
4.  Litmus-milk first coagulated; 1ater decolorized and digested.

Pathogenicity

Anthrax.

CLOSTRIDIUM

Species

1.     Cl. Tetani

2.     Cl. Welchii

3.     Cl. Botulinum

4.     Cl. butyricum.

Morphology

1.     Shape. Large, straight or slightly curved rods with rounded or truncated ends.

2.     Size. 0.5 x 8 µ

3.     Motility. Motile except Cl. welchii.

4.     Capsules. present in Cl. welchii and Cl. butyricum.

5.     Spores. Wider than bacillus; commonly central or subterminal; terminal in Cl. tetani.

6.     Staining. Stain readily with ordinary dyes; Gram-positive; spores are stained by special stains only.

Cultural Characteristics

1.  Grow under strictly anaerobic conditions.
2.  Optimum temperature 37°C.
3.  Optimum pH 7.0-7.4.
4. In fluid media

(i) In broth (under anaerobic condition), turbidity with a moderate granular or powdery deposit.
(ii) In Robertson's meat medium, the meat is digested and blackened by proteolytic members; turned pink producing bubbles of gas with saccharolytic members.

5.  On solid media

Poor and slow growth with small, effuse, and irregular colonies. On blood agar, some species show haemolysis.

Biochemical Activity

1. Saccharolytic activity with gas (CO2 and hydrogen) production is exhibited by Cl. welchii, but not by Cl. tetani. Glucose, maltose, lactose and sucrose are fermented.

2. Proteolytic activity is well marked in a botulinum which acts on gelatin, casein, serum, and fibrin; meat is digested and blackened. It is less marked in Cl. welchii and C1. tetani; these liquefy gelatin but do not digest serum, fibrin or meat.

3. Litmus milk changes

(i) Proteolytic members produce peptonization and digestion.

(ii)  Saccharolytic members produce acid, gas and clot.
(iii)  U. welchii gives characteristic appearance, stormy fermentation, in which the
clot is broken up by rapid and abundant gas production.

Toxin Production

Produce exotoxin.

Pathogenicity

C1. tetani. Tetanus.

C1. welchii. Gas gangrene.

C1. botulinum. Botulism.

SPIROCHAETES

Spirochaetes are elongated, motile, flexible bacteria which are twisted spirally round the long axis. A characteristic property of spirochaetes is their motility without the presence of flagella. This is due to varying numbers of fine fibrils between the cell wall and cytoplasmic membrane, anchored at the two poles of bacterial cell. Motility is serpentlike, and of three types:

1.     Flexion and extension

2.       Cork-screw like rotary movements

3.       Translatory motion. Spirochetes are divided in two families:

A. Family spirochaetaceae (saprophytes):
1. Spirochaeta
2. Saprospira
3. Cristispira.

B.  Family treponemataceae:
1. Borrelia
2. Leptospira
3. Treponema.

BORRELIA

Species

1.     Borr. Recurrentis

2.       Borr. vincentii.

Morphology

1. Shape. Large, refractile, with irregular, wide, open coils.

2. Size. 10-30 x 0.3-7 µ
3. Motility Motile.

4.  Staining. Readily stained by ordinary dyes; Gram-negative.

Cultural Characteristics

Difficult to grow; the usual media are:

1.  Ascitic fluid containing rabbit kidney (Noguchi's medium).

2.  Chorioallantoic membrane of chick embryos.

3.  Intraperiteneal inoculation in mice or rats.

Pathogenicity

Borrelia recurrentis. Relapsing fever.

Borrelia vincentii. Vincent's angina.

LEPTOSPIRA

Species

Lept. icterohaemorrhogiae.

Morphology

1.     Shape. Multicoiled with hooked ends resembling umbrella handles.

2.     Size. 6-20 x 0.1 µ

3.     Motility. Motile.

4.     Staining._ Not stained by ordinary dyes; may be stained by Giemsa stain by silver impregnation methods.

Cultural Characteristics

1.     Optimum temperature 30°C.

2.     Optimum pH 7.2-7.5.

3.     Media used.

(i)                Semi-solid blood agar.

(ii)              Chorio-allantoic membrane of chick embryos.

(iii)            Inoculation in guinea pigs.

Pathogenicity

Weil’s disease.

les

TREPONEMA

Species

1.     T. pallidum

2.     T. pertenue

3.     T. carateum.

Morphology

1.     Shape. Thin, delicate spirochaetes with tapering ends.

2.     Size. 4-14 x 0.1-0.2 µ

3.     Motility. Motile.

4.     Staining.
(i) Not stained by ordinary dyes.

(ii)            Light rose red with Giemsa stain.

(iii)          Negative stain with India ink or Congo-red

 

Cultural Characteristics
Not cultivable in artificial conditions.

Pathogenicity
T. pallidum. Syphilis
T. pertenue. Yaws
T. carateum. Pinta.

Standard Tests for Syphilis

1. Wassermann Reaction
Reagents Required
1. Antigen

2. Patient's serum

3. Complement
4. Sheep corpuscles
5. Antisheep haemolysin

6. Saline.

Technique
Set up four tubes in a rack and proceed as in the table.

 

Tube 1

(Control)

Tube 2

Tube 3

Tube 4

Serum (inactivated by heating at 56°C for 30 minutes)

0.5 ml

(1/2)

0.5 ml

(1/2)

0.5 ml

(1/8)

0.5 ml

(1/32)

Complement (3 MHD)

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

Antigen (1/15)

-

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

Saline

0.5 ml

 

 

 

 

Incubate at 37°C for one hour and store overnight at 0-4°C

Table : Wassermann Reaction

Interpretation
1. Lysis absent. Positive
2. Lysis complete. Negative
3. Lysis incomplete. Doubtful
(Control tube should show complete lysis).

2. Kahn Test

Reagent Required

1. Antigen. Alcoholic extract of ether-insoluble

lipoids of beef heart.

2.  Patient's serum inactivated by heating at 560C
for 30 minutes.

3.  Saline.

 

Technique

 

Tube 1

Tube 2

Tube 3

Tube 4

Antigen

0.5 ml

0.025 ml

0.0125 ml

0.05 ml

Serum

0.15 ml

0.15 ml

0.15 ml

-

 

Shake vigorously at 280 oscillations per minute for 3 minutes and then add saline

Saline

1.0 ml

0.5 ml

0.5 ml

1.0 ml

Table : Kahn Test

The test is carried out in small special tubes. 4 such tubes are arranged in a rack and proceeded as, in the table

Interpretation

A definite precipitate suspended in a clear medium is considered a complete reaction and is read four plus.

Proportionally weaker reactions are read three, two and one plus, respectively.

The final result in each test is the average finding of the three tubes.

Thus, if the precipitation reaction is four plus in each of the three tubes, the final result is four plus.

If the reaction is -, +++, ++++, the final result is two plus.

Tube 4 acts as a control and should show uniform opalescence.

3. VDRL Test

0.05 ml of inactivated serum (heated at 56°C for 30 minutes) is taken on a special slide with depression. One drop of freshly prepared antigen is added by means of a syringe delivering 50 drops per ml. The slide is rotated at 180 rotations/minute in a special VDRL rotator for 4 minutes. It is then examined under low power of the microscope. Uniform distribution -of crystals in the drop indicates negative reaction whereas formation of clumps indicates positive reaction.

RICKETTSIAE

Morphology

1. Shape. Pleomorphic cocco-bacilli.

2. Size. 0.3-0.6 x 0.8-2.0µ

3. Mostly nonmotile.
4. Capsules. Noncapsulated.
5. Staining

(i) Not well-stained by Gram stain; Gram negative.
(ii) Bluish purple with Giemsa stain and Castaneda stain.
(iii) Deep red with Machiavello stain and Gimenez stain.

Cultural Characteristics

1. Do not grow on ordinary media.

2. Readily cultivated in yolk sac of developing chick embryos.
3.  Slow, scant growth on chorioallantoic membrane.
4.  Inoculation in guinea pigs, mice and arthropods.

Weil-Felix Reaction

This is employed for the diagnosis of some reckettsial diseases. The reaction is an agglutination by the serum of typhus patients of strain of proteus, mostly strain 'OX 19'. Titres as high as 1/50,000 are obtained during febrile stages.

Pathogenicity of Rickettsiae

Genera

Group

Species

Disease

Vector

Vertebrate reservoir

Rickettsia

Typhus

Rick. prowazeki

(i) Epidemic typhus
   (ii) Exanthematic
typhus

Louse

Man

Rick. mooseri

Endemic (murine)
   typhus

Rat flea

Rat

Spotted fever

Rick. rickettsiae

Rocky Mountain
   Spotted fever

Tick

Rabbit , dog, small rodents

Rick conori

Indian tick typhus

Tick

Rodents

Scrub typhus

Rick  tsutsugamushi

Scrub typhus

Mite larva 

Small rodents, birds

Rochlimaea

Trench fever

Roch. quintana

Trench fever

Louse

Man

Coxiella

Q fever

Cox. burneti

Q fever

 

Cattle, sheep,     poultry

  

 


 

 

Chapter 15 : Virology

General Properties 
1.Viruses are minute bodies, without cellular organization, not visible by optical microscope.
2. Viruses are made up of protein and nucleic acid. A particular virus contains either RNA or DNA but never both together. The protein component wraps the core of nucleic acid.
3. Viruses are obligate parasites. They simply can't synthesize any of their requirements. The host cell accomplishes all the metabolic activities for the viruses.

4.  Viruses have host specificity. They attack Structure specific cells in particular hosts.
5.  Viruses are destroyed by heating at 60°C for half an hour, by ether, and by irradiation.
6.  Viruses cannot grow in a cellular laboratory media.
7.  Viruses are intraceflular parasites lodging in either the cytoplasm or nucleus. They definite reaction including inclusion bodies and inflammatory response.
8. Viruses possess specific antigens, giving reactions such as haemagglutination, complement fixation and toxin neutralization.

Morphology

Size

Viruses are ultramicroscopic organisms not visible under ordinary optical microscope. The size is expressed in millimicrons (nm) which is 1/1,000 of a micron (µ)  or 1/1,000,000 of a millimetre (mm).

The range is 20-300 nm.

Virion or elementary body is the infectious virus particle. All the sizes of viruses refer to the size of virion. The size of a virion is determined by the following methods:

1.  By filtration through collodion membrane of varying grades of porosity.
2.  From the sedimentation rate of the virus in the ultracentrifuge.
3.  By electron microscopy

Structure

The virus particle or virion consists of a central core of nucleic acid surrounded by protein coat called capsid. Capsid is composed of polypeptide molecules arranged symmetrically to form a shell around the nucleic acid core. The capsid protects the core from inactivation by nucleases and other agents.

When progeny of virions is released by budding, the virion is covered by peplomer, a covering derived from the host cell membrane and lipoprotein in nature. The protein component is virus-coded whereas lipid component is largely of host cell origin

A capsid may be polygonal (icosahedron) with corners (vertices) and sides (facets); or it may be spiral (helical).

Viruses contain only one type of nucleic acid, MMtzC'_WII acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid

The extracted nucleic acid is at times of infecting the host cell.

Cultivation

Viruses cannot grow on acellular media and special methods of cultivation. The media employed are given below:-

 

Chick embryo

Cat

 

Chorioallantoic inoculation

And

 

Allantoic sac inoculation

Ape

 

Amniotic sac inoculation

Yawn

 

Yolk sac inoculation

 

B. Tissue culture

H

 

1.  Human amnion

E

 

2.  Embryonic human kidney

R [Her]

 

3.  Rhesus and African green monkey kidney

Inclusion Bodies

Inclusion bodies are structures with specific shape, size, location and staining properties present in the virus infected cells, and visualised under optical
microscope. They may be located in cytoplasm, nucleus or both. They are generally eosinophilic; inclusion bodies of adenovirus are basophilic.

Examples

1. Negri bodies. Intracytoplasmic eosinophilic inclusion bodies of rabies virus in the brain cells of animals.
2. Guarnieri bodies. Small multiple inclusion bodies of vaccinia virus.

3. Bollinger bodies. Large inclusion bodies of fowl Pox virus.
4. Molluscurn bodies. Very large (visible under low power) inclusion bodies of Molluscum contagiosum.

5.  Intranuclear inclusion bodies:

(i) Cowdry typeA. Herpes virus, yellow fever. Bacteriophages are the viruses which infect bac-
(ii) Cowdry type B. Adenovirus, polio virus.

Classification

A. DNA viruses:
1. Papova virus: (i) Polyoma (ii) Papilloma.

2.  Adenovirus
3. Herpes viruses: (i) Herpes simplex (ii) Varicella
(iii) Cytomegaloviruses.

Pox-viruses: (i), Variola (ii) Vaccinia.

5.  Parvovirus.

B. RNA viruses:

1. Picorna virus:
(i) Enterovirus (ii) Rhinovirus (iii) Cardiovirus (iv) Aphthovirus.

2. Togavirus
3. Orthomyxovirus
4. Paramyxovirus
5. Coronavirus
6. Arenavirus
7. Leukovirus
8. Rhabdovirus
9. Reovirus
10. Orbivirus.

C. Unclassified viruses:
1. Hepatitis A virus
2. Hepatitis B virus
3. Gastroenteritis virus.

BACTERIOPHAGE

Bacteriophages are the viruses which infect bacteria. Thus these are the viruses which can be grown in laboratory media along with corresponding bacteria. The bacteriophages have specificity for bacterial species and are thus valuable in diagnosis, the process being called phage-typing.

Properties

1. Bacteriophage acts on multiplying organisms. It clears the young broth cultures either temporarily or permanently. On solid media clear zones are formed.
2. The addition of a bacteriophage to a young multiplying broth culture may result in an initial complete clearine of the broth followed by reappearance of turbidity. This is due to the fact that some bacteria are not lyesd and multiply. These secondary cultures are resistance to the phage.
Bacteriophage acts on the surface antigen (O or Vi) and may exhibit high degree of specificity.
Bacteriophages are particulate, filtrable particles. Some bacteriophages, as seen under electron microscope, are tadpole-shaped with a hexagonal head and a cylinderical tail; spherical and filamentous forms are also found.
Bacreriophages are fairly uniform in offering resistance to deleterious agents. They are resistant to drying, glycerine, alcohol, 1% phenol and freezing; readily destroyed by ultraviolet rays and heat over 70°C.
Bacteriophages possess antigenic properties. Antiphage sera can be prepared in rabbits.
7. Bacteriophages are widely distributed in nature. They are isolated from faeces of man and animals, sewage, water, soil, and samples of pus.

Application
1.  Phage typing is a useful method of diagnosis for salmonella, Bacillus anthracis, and staphylococci.
2. Bacteriophages produce antibiotic-like substances called bacteriocidins which are occasionally claimed to be useful as antibacterials:  

 (i) Colicins for Escherichia coli. 

 (ii)  Pyocins for Pseudomonas pyocyanea.
(iii)  Megacins for Bacillus megaterium.
(iv)  Diphthericins from Corynebacterium diplitheriae.

3. As these are cultivable on laboratory media, they provide a useful material for study of properties of viruses.

POX-VIRUSES
(Variola and Vaccinia)

The causative agent of classical smallpox is Variola major, that of a milder form of smallpox (alastrim) is Variola minor. The two viruses are antigenically identical and appear to be stable variants of the same virus. The virus from a case of smallpox never produces alastrim and vice versa.

Vaccinia virus is not found in nature and does not produce any disease. The cowpox virus used by Jenner for vaccination underwent mutation and the new virus named Vaccinia proved more useful in vaccination. The present stalks of vaccinia virus throughout the world, are the progeny of the original modified cowpox virus. Vaccinia is thus an artificial virus, very much similar in properties with variola virus.

Structure

T he virion is a large one (size 0.125 - 0.175µ), brick shaped. The core made up of DNA is biconcave, surrounded by a double layered membrane. The virion or elementary body is termed Paschen body.

Resistance

The virus is resistant to glycerine, phenol, ether and freezing. It is destroyed by heating over 55°C and by potassium permanganate, formalin and oxidizing disinfectants.

Serology

Pox viruses bear the following antigens:

1.       LS antigen comprising two antigens heat labile L and heat stable S.

2.       Agglutinogen.

3.       Nucleoprotein (NP) antigen.

4.       Haemagglutination

5.       Protective antigen

 

Nucleoprotein antigen is common to all pox viruses whereas other antigens are subgroup specific.

 

Inclusion Bodies

Inclusion bodies of pox-virus are known as Guarnieri bodies. These are small, multiple and intracytoplasmic bodies present in the epithelial cells of the lesion. Inclusion bodies are aggregations of virus particles in a matrix.

Cultivation

1.     On chorio-aflantoic membrane of 11-13 days old chick embros; pocks are produced in 2-3 days.
(i) Vaccinia pocks are large, irregular, greyish, flat necrotic lesions; some are haemorrhagic.
(ii)  Variola pocks are smaller, shining white, convex, non-necrotic and non-haemorrhagic.

The ceiling temperature beyond which pocks fail a develop also varies:
(i) Variola major 38.5°C
(ii) Variola minor 37.5°C

2.     Tissue culture in:
(i) Monkey kidney
(ii) Hela cells
(iii) Chick embryo cells.

3.     Animal inoculation. In monkeys, calves, sheep, rabbits.

Paul's Test

Scarification of rabbit cornea with variola virus leads to keratitis and sections of the cornea show typical Guarnieri bodies.

Vaccination

Routine vaccination against smallpox was stopped in India after irradication of the disease.

Primary vaccination was given within a week after birth followed by secondary vaccination every five years.

In vaccination, live attenuated virus lymph is placed on cleansed skin and light scarification carried out. A local vesicular lesion develops in 3-5 days which develops into a pustule and ultimately dries off.

HERPES VIRUSES

Herpes Simplex Virus

Properties

1. Resistant to 50% glycerine and freezing

2.  Readily destroyed by heating over 50°C

3.  Relatively large, 100-150 nm

4.  Can be cultured in vitro in the presence of living cells.

Pathogenecity

The virus infects only man.

A.  Primary lesions:
1.  Skin. Over face, cheeks, chin, around the mouth, forehead
2.  Oral mucosa. Ulcerative gingivostomatitis
3.  Eyes. Acute kerato-conjunctivitis
4.  Brain. Meningitis, encephalitis.

B. Secondary lesions:
1.  Fever blisters around mouth and other sites on face
2.  Eyes. Superficial dendritic ulcer on the cornea
3.  Genital. Vulvovaginitis.

Varicella Virus

Varicella virus produces two diseases in man viz. varicella (Chicken pox) and Herpes zoster. Chicken pox is the result of primary infection whereas herpes zoster is reactivation of old silent infection. Virus from a case of herpes zoster may produce chickenpox but not the reverse.

Properties

1.  Resistant to 50% glycerine and freezing

2.  Readily destroyed by heating over 55°C

3.  Relatively large, 100-150 nm

4.  Can be grown in cultures of:
(i) Human embryonic tissues
(ii) Human amnion
(iii) HeLa cells
(iv) Monkey kidney cells.

POLIO-VIRUS

It belongs to subgroup Enteroviruses of RNA virus group Picorna viruses.

Structure

1.  Among the smallest viruses, virion size about 27 nm

2.  Capsid is polygonal (icosahedral)

3.  Can be crystallized.

Resistance

1. , Resistant to freezing, drying, pure glycerine and 0.5% phenol

2.  Readily destroyed by heat over 45°C and oxidizing agents.

Serology
By neutralisation test, three main types of poiiovirus have been described:
1.  Type 1 or Brunhilde type

2.  Type 2 or Lansing type

3.  Type 3 or Leon type.

Brunhilde type is the commonest and associated with most of the epidemics.

Inclusion Bodies

Inclusion bodies are intranuclear and of Cowdry type B.

Cultivation

Grows on primary monkey kidney cultures.

 

Immunization

1.  Salk vaccine
It consists of formalin killed virus of all the three types grown in monkey kidney tissue cultures. The vaccine is administered by intramuscular route. Three doses are administered at 4-6 week intervals after 6 months age (primary vaccination) followed by one booster dose each after 1 year and 3 years.

2.  Sabin vaccine
It consists of live attenuated virus available in monovalent and trivalent forms - the latter being usually employed. The vaccine is based in pleasantly flavoured syrup and is stabilized with molar magnesium chloride. It is popular as polio-diops and is available in 10-50 dose vials. Three oral doses, as per manufacturer's instructions are adininistered at 4-6 week interval starting with third month of age, commonly along with triple antigen administration. One booster dose each is administered at the age of 11/2 and 4 years.

INFLUENZA-VIRUS

Influenza virus belongs to group Orthomyxovirus of the RNA viruses. -

Structure

1. The virion is relatively large, 100 nm
2. The capsid is spiral (helical)

3. The virus is covered with a double layer envelope (peplomer) consisting of inner virus protein layer and outer lipid layer of host cell origin.

Resistance

1. Resistant to drying and fruezing.

2. Killed by heating at 50°C for 30 minutes inactivated by chemicals like ether, phenol and formalin.

Serology

1.     RNP antigen (S antigen). Type specific intemal antigen of types A, B, and C.

2.     V antigen. Surface antigen comprising two components :-

(i)                Haemagglutinin -strain specific

(ii)              Neuraminidase -strain specific.

Serological diagnosis is by complement fixation and haemagglutination.

Cultivation

1.     Tissue cultures

2.     Chorio-allantoic membrane of chick embryos.

ARBOVIRUSES

These are RNA viruses transmitted biologically by the insects.

Properties

1.     Small spherical viruses, size 20-60 nm.

2.     Possess lipid envelope making them susceptible to bile salts and ether.

3.     Inactivated at room temperature; with-stand freezing.

4.     Multiply in arthropods (insects).

5.     Can be grown in tissue cultures of

(i)                Chick embryo fibroblasts.

(ii)              (ii) Insect tissues.

6.     Agglutinate red cells of goose and day-old chick.

7.     Possess three antigens:

(i)                Haemagglutinins

(ii)              Complement fixing antigen

(iii)            Neutralizing antigen.

Classification

A. Group A

1. Encephalitis viruses:

(i) Eastern equine encephalitis (EEE) virus

(ii) Western equine encephalitis (WEE) virus
(iii)  Venezualan equine encephalitis (VEE)  
2. Febrile viruses:
(i) Chikungunya virus
(ii) O'nyong-nyong virus.

B. Group B

1. Mosquito-borne:
a. Encephalitis viruses:

 (i) St. Louis encephalitis virus

(ii) Ilheus virus

(iii)West Nile virus

(iv) Murray Valley encephalitis virus

(v) Japanese B encephalitis virus.

b. Yellow fever virus

c. Dengue virus.

2. Tick-borne:
(a) Encephalitis viruses:,.
(i)  Russian Spring Summer Encephalitis (RSSE) virus
(ii)  Powassan virus.

b. Haemorrhagic fever viruses:
(i)  Kyassanur forest disease
(ii)  Omsk haemorrhagic fever.

RABIES VIRUS

Rabies virus belongs to group Rhabdovirus of RNA viruses.

Properties

1.  Relatively large virus, virion size 100-150 nm.

2. Virion is surrounded by double layered lipoprotein envelope; the protein is virus coded and lipid is of host cell origin.

3.  It resists glycerine and low temperatures.

4.  Inactivated by drying, 1% phenol, oxidizing agents, ether, and heating over 45°C.

5. Grown on tissue cultures and yolk sac of chick embryos.

6. Inclusion bodies, known as Negri bodies are eosinophilic and present in cytoplasm.

Prophylaxis

The types of vaccines are:

1. Pasteur's vaccine. The spinal cord of rabbits 3. inoculated with fixed virus is dried over potassium hydroxide. Saline suspensions of cord are prepared when required. Most attenuated virus is one dried for the longest period (14 days) and the least attenuated is the one dried for 5 days. Serial injections are given with decreasing attenuations.

2. Hogye's vaccine Active virus diluted to 1/10,000 is used for initial injections, the dilution is gradually reduced.
3. Babe's vaccine. The virus fixed by heating is used, for first injection heating is done to 80°C; subsequently it is done to 60°C, 45°C and final injections are unheated.
4. Semple's vaccine. Virus inactivated by 1% phenol.

5. Remlinger's vaccine. Virus attenuated by ether.

 


 

 

Chapter 16 : Parasitology

CLASSIFICATION OF PROTOZOA

Protozoa has 4 classes:

 

A. Rhizopoda

 

 

 

- Entamoeba

 

B. Mastigophora

 

 

 

1. Giardia

 

 

2. Trichomonas

 

 

3. Trypanosoma

 

 

4. Leishmania

 

C. Sporozoa

 

 

 

1. Plasmodium

 

 

2. Toxoplasma

 

D. Ciliata

 

 

 

-         Balantidium

ENTAMOEBA HISTOLYTICA

Entamoeba histolytica, occurs as a pathogenic parasite in man.

Habitat

The vegetative (unencystic) occur in:
1. Large intestine of man
2. Faeces
3. Liver.

The cysts are formed in the large intestine; neither formed in liver nor outside the body.

Morphology
A. Vegetative form :
1.  Small mass of cytoplasm capable of amoeboid movements.
2. Average size 20 µ; highly variable.
3. Cytoplasm comprises an outer translucent layer, ectoplasm, and inner dense layer, endoplasm.


16-1
Fig. 16.1 Entamoeba histolytica, unencysted.

1. ectoplasm 2. endoplasm 3. nucleus 4. karyosome 5. vacuoles 6. ingested red blood cells.


4. Spherical nucleus bounded by a thin limiting membrane; dividing organism may show 2 nuclei.
5.  Small chromatin granules arranged as a regular circle of dots, on the limiting membrane.
6. Karyosome. Slightly larger granule inside the nucleus.

7. Endoplasm contains vacuoles, with food particles erythrocytes, portions of leucocytes, and occasionally bacteria.

8.  Movement is by temporary prolongations of cytoplasm, pseudopodia.

B.  Encysted form:

1.  Cysts are round or oval, of pearly colour with a cyst wall.
2.  Size about 12 µ


16-2
Fig. 16.2. Cyst of Entamoeba histolytica


3.  Four or fewer nuclei.

4.  Newly formed cyst has single nucleus, glycogen mass and one or usually two characteristic chromidial bars or chromatoid bodies.

Pathogenicity

Entamoeba histolytica is incapable of survival by itself and derives its metabolic requirements from bacteria. Amoebiasis is characterised by penetration of host tissues by entamoeba, necrosis of tissue cells and absence of inflammatory reaction. Lesions are most commonly found in the caecum, ascending colon, sigrnoid and rectum, appearing as flask-shaped ulcers.

Clinical Types of Amoebiasis

1.     Asymptornatic cyst passers (commonest)

2.     Amoebic diarrhoea

3.     Amoebic dysentery

4.     Amoebic appedicitis

5.     Amoebic typhlitis (inflammation of caecum)

6.     Amoebic granuloma (tescmbling carcinoma)

7.     Amoebic hepatitis

8.     Amoebic abscess in liver, lung, brain and other organs

9.     Amoebic perianal dermatitis.

Diagnosis

1.  Stool Examination:
(i) Blood and mucus in stools.
(ii) Detection of cysts in microscopic examination in fresh specimen, vegetative form may also be seen.
(iii)  Charcot-Leyden crystals in the stools.

2.  Examination of proctoscopic aspirate and biopsy scraping.

3.  Complement fixation test.

4.  Haemagglutination reaction.

Chemotherapy

1.     Alkaloids of ipecac, such as emetine hydrochloride, 65 mg daily subcutaneously for 10 days, effective against intestinal as well as extraintestinal amoebiasis.

2. Halogenated quinolines, such as iodochlorohydroxyquinoline, 600 mg thrice a day for 3 weeks; effective against intestinal amoebiasis.

3. Aminoquinolines, such as chloroquine phosphate 1 g daily for 2 days, then 0.5g daily for 14-21 days, effective against intestinal as well as extraintestinal amoebiasis.

4. Arsenicals, such as glycobiarsol 0.5 g thrice a day for 7 days; effective against intestinal amoebiasis.

5. Diloxanide furoate (Furamide),0.5 g thrice daily for 10 days; effective against intestinal as well as extraintestinal amoebiasis.

6. Metronidazole, 2.4 g daily for three days, or tinidazole 2.0 g daily for three days; effective against intestinal and extraintestinal amoebiasis.

chart16-1.jpg

Chart : Life cycle of Entamoeba histolytica

GIARDIA INTESTINALIS
(Giardia lamblia)

Habitat

1.     Upper part of small intestine

2.     Cysts present in faeces.

Morphology

A. Vegetative form:

1. Shaped like badminton racquet, when flat and like half-pear when viewed from side; one surface (dorsal) is convex and the other (ventral) concave. 


16-3
Fig. 16.3. Giardia intestinalis


2.  Sucking disc, indented posteriorly, with a raised circumference.

3.  Two nuclei, one on each side of the body.

4.  Eight flagella, out of which one arises from the region of sucking disc.

B. Cystic form:

1.  Oval in shape.
2. Size 12 µ x 8 µ
3. Two or four nuclei and parts of flagella.
4. Margin of disc may be seen.


16-4
Fig. 16.4. Cyst of Giardia


Life Cycle

1. Multiply in the intcstine of man by longitudinal division into two; vegetative forms do not survive in faeces.
2. Cysts are formed in intestine only.  
3. The parasite may divide into two inside the cyst.
4.  Infection by ingestion of cysts.

Pathogenicity

1.  Diarrhoea.
2.  Lipid malabsorption.

Chemotherapy

1.  Atabrine 100 mg thrice a day for 5 days.
2.  Metronidazole 600 mg daily for 5 days.

TRICHOMONAS VAGINALIS

Habitat

1.  Female genital tract.
2.  Urinary tract (both sexes).

Morphology

1.  Occur only in vegetative form, trophozoite, no encysted form.
2.  Pear shaped.
3.  10-12µ x 5-7µ in size.
4.  Ovoid nucleus at anterior end with a cleft like depression at its side.
5.  3-5 free flagella at anterior end


16-5
Fig. 16.5. Trichomonas hominis.


6. Undulating membrane, formed by a thick flagellum passing backward and coming out free at posterior end; supported at the base by rod shaped costa.

7.  Exostyle runs down the middle of the cell and ends in pointed tail like extremity.

Pathogenicity

Trichomonilial vaginits.

Chemotherapy
Metronidazole 1g daily for 10 days.

 

TRYPANOSOMA GAMBIENSE

Habitat
1.  Blood, lymphatic system, cerebro-spinal fluid of man and domestic animals.
2.  Developing trypanosomes in the gut of tsetse fly, (Glossina palpalis, G. Morsitans).
3.  Crithridia and metacyclic trypanosomes in the salivary glands.

Morphology
1.  Polymorphic i.e., with or without flagellum.

2.  Length 8-30µ; longer organisms have long flagellum, shorter ones have none or small flagellum.
3. Nucleus central in position.

4.  Near the posterior end lies kinetoplast from which flagellum arises.

5. Well-developed undulating membrane.

6.  Cytoplasm contains granules and vacuoles of varying sizes.

16-6
Fig. 16.6. Trypanosoma gambiense.

Life cycle

Pathogenicity

Sleeping sickness (in fact a stage of the disease Trypanosomiasis) in Tropical Africa.

16-7
Fig 16.7 Trypanosoma cruzi

Diagnosis
1. Peripheral blood smear.
2. Examination of the upper layer of deposit obtained by centrifuging 10 ml of venous blood.
3. Examination of the content of punctured enlarged lymph node, usually posterior cervical lymph node.
4. Examination of the centrifuge deposit of cerebrospinal fluid.

5.Animal inoculation of blood, lymph node juice or cerebrospinal fluid in guinea pigs, rats or mice.

Chemotherapy
  1. Suramin, 0.3-0.5 g intravenously followed by  0.1 g intravenously every 4 days to a total of
10.0 g.
2. Pentamidine, 2-4 mg intravenously daily for 10 days.
3. Tryparsamide, 1.0-1.5 g intravenously, followed by 2.0-3.0 g intravenously every week for
15 weeks.

 

TRYPANOSONIA CRUZI

Habitat

1.      In the blood stream of man, cats, and armadillos.

2.      Leishmanioid forms in tissues of man and animals

3.      Crithridia and metacyclic forms in the gut of bugs (Triatoma negista, T. infestans)

Morphology

A. In blood smear
1. Monomorphic, i.e., all the organisms possess a free flagellum.
2. Abort 20µ in length; may be broad or narrow.
3. Central nucleus.
4. Kinetoplast large, oval and situated near posterior end.

5. Undulating membrane not much folded.

16-7
Fig 16.7 Trypanosoma cruzi

Life cycle

Pathogenecity

Chaga's disease in South America.

Diagnosis

1. Peripheral blood smear

2.  Animal inoculation.

LEISHMANIA

Species

1.     Leish. Donovani

2.     Leish. Tropica

3.     Leish. brasiliensis.

Habitat

1.  Cells of reticulo-endothelial system in the spleen, liver and bone marrow.
2.  Faeces, urine, and discharges from nose and throat.
3.  Leptomonas form in gut of sandfly (Phlebotomus argentipes).

Morphology

A. Leishmania form in man:
1.  Round or oval
2.  Size 2-5µ
3.  Large, round or oval nucleus
4.  Rod-shaped kinetoplast.

16-8
Fig. 16.8. Leishmania.

Left: Mass of parasites in a macrophage Right: Leptomonas form.

B. Leptomonas form in sandfly
1.  Motile; resembling a trypanosome

2.  Free flagellum without undulating membrane

3. Elongated body, 10-20µ long
4. Central nucleus

5.  Kinetoplast anterior.

Life Cycle

 

Pathogenicity

1. Kala-azar, caused by Leish donovani; characterized by irregular prolonged fever, chronicity, splenomegaly, at times hepatomegaly, emaciation, anaemia, leucopenia, hyperglobulinuria, and skin pigmentation.
2. Oriental sore, caused by Leish. tropica, limited to local lesions of the skin and subcutaneous tissues.
3. Espundia, caused by Leish. brasiliensis, Imuted to lesions of skin and nasopharyngeal mucous membrane.

Diagnosis
1.  Blood counts. Leucopenia.
2. Demonstration of parasites in smears from blood, bone marrow, and biopsy aspirates of spleen, liver and lymph nodes.
3. Napier's aldehyde test. Add 2 drops of formaldehyde to I ml of patient's serum. Observe for jelly formation and appearance of opacity. If it occurs within 10 minutes the test is strongly positive; late occurence within 2 hours indicates weakly positive test.

4.     Chopra's antimony test. Add 2 drops of 4% urea stibamine solution to 1 ml of diluted serum. (in normal saline 1: 10). Immediate flocculation and turbidity indicate positive test.

5.     Complement fixation test.

6.     Blood culture on NNN blood agar medium.

7.     Skin test.

Chemotherapy

1. Pentavalent antimony preparations, such as sodium stibogluconate (Pentostam.) 0.6-0.8 g daily intravenously for 14 days.
2. Diamidine compounds, such as dihydroxystibamidine isethionate 0.25 g. daily intravenously for 10 days.

MALARIAL PARASITE

Species

1.     Plasmodium vivax Benign tertian malaria.

2.     Plasmodium malariae. Quartan malaria.

3.     Plasmodium ovale. Ovale tertian malaria.

4.     Plasmodium falciparum. Malignant tertian malaria

Habitat

1.  Red blood cells of man.
2.  Female anophele mosquito.

Morphology

The distinguishing features of various species are in the table.

 

P. vivax

P. malariae

P. ovale

P. falciparum

Schizogony cycle

48 hours

72 hours

48 hours

48 hours

Trophozoites a. Ring

> 2.5 µ

 2.5 µ

 2.5 µ

 1.5 µ

Trophozoites b. Pre-Schizont

Very amoeboid; delicate

Not amoeboid; solid; band forms frequent

Not amoeboid; solid; and forms rare

Not found

Schizont

7.5 µ

7.5 µ

7.5 µ

Not found

Number of merozoites

16

8

12

Not found

Gametocytes

Rounded; 7.5 µ

Rounded; 7.5 µ

Rounded; 7.5 µ

Crescent shaped

Infected red cell

Enlarged and pale

Not enlarged; pale

Oval: fimbriated edges; moderately enlarged; pale

Not enlarged; not pale

Dots on infected red cell  

Schuffner's fine stippling  

None 

Schuffner's distinct and numerous

Maurer's; coarse blotches

Table : Comparison of four Species of Plasmodium


 

1. Asexual forms

A. Small trophozoite (Ring form)

The rings (or signet rings) are stout, large, measuring about 1/3 of the diameter of red cell.

B. Large trophozoite (pre-schizont):

1.  Irregular in shape.

2.  Delicate.

3.  Many pseudopodial processes; active amoeboid movements.

4. No vacuolated area.

5. Fine grains of brown pigment, haematin.

C. Schizonts.

1.  Size equals red cell; parasitised red cell becomes distended and larger.

2. Nucleus divided into several segments, each surrounded by cytoplasm; these segments along with cytoplasm are called merozoites.

The pigment spot remain separate from merozoites as residual body.

II. Sexual forms (Gametocytes):

1.  Size equals red cell; no segmentation.

2. Male gametocyte or microgametocyte has pale blue cytoplasm, pigment distributed and nucleus diffuse.

3. Female gametocyte or macrugametocyte has dark blue cytoplasm, pigment ' collected together around compact nucleus.

Modes of Infection

1. Bite of infected female anopheles mosquito.

2. Transplacental (congenital malaria).

3. Blood transfusion.

Pathogenicity
Malarial parasite causes malaria, an acute and chronic infection characterised by fever, anaemia, splenomegaly, and often serious or fatal complications. Incubation period is 7-10 days in falciparum malaria and 10-14 days in other types. Onset is heralded by lassitude, anorexia, headache and chillness, Classical bouts of fever appear at regular intervals, each attack comprising three stages:

1.     Cold stage. It lasts about half an hour. The patient feels intense cold and shivers from head to foot; his teeth chatter and he covers himself under blankets. He has severe headaches and often troublesome vomiting. The temperature goes on rising.

16-9
Fig. 16.9. Life Cycle of Malarial Parasite.

2.     Hot stage. It lasts 1-6 hours. The patient feels burning hot and may be delerious. Vomiting often continues to this stage. The face is flushed, and the skin dry and burning. The temperature rises to 39-41°C.

3.     Sweating stage. Profuse perspiration starts.
The temperature drops and the patient
lbecomes comfortable and falls asleep. Usually
§the spleen, and especially in children, the liver become palpable and tender.

Types of Malaria

1.     Benign tertian malaria (P. vivax). There is spontaneous remission and a greater tendency to relapse.

2.     Quartan malaria (P. malariae) The attacks are of short duration and occur every fourth day. Nephritis is a common complication.

3.     Malignant tertian malaria (P. falcipaum). The fever is rather remittent and tertian periodicity of the infection is indicated by exacerbation of continuous fever. Prostration is more marked and the tendency to delirium greater. Dangerous severe forms of falciparum malaria are termed pernicious malaria, which may be of the following types:
(a) Bilious remittent fever, characterised by profuse vomiting, jaundice, epigastric distress, liver tenderness, gastric haemorrhage and dehydration.
(b) Cerebral malaria, characterised by headache, gradually lapsing to coma, hypepyrexia at times beyond thermometer range, convulsive seizures and psychotic manifestations.
(c) Algid malaria, characterised by profound rostration. With a tendency to fatal syncope, marked coldness of skin, subnormal temperature and circulatory collapse.

(d) Gastric malaria. Characterised by persistent vomiting.

(e) Dysenteric malaria. Characterised by bloody diarrhoea due to excessive capillary thrombosis in the intestinal walls.

Laboratory Diagnosis

1. Blood films. Thick blood films are more helpful than thin Wood films. The films are stained with Field's rapid method immediately on being apparently dry. The stain consists of two solutions A and B:

(a)   Solution A:
Methylene blue  0.8 g
Azur B  0.5 g
Disodium dihydrogen phosphate anhydrous  5.0 g
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate anhydrous  6.25 g
Distilled water  500 ml

(b)  Solution B:
Eosin yellow (water soluble) powder  1 g
Disodium dihydrogen phosphate anhydrous 5 g
Potassium dihydrogen phosphate anhydrous 6.25 g
Distilled water  500 ml

Staining Procedure

(a) Dip film for one second in solution A

(b) Rinse in water

(c) Dip for one second in solution B

(d) Rinse in water.

In addition to various stages of malarial parasite, the film may also reveal leucocytes containing ingested malarial pigment.

2.  Sternal puncture.
3.  Leucocyte count. Leucopenia with relative monocytosis.
4.  Complement fixation test.
5.  Precipitation test.
6. Indirect haemagglutination test.

7. Immunofluoroscence test.

A patient with malaria may give positive Wassermann and Kahn reactions.

Chemotherapy

1.     Suppressive cure:

(a) Chloroquin phosphate (Melubrin) 1.0 g single dose.

(b) Amodiaquin (Camoquin) 0.6 g single dose.

2.       Radical cure. Primaquin 15 mg once daily for 2 weeks, ineffective in active phase.

3.       Chemoprophylaxis. Chloroquin phosphate 0.5 g, amodiaquin 0.3 g or pyrimethamine (Daraprim) 25 mg orally once a week.

CLASSIFICATION OF HELMINTHS

I. Phylum Platyhelminthes

A. Class Cestoda:
1. Dibothriocephalus latus
2.  Taenia solium
3. Taenia saginata
4. Taenia granulosa
5,  Hymenolepis nana.

B. Class Trematoda:
1. Schistosoma haematobium
2. Schistosoma mansoni
3.  Schistosoma japonicum.
4. Clonorchis sinensis
5. Heterophyes heterophyes
6. Fasciola hepatica
1. Fasciolopsis buski
8.  Paragonimus westermanii.

II. Phylum Nemathelminthes

1.  Ascaris lumbaricoides
2.  Enterobius vermicularis
3. Strongyloides stercoralis
4. Trichuris trichiura
5. Trichinella spiralis

6. Ankylostoma duodenale

7. Nectar americanas

8. Wuchereria bancrofti

9. Loa loa

10. Dipetalonema perstans

11. Filaria ozzardi
12. Onchocera volvulus
13. Dracunculus medinensis.

DIBOTHRIOCEPHALUS LATUS
(Diphyllobothrium latum)

Habitat

1.     Adult in the intestine of man, cats, dogs, beers

2.     Eggs in faeces

3.     Larva first in cyclops, then in fresh water fish.

Morphology

(a)   Worm

3-4 metres in length, 1-2 cms in breadth.

Number of segments variable; may exceed 4,000.

Segments are broader than long.

Yellowish grey in colour.

 

16-10
Fig 16.10 Dibothriocephalus latus

Scolex showing sucking groove (bothrium)

 

16-11

1. Testes and vitelline glands 2. Vagina 3. Uterus 4. Ovary 5. Shell gland

6. Opening of vagina 7. Opening of vas deferens 8. Uterine pore

Fig 16.11 Dibothriocephalus latus - Gravid segment showing the rosette-like appearance of the uterus

Head (Scolex):
1. Elongated, 2-3 mm in length.
2. Bears 2 slit-like suckers.
3. A groove (bothrium) on each side.

(c) Genitalpores:
1. Three in each segment; small.
2. Situated on flat ventral surface.
(i)  Anterior pore. Opening of vas deferens.
(ii)  Middle pore. Vaginal opening.
(iii)  Posterior pore. Uterine opening.

(d) Testes:
1. Very numerous.
2. Situated dorsally in the medullary layer of worm.

(e) Uterus:

1.  Rosette shaped.
2. Seen as brownish patcl, in the centre of each segment opening into uterine opening.

(f) Eggs:

1.  Operculated.
2.  70µ x 45µ in size.
3.  Consist of an unsegmented ovum surrounded by yolk.

(g) Hexacanth-embryo (oncosphere):
In water, ovum develops in hexacanth embryo enclosed in a delicate membrane, oncophore.

Llfe Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Dibothriocephalus latus

Pathogenicity

1.  Megaloblastic  anaemia (vitamin B12 deficiency).
2.  Gastrointestinal disturbances.

3.  Occasionally, jaundice

4.  Low erythrocyte count; nucleated cells; poikilocytosis.

5.  Eosinophilia.

6.  Colour index > 1 (as in pernicious anaemia).

Diagnosis

Stool Examination for:

1.  Eggs.
2.  Segments distinguished by brownish patch in the middle and absence of marginal pore.

Chemotherapy
Quanacrine hydrochloride (Atabrine) 0.2 g every 5 minutes (total 1.0 g). A purge is given before and 2 hours after treatment.

 

1. Globular.
2. 0.6-1.0 mm in diameter.

TAENIA SOLIUM
(Pork tape worm)

Habitat

1.  Adult worms in small intestine of man.
2.  Eggs in faeces.
3.  Larvae in musculature and other organs of pig, sometimes also of man.

Morphology

(a)    Worm:
1.  Usually 2-3 metres or more in length.

2.  800-900 segments.
3.  Segments larger than broad (cf. Dibothriocephalus latus).

16-12

1. Uterus 2. Testes 3. Nerve 4. Ovary 5. Vitelline gland 6. Shell gland 7. Vagina 8. Vas deferens 9. Excretory vessel

Fig. 16.12. Taenia solium. Mature segment

(b)   Head (Scolex)

1.       Globular

2.       0.6-1.0 mm in diameter

.

16-13
Fig. 16.13. Taenia solium

3.       Rostellum has a double crown of about 28 hooks.

4.       Large hooks (160-180µ) alternate with small hooks (110-140µ).

16-14

1. Suckers 2. Large hooks 3. Small hooks

Fig. 16.14. Taenia solium. Anterior extremity of scolex, cut off, laid outflat on a slide and viewed from above

(c)    Genital pores

1. Irregularly alternate.
2. Situated near the middle of the lateral margin of the segment.

3. Thick, brown, radially striated embryophore.

4. Minute hexacanth embryo measuring 14 µ.

(d) Uterus

1. Consists of a median longitudinal stem.

2.  8-10 lateral, compound branches on each side.

16-15
Fig. 16.15 Taenia solium. Gravid segment showing uterus.

(e) Eggs:
1.  Brown in colour.
2.  36µ in diameter.

 3. Thick, brown, radially striatedembryophore.

4. Minute hexacanth embryo measuring 14µ 

 


Life Cycle

Fig 16.16 Life cycle of Taenia solium

Pathogenicity

A. Adult worm:
1. Dyspepsia.

2. Diarrhoea or constipation.

3. Vomiting.

4. Anorexia.
5. Anaemia. 

B.  Cysticercus cellulosae
Cysts in brain, eye, muscles and other organs.

Diagnosis

A.  Adult worm:
1.  Eggs in faeces (cannot be distinguished from T. saginata).
2.  Scolex in faeces, armed with hooks.
3.  Segments in faeces, in chains or singly.

B.  Cysticercus cellulosae:
By X-ray examination.

Chemotherapy

As in Dibothriocephalus latus

Habitat

TAENIA SAGINATA
(Beef tape worm)

Habitat

1.  Adult worms in small intestine of man.

2.  Eggs in human faeces.

3.  Larvae in muscles of cattle.

Morphology

16-16
Fig. 16-17. Taenia saginata. Gravid segment showing uterus.

 

1.  3-4 metres in length, 1-1.4 cm in breadth.

2. Over 1,000 segments.  
3. Gravid segment 2 cm long, 1.4 cm broad.

4.  Scolex does not bear hooks.

5. Uterus consists of a central longitudinal stem which bears 18-30 compound lateral branches on each side.

6.  Eggs as in Taenia solium.

16-18

Fig. 16.18 Ovum of Taenia saginata.

Life cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Taenia saginata



Pathogenicity and Diagnosis

As in Taenia solium; the scolex has no hooks; larval stage not found in man.

Chemotherapy
As in Dibothriocephalus latus

TAENIA GRANULOSA
(Taenia echinococcus)

16-19

1. Excretory vessel 2. Uterus 3. Cirrus pouch 4. Vagina 5. Ovary 6. Vitelline gland 7. Testes 8. Shell gland 9. Uterus.

Fig. 16.19. Taenia granulosa. Entire worm

Habitat

1.     Adult worm in intestine of dogs, jackals, wolves foxes, cats (not in man).

2.     Eggs in faecee of above-mentioned animals.

3.     Larval form (hydatid cyst) in sheep cattle, horses and man

Morphology

I.  Size 4 mm x O.5mm
2.  Consists of scolex and 3-5 segments (usually 3); first segment contains no genital organs, second one is mature, third one is gravid.
3. Head bears 28-50 hooks in a double crown; large hooks 22-30µ small hooks 18-22µ.

Hydalid cyst
1. May attain the size of a child's head.
2. . Vesicular bodies full of fluid; when fluid is drained into a jar a sediment called hydatid sand settles down.
3.  Hydatid sand contains an enormous number of heads (scolices).

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Taenia granulosa

Pathogenecity

Hydatid cyst

Diagnosis

1.     Eosinophils 30-35%.

2.     Precipitin reaction. Mix equal parts of patient's serum and preserved hydatid fluid and incubate at 37°C for one hour. Observe for flocculation. If it occurs within 36 hours, it suggests hydatid cyst. Negative test however, is not conclusive.
3. Intradennal reaction. 0.2 ml of sterile hydatid fluid is injected intradernially into the patient's forearm. A wheal forms in about 15 minutes, surrounded by a constant erythematous zone which later disappears with the wheal. A second similar reaction appears a few hours later and indicates hydatid cyst.

HYMENOLEPIS NANA

Habitat

1.  Adult worms in small intestine of man, rats and mice.

2. Eggs in faeces.

3. Larvae in intestinal villi.

Morpholog y
 
1. Small, thread like.

2. 2-3 cm in length, 0.6 mm in breadth.


16-20
Fig 16.20 Hynenolepis nana. Head showing sucker and rostellum armed with a single crown of hooks

3. Over a hundred segments; broader than long.

16-21

1. Excretory vessel 2. Testis 3. Vitelline gland 4. Vagina 5. Cirrus

6. Cirrus pouch 7. Seminal vesicle 8. Ovary 9. Vas efferens.

Fig 16-21 - Hymenolepis nana Mature segment showing three testes

4.  Genital pores are unilateral; situated on left anterior corner in each segment.
5.  Head small and globular, 0.3 mm in diameter.
6.  Head armed with single crown of 28 hooks.
7.  Testes, three in each mature segment, situated in a horizontal line.
8.  Uterus, an irregular sac containing 80-180 eggs.
9.  Eggs colourless, globular or oval, transparent; egg size 30-60µ
10. Embryo (oncosphere) covered with a thin membrane, embryophore, bearing at each pole a very minute papilliform projection, from which a few filaments arise.

16-22
Fig. 16.22. Ovum of Hymenolepis nana.

11. Outside the embryophore is a thick layer of semi-fluid substance, surrounded by a thin egg shell.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Hymenolepsis nana

Pathogenicity

Usually symptomless; may produce:

1. Diarrhoea with mucus and tenesmus.

2.  Vertigo.

3.  Epileptic convulsion.

Diagnosis

Ova in faeces.

Chemotherapy

 As in Dibothriocephalus latus

SCHISTOSOMA HAEMATOBIUM

1.  Adult worms in portal vein and its radicles, and especially the vesical plexus of man.
2. Eggs in urine, rarely in faeces.
3. Larval stages in fresh water snails, Bulinus truncatus, Physopsis africana.
4. Infective cercariae in water; penetrate the unbroken skin of man.

Morphology

A. In both sexes
1.  Mouth opens into oesophagus which is surrounded by glandular cells.
2. Oesophagus extends from mouth to ventral sucker, and shows two dilatations; at the anterior margin of ventral sucker, it bifurcates.

B. Male worm

1.  Colourless; 1 cm in length; lateral margins are covered ventrally.
2. Distome, i.e., possesses two suckers:
(i) A small oral sucker surrounding the mouth situated at the anterior extremity of body.
(ii) A larger pedunculated ventral sucker, a little behind the oral sucker.

3. Gynaecophoric canal extends from the posterior extremity of the body to ventral sucker.
4. Cuticle on dorsal surface is covered with small tubercle; Minute spines occur on the suckers and in the gynaecophoric canal.
5.  The genital pore is situated just behind the ventral suckers.
6. 
The male genital apparatus is composed of 6 to 9 testicular masses, situated dorsally, just behind the ventral sucker.



16-23

1. Oral sucker 2. Ventral sucker 3. Testes 4. Tubercles on skin

Fig. 16.23. Diagram showing male Schistosoma haematobium

8.     A vas efferens arises from each testis; these four unite to form vas deferens, which dilates into a seminal vesicle from which it continues to genital pore.
8. No copulatory organs.
 
C. Female worm

1.     Cylinderical, thread-like, dark coloured; extremities pointed.

2.     2 cms in length (longer than male).

3.     Skin smooth; not tuberculated but minute spines may occur on the suckers.

4.     The suckers are smaller than in male worm and almost equal in size.

5.     Ovary is a small elongated organ situated in the posterior half of the body.

6.     Oviduct arises from posterior extremity of ovary and immediately turns and runs anteriorly.

7.         Vitelline glands occupy the posterior fourth of the worm, extending from a point immediately behind the ovary, to the posterior extremity of the body.

8.       From the anterior extremity of vitelline glands, the vitelline duct arises, runs parallel with the oviduct and unites with it just in front of ovary.

9.       Shell glands surround the junction of oviduct with vitelline duct. 

16-24

1. Oral sucker 2. Ventral sucker 3. Genital pore 4. Uterus 5. Shell gland

6. Oviduct 7. Ovary 8. Vitelline duct 9. Vitelline gland.

Fig. 16.24. Diagram showing female Schistosoma haematobium

10.The common duct dilates into an ootype, then narrows and runs forward as uterus to genital pore.

D. Eggs

1. Compact elongated spindles

2. Dilated in the middle.

3. 140µ x 50µ in size

4. Short, stout, terminal spine at one pole.
 

E. Miracidium
1. An anterior boring papilla from which arises a primitive digestive sac extending half the length of larva.
2.  Two enormous unicellular salivary glands.
3.  A minute central nervous system.
4.  A well-developed excretory system.
5.  Posterior half occupied by a mass of germ cells.

F. Sporocyst
Elongated, thin walled, sac-like body.

G. Cercaria
1.  400µ x 80µ in size.
2.  Anterior oval body with long tail-stem which bifurcates terminally.
3.  Surface covered with extremely minute spines.
4. Anteriorly there is large oral sucker; ventral sucker lies in front of the junction, of the body with the tail-stem.
5. Five pairs of unicellular glands, near middle of the body; each gland has a large nucleus; anterior two pairs are coarsely granular.
6.  From each gland a duct arises running forward to the margin of oral sucker.
7. Alimentary canal consists of minute mouth situated in the middle of oral sucker, leading to a small, straight narrow tube, terminating in a small, bilobed dilatation, near middle of the body.
8. A mass of cells, situated immediately behind the ventral sucker, represent the rudiments of genital organs.
9. Elaborate excretory system consisting of three pairs of flame-cells in the body, one pair in tail. A duct arises from each flame-cell; these ducts join together on each side; two trunks from both sides unite into a common duct which runs the length of tail, then bifurcates and terminates in two terminal pores.  

16-25

D.S.  Duct spines M.  Mouth S.G,D.  Secreto74and duct N.  Nervous system C.G.G.  Coarsely granular gland F.G.G.  Finely granular gland E,V.  Excretory vesicle C.E.C.  Caudal excretory canal F.  Flame cell A.S.  Anterior sucker G.  Gut G.C.  Genital cells 1.  Island of excretory vesicle.

Fig. 16.25. Diagram of the cercatia of S. haematobium

Life cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Schistosoma haematobium

Pathogenicity

1.     Sandypatch appearance in bladder walls.

2.     Endophlebitis blocking the lumen of radicles of portal vein.

3.     Papillomata containing numerous eggs on walls of bladder; ulceration and haemorrhage; may become malignant.

4.     Liver and spleen enlarged.

5.     Blood and mucus in stools.

Diagnosis
Eggs in urine, rarely in faeces.

Chemotherapy
Trivalent antimoney compounds.

CHLONORCHIS SINENSIS

Habitat
1.  Adults in the bile ducts of man, cattle and dogs.
2.  Eggs in faeces.
3. Sporocysts, rediae and young cercariae in fresh-water snails, Bithynia fuchsiana, B. longiconds Parafossarulus striatulus.
4.  Infective cercariae in fresh-water.
 

Morphology

1.     The body is delicate, nearly transparent, brownish-red and, when young, covered with minute spines.

16-26

1. Oral sucker 2. Pharynx 3. Intestinal caeca 4. Excretory vessels

5. Uterus 6, Vitelline glands 7. Testes 8. Excretory vesicle

Fig. 16.26. Clonorchis sinensis


2.  1 cm long and 6 mm broad.
3. Ovary in front of testes, behind middle of worm; a prominent receptaculum seminis lies close to it.
4. Vitelline glands lie external to the limbs of intestine and extend from ventral sucker to the receptaculum seminis.
5. Genital pore just in front of ventral sucker.
6.  Eggs are operculated, flask-shaped, yellowish, with tiny knobs at the end opposite to opperculum; 30µ x 86µ; contain asymmetrical miracidium.

Life Cycle

Chart : Clonorchis sinenses

Pathogenicity
1. Liver enlarged, studded with white vesicles which are thickened walls of life ducts distended with eggs and parasites.
2.  Bile duct obstruction.
3.  Later, fatty degeneration and carcinoma of
liver.

Diagnosis
Eggs in faeces

Habitat
1.  Adult worms in bile-ducts of sheep, goats,
cattle, horses, pigs and rarely of man.
Eggs in faeces.
Larval stages viz. sporocysts, rediae, cercariae
in fresh-water mollusc, Lifnnoea truncatula.

FASCIOLA HEPATICA
(Liverfluke)

Habitat

1.     Adult worms in bile ducts of sheeps, goats, cattle, horses, pigs, and rarely of man.

2.     Eggs in faeces

3.     Larval stages viz. sporocysts, rediae, cercariae in fresh water mollusk, Limnoea truncatula.

4.     Infective encysted cercariae found on blades



16-27

1. Oral sucker 2. Secondary branches on intestinal caeca 3. Cirrus and genital pore 4. Ventral sucker

5. Uterus 6. Ovary 7. Transverse vitelline duct 8. Vitelline glands 9. Testes

Fig. 16.27. Fasciola hepatica

Morphology

1.  3.5 cm X 1.2 cms;
2.  Anteriorly a cone, 4 mm long behind which it broadens suddenly giving rise to two shoulders.
3.  Cuticle is covered with minute spines.
4.  Ventral sucker, very large and muscular, situated in line with two shoulders.
5.  Genital pore is just in front of ventral sucker.
6. Two intestinal caeca, close together in the midline, each bearing a number of lateral compound branches.

7. Two testes, one posterior to other in immature worm but overlapping in adult worm; extensively branched.
8. Two vas efferens arise from testes, run anteriorly uniting into a vas deferens just before entering cirrus pouch.
9. Ovary fan-shaped, on one side close to ventral sucker.
10. Vitelline glands prominent, profuse and scattered dorsally, being especially condensed laterally.
11. Just posterior to the ovary, the transverse vitelline duct is a conpicuous structure discharging into fertilization canal; the oviduct continues anteriorly to the uterus.

12. The uterus is short, rosette-shaped, situated immediately behind the ventral sucker; opens close to vas deferens, immediately in front of ventral sucker.

13. Eggs opperculated, 140 µ x 80 µ, contain a large refractile, fertilized, unsegmented ovum which lies in a mass of yolk cells.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Fasciola hepatica

Pathogenicity

1. Adenoinata

2. Obstructive jaundice

3. Liver cirrhosis

4. Worm abscesses in different parts of body.

Chemotherapy

Emetine 30 mg daily by intramuscular route for 18 days.

PARAGONIMUS WESTERMANII

Habitat

1. Adults in the lung, pleura, bronchi, occasionally in liver, spleen and other organs of man, dog, cat tiger, wolf and pig.
2.  Eggs in sputum, rarely in faeces.
3.  Sporocysts, rediae and young cercariae in fresh-water mollusc, Melania libertina.
4.  Infective cercariae in fresh-water crabs and crayfish.

Morphology

1.     Fleshy reddish brown, resembling one half of a pea.

2.     1.2 cm long, 6 mm broad, 5 mm, thick.



16-28

1. Oral sucker 2. Ventral sucker 3. Gut caeca 4. Uterus 5. Genital pore 6. Ovary

7. Shell gland 8. Vitelline duct 9. Vitellaria 10. Testes 11. Excretory pore

Fig. 16.28. Paragonimus westennanii

.

 

3.  Genital pore in midline just behind ventral sucker.
4.  Testes lobed, situated in posterior third of the body.
5.  Ovary on right side just behind ventral sucker.
6.  Uterus coiled, asymmetrical, on left side.
7.  Vitellaria consist of a band on each side of the body.
8.  Eggs 70 µ x 45 µ, contain a fertilized unseg mented ovum.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Paragonimus westermani

Pathogenicity

1.  Cysts resembling tubercle nodules.
2.  Bronchiectasis.
3.  Bronchial abscess.
4.  Endemic haemoptysis.

Diagnosis

Eggs in sputum of faeces.

Chemotherapy

Bithional 2.0 g alternate days for 3-4 weeks.

ASCARIS LUMBRICOIDES
(Round worm)

Habitat
1. Adult worms in intestine of man, pigs, occasionally larger apes, sheep and cattle.

2. Eggs in faeces.

3. Infective larvae in eggs in soil, water or green vegetables.

Morphology
(a) In both sexes:
1.  Elongated and cylinderical; yellowish white.
2.  15-50 cm long, 2-6 min in diameter.
3.  Three finely toothed lips, one dorsal and two subventral.

(b) Male worm:
1.  Smaller than female, average 25 cm.
2.  Posterior extremity pointed and curved ventrally in the form of a hook.
3.  Two curved spicules, 2 min long, protrude from orifice of cloaca.
4.  Large number of minute papillae in the vicinity of'cloacal orifice.
5. Single testis; consists of a very long tube 7-8 times the length of worm folded into loops within the body; continuous with ejaculatory duct which opens into cloaca.

(c) Female wonn:
1.  Average length 40 cm.
2.  Posterior extremity straight and not pointed.
3. Minute vulva situated ventrally, at the junction of anterior and middle thirds of body.
4. Vagina, 1-1.5 cm long, 2-3 min wide, divided into two coiled branches, about 10 times the length of body, tapers off in width so that terminal part is hair-like. .
5.  The portion of each branch (duct) that ties close to common vagina acts as
uterus, about 20 cm in length; middle part 3. is oviduct and distal. part, ovary.

16-29

(a) Mature male 1. Oesophagus 2. Intestine 3. Testis 4. Seminal vesicle.

b) Gravid female 1. Oesophagus 2. Intestine 3. Ovary 4. Vulva 5. Oviduct 6. Uterus

Fig. 16.29. Ascaris lumbaricoides

 (d) Eggs:
1. Round or oval; brownish.

2. 60µ x 45µ

16-30
Fig. 16.30. Ovum of A. lumbaricoides.

3. Egg shell colourless and extremely resistant surrounded by a stout albuminous coat whose surface is thrown into rugosities or mammillations, which stain brown with faecal matter.

4. Within the egg shell is a very delicate vitelline envelope, still more resistant than egg shell making the eggs viable for several years.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Ascaris lumbaricoides

Pathogenicity

1.  Haemorrhages (minute) in intestine, liver, lungs.

2.  Lobar pneumonia.

3.  Toxaemia.

4.  Peritonitis.

Diagnosis

Eggs in faeces.

Chemotherapy

1.  Piperazine (Antepar) 3 g single dose.

2.  Tetramisole (Decaris) 150 mg single dose.

3.  Thiabendazole (Mintezol) 1.5 g after evening meal, repeated after next morning meal.

ENTEROBIUS VERMICULARIS
(Oxyuris venniculads, pinwonn)

Habitat

1.  Young and mature adult worms in small intes
tine of man.
2.  Gravid female in colon and rectum.
3.  Eggs on perianal skin.
4.  Infective larvae in eggs on perianal skin.

Morphology

16-31

a. Male :- 1. Oesophagus. 2. Bulb behind oesophagus 3. Intestine 4. Testis 5. Spicule 6. Seminal vesicle

2. Gravid female :- 1. Cervical alae 2. Oesophagus 3. Bulb behind oesophagus 4. Intestine 5. Ovary 6. Vulva 7. Uterus 8. Anus

Fig. 16.31. Enterobius vermicularis

 

.

 

(a) Male worm:
1.  4 mm long, 0.15 mm wide.
2.  Posterior extremity curved and sharply truncated.
3. Single, brown, hook-like spicule measuring 70 µ in length, close to posterior extremity.

(b) Female worm:
1.  1 cm long, 0.15mm wide.
2.  Tail long, tapering, straight and pointed.
3.  Vulva is situated in anterior third of body.

(c) Eggs:

1.  Coiourless, asymmetrical, slightly flattened on one side.
2.  55 µ x 25 µ in size.

16-32
Fig. 16.32. Ovum of Enterobius Vermicularis.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Enterobius vermicularis

Pathogenicity

1.  Perianal itching.

2.  Acute appendicitis.

Diagnosis

1.  Adult worms in faeces.

2.  Eggs on scrappings from perianal skin.

Chemotherapy

1.                 Piperazine (Antepar) 1.5 g daily x 7 days.

2.                   Thiabendazole (Mintezol) 1.5 g after evening meal repeated after 24 hours.

3.                   Tetramisole (Decaris) 150 mg repeated after 48 hours..

4.                   Pyrantel pamoate (Pyranthel) 11 mg per kg body weight to be repeated after 2 weeks.


 STRONGYLOIDES STERCORALIS

 

Habitat

1.  Primary infection with males and females in the lungs.

2.  Secondary infection with females, rarely males, in intestine, particularly jejunum.

3.     Larvae (not eggs) passed in human faeces.

4.     Infective larvae on woodwork of latrines, soil and water; may occur in sputum.

Morphology

(a) Female worm (parasitic form)
1. 2.2 mm long, 50 µ broad.
2. Oesophagus, one-third of body length, cylinderical.

16-33

(a)  Parasitic female :- 1.  oesophagus 2. intestine 3.  eggs in uterus 4. vulva 5. anus

 (b) Rhabditiform. larva from human faeces

(c) A free. living female :- 1. eggs in uterus  2. Anus

(d) A free living male :- 1. oesophagus  2. testis 3. Spicule

(e) An infective filariform larva

Fig. 16.33. Strongyloides stercoralis

3. Vulva opens at the junction of middle and posterior third of the body.
4. Gravid female has about fifty eggs
5. Eggs, thin shelled, transparent, 55 µ x 30 µ, contain larvae ready to hatch.
(b) Female worm (free-living form)
1. 1 mm long, 50 µ broad.
2. Oesophagus short club-shaped, with a bulb at posterior extremity.
3. Tail straight and pointed. 

4.  Vulva lies near middle of the body.
5. Gravid female has about 40 eggs in a chain extending over half the length of worm.
6. Egg, yellowish, very thin shelled, 70µ x 45µ; contains fully developed rhabditiform larva which hatches at once.

(c) Male worm
1.  700µ long, 45µ broad.
2.  Oesophagus resembles free-living female.

3.  Tail curved centrally

4.  Two minute, brown curved spicules each measuring 40 µ
(Male worms also exist in parasitic and free living forms but it is very difficult to differentiate morphologically.)

(d) Larvae
1.  225 µ long, 16 µ broad.
2.  Short club-shaped oesophagus, behind which a globular dilatation can be seen.

Life cycle

 

 

Chart : Life cycle of Strongyloides stercoralis

Pathogenicity

1. Acute intractable diarrhoea with blood and mucus.
2. Urticarial rash.

Diagnosis
1. Larvae in freshly passed faeces.

2. Filariform larvae in sputum.

Chemotherapy
As in Enterobius vermicularis.

TRICHURIS TRICHIURA
(Whip worm)

Habitat

1. Adult worms in caecum of man, also in appendix and colon.

2. Eggs in faeces.
3.   Infective larvae in eggs, soil, water, green vegetables.

Morphology

1. Body resembles a whip with hair like anterior 3/5 part and much stouter posterior 2/5 part.
2. Anterior extremity consists of a long oesophagus, a minute channel in a single column of large cells.
3. Male worms measures 4 cm in length; posterior extremity is spirally coiled and 2 mm broad.
4. Female worm measures 5 cm in length, posterior extremity is straight and 2 mm broad; Vulva is situated at junction of the two parts of body.

5. Eggs brown, barrel-shaped with a plug at each pole; 50 µ  x 25 µ; contain a fertilized unsegmented ovum.
Habitat
1.  Adult worms in small intestine of rat pig and
  man.
  Larvae liberated in blood stream, encyst in
  muscles.
  Infective larvae encysted in flesh of pig and
  man.

- I

II

'I

16-34

(a) Male :- 1. Oesophagus 2. Spicule.
(b) Female :- 1. vulva.

Fig. 16.34. Trichuris trichiura

.


Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Trichuris trichiura

Pathogenicity

Generally symptomless; occasionally produces appendicitis.

Chemotherapy

As in Enterobius vennicularis.

 

TRICHINELLA SPIRALIS

Habitat

1.                 Adult worms in small intestine of rat, pig, and man.

2.                 Larvae liberated in blood stream, encyst in muscles.

3.                 Infected larvae encysted in flesh of pig and man.

Morphology

(a) Male worm (rarely found)
1.  1.5 mm long, 40µ broad.
2  Posterior extremity bears a pair of minute ear-like flaps.

16-35

(a) Male, showing intestine and two earlike flaps posteriorly.
(b) Female  :- 1. vulva 2. oesophagus 3. uterus 4. intestine

Fig. 16.35. Trichinella spiralis

 

(b)  Female worm
1.  Viviparous, i.e., doesn't pass eggs.
2.  3 min long, 60µ broad.
3.  Vulva situated close to the anterior extremity.

Life Cycle

Chart : Life cycle of Trichinella spiralis

Pathogenicity

1.  Nausea, vomiting, colic, diarrhoea; occasionally haemorrhage.
2.  Dyspnoea.
3.  Oedema of face.
4.  Coma and finally death.

Chemotherapy

Thiabendazole (Mintezol) L5 g after evening meal to be repeated after next morning meal,

ANKYLOSTOMA DUODENALE
(Hookworm)

Habitat

1.  Adult worms in jejunum, occasionally in duodenum of man.
2.  Eggs in faeces.
3.  Infective larvae in soil, and water.

Morphology

(a) In both sexes
1. Cylindrical in shape, plump, rigid creamy-white; anterior extremity bent dorsally.
2.  A minute, finger-like cervical papilla in front, opposite the middle of oesophagus
3.  Cuticle finely striated transversely.

16-36
Fig. 16.36. Ankylostoma duodenale - Head showing teeth, cervical papillae, nerve ring and oesophagus

4.  Mouth cavity (buccal capsule) large and conspicuous; lined with chitin.
5. Ventrally, the oral aperature is guarded by six teeth; middle two extremely small while remaining four are large and conspicuous.
6. Two ventral teeth-like lancets situated subventrally within the buccal capsules.

7.  Oesophagus, opens at the base of mouth cavity.
8. On the dorsal aspect of circular oral aperture, there is U-shaped gap which marks the opening of dorsal oesophageal (salivary gland) situated dorsally in the wall of oesophagus.
9. Oesophagus arises at the base of the chitinous buccal capsule; lumen fined with chin; posteriorly opens into the intestine, the opening being guarded by a vulva.
10.  Intestine is a straight tube which runs posteriorly to the anus.

(b) Male worm:

1.  1 cm long, 0.5 mm broad.
2.  Male genital organs consist of a tube measuring more than double the worm length.  
3. Single tubular testis, thrown into loops occupying middle third of the body;
continuous posteriorly with a vas deferens which dilates into a spindle shaped
seminal vesicle.
4. Long ejaculatory duct surrounded by a very prominent cement gland and opens into cloaca.
5. Two minute sac-like structures, situated dorsally, on terminal part of intestine;
each sac contains a protrusile, chitinous, rod-like body called a spicule.
6. During copulation, the spicules are guided by a chitinous development of the
wall of cloaca which is called gubernaculum.

(c) Female worm

1.  1.2 cm long, 0.6 mm broad.
2.  Vulva at the junction of middle and posterior thirds.

3.  Female genitalia consist of two long coiled tubes which unite to form a common vagina which opens at vulva.

4. The distal part of each duct is ovary, middle part the oviduct and the terminal part, the uterus.

(d) Eggs.
1.  Oval and colourless with broadly rounded extremities.
2.  60 µ x 40 µ
3. Contains an ovum segmented into 4 cells with clear space between the segmented ovum and egg shell.

16-37
Fig. 16.37. Ovum of Ankylostoma duodenale.

Chart : Life cycle of Ankylostoma duodenale

Pathogenicity

1.     Grounds itch and urticaria.

2.     Anaemia.

Diagnosis

Ova in faeces

Chemotherapy
1. Bephenium hydroxynaphthoate (Alcopar) 5 g single dose.
2. Tetramisole (Decaris) 150 ing single dose
3. Thiabendazole (Mintezol) 1.5 g daily for 2 days.

WUCHERERIA BANCROFTI

Habitat

Adult worms in lymph glands, lymphatic vessels, superficial abscesses, retroperitoneal tissue and other sites.
2.  Microfilariae occur in peripheral blood normally at night.
3. Infective larvae, in developmental stages, in the gut and muscles of mosquito; later in the mouth parts of mosquito.

Morphology
1.  Adult male measures 3 cm in length and 0.12 mm in breadth; adult female measures 8 cm in length and 0.23 mm in breadth.

3.     Anterior end is rounded and bulging.
3.  Posterior end is ventrally curved.
4.  Cuticle is smooth (microscopically).
5. Microfilariae sheathed with smooth curves; 300 µ x 8 µ; double row of nuclei present throughout length except at tip.

 

Chart : Life cycle of Wuchereria bancrofti

Pathogenicity

Filariasis characterised by:
1. Irregular fever
2. Lymphangitis
3  Enlargement of lymph glands
4.  Thickening of skin

5. Elephantiasis of legs, scrotum and vulva

6. Chyluria.

Chemotherapy

Diethylcarbamazine citrate (Hetrazan) 50-100 mg thrice a day for 3-4 weeks.

Diagnosis

Microfilariae in night blood smear.

LOA LOA

Habitat

1. Adult worms in subcutaneous connective tissue, mesentery, and parietal peritoneum;  more rapidly in the body and can be seen in subconjunctival tissue of the eye.
2.  Micrfilariae in the peripheral blood during day time.
3.  Developmental forms in gut and muscles of horse-fly, Chrysops dimidiata; later infective larvae reach its mouth parts.

Morphology

1.  Adult male measures 3 cm in length 3.35 min in breadth; adult female measures 6 cm in length, 0.45 mm in breadth.
2.  Microscopically, the cuticle is covered with wart-like processes except near both end.

3. Microfilariae sheathed with irregular outline, 250µ x 8µ; with nuclei extending to the tip.


Life cycle

Same as in Wuchereria bancrofti with only a different insect host.

Pathogenicity

Calabar swellings on various parts of body.
Diagnosis

Microfilariae in mid-day smears.

Chemotherapy

As in W. bancrofti.

DRACUNCULUS MEDINENSIS

Habitat

1.     Adult females in subcutaneous tissue, chiefly of legs, ankle and feet, and in intermuscular connective tissues.

2.     Where about of male worms not known (In fact it has been detected in few historic cases only).

3.     Microfilariae found on ulcerated surface in the centre of which the prolapsed uterus of female worm is often visible.

4.     Developmental forms of infective larvae occur in the body of cyclops. 

Morphology

1.     Adult female measures 120 cm in length and L5 mm in breadth; adult male measures 2 cm in length.

2.     Head has chitinous shield.

3.     Vulva is just behind the head.

4.     Larvae with long, tapering tail, 500 µ x 20 µ

Life Cycle


Chart : Life cycle of Dracunculus medinensis

Pathogenicity

 Skin ulcers and inflammation.

Diagnosis

Larvae in washings of ulcer.

Chemotherapy

As in W. bancrofti.

GENERAL

Parasites Spread by Water

A. Protozoa
I. Entamoeba histolytica
2. Balantidium coli.

B. Helminths

(a)  Cestodes
I. Taenia solium
2. Hymenolepis nana
3. Dibothriocephalus latus
4. Taenia granulosa.

(b)  Trematodes
1. Schistosoma species
2. Fasciola hepatica
3. Fasciolopsis buski.

(c) Nematodes

I. Ascaris lumbaricoides
2. Trichuris trichiura
3. Strongyloides stercoralis

4. Ankylostoma duodenale
5. Nectar americanas
6. Dracunculus medinensis.

Orthropod Borne Parasites :-

A. Protozoa
1. Entamoeba histolytica
2. Balantidium coli
3. Trypanosoma gambiense
4. Leishmania donovani
5. Malarial parasite.

B.  Helminths
(a) Cestodes
1. Taenia solium
2. Dibothriocephalus latus
3. Taenia granulosa

(b) Trematode:
- Paragonimus westermanii.

[c] Nematodes

1. Ascaris lumbaricoides

2. Trichuris trichiura

3. Strongyloides stercoralis

4. Ankylostoma duodenale

5. Nectar americanas

6. Wuchereria bancrofti

7. Loa loa

8. Dipetalonema

9. Onchocera volvulus

10. Filaria ozzardi

11. Dracunculus medinensis

Parasites Found on Skin :-

(1)  Spirochaeta pallida
(2)  Leishmania
(3)  Onchocerca volvulus
(4)  Eggs of Enterobius vermicularis (on perianal skin)
(5)  Agamofilaria  streptocercas
(6)  Dracunculus medinensis
(7)  Cysticercus cellulosae

Parasites Found in Muscle :-

(1)  Leishmania forms in Trypanosoma cruzi

[2] Sarcocystis

[3] Cysticercus cellulosae

[4] Trichinella spiralis – encysted larvae

 

Parasites found in Intestines :-

Taenia solium

Taenia saginata

Hymenolepsis nana

Dibothriocephalus latus

Fasciolopsis buski

Heterophyes heterophyes

Ascaris lumbaricoides

Enterobius vermicularis

Ankylostoma duodenale

Nectar americanas

Trichinella spiralis

 

Parasites found in Intestinal wall

(1)  Entamoeba histolytica - unencysted form
(2)  Balantidium coli - unencysted form
(3)  Eggs of Schistosoma mansoni (papillomata)
(4)  Eggs of Schistosoma haematobium (papillomata), rare
(5)  Eggs of Schistosoma japonicurn (papillomata)
(6)  Stronglyoides stercoralis.

Parasites found in Liver
(1) Spirochaeta pallida
(2) Entameoba histolytica (abscess)
(3) Malaria pigment  in reticulo-endothelial  cells
(4) Leishmania   in reticulo-endothelial  cells
(5) Cysticercus cellulosae

(6) Hydatid cysts
[7] Clonorchis sinensis  in bile-duct
[8] Fasciola hepatica   in bile-duct
[9] Eggs of Schistosoma mansoni
[10] Eggs of Schistosoma haematobium
(11)  Eggs of Schistosoma japonicum
(12)  Adult of Schistosoma japonicum

 

Parasites found In Spleen

(1)  Malaria pigment

(2) Leishmania

(3) Cystcercus cellulosae

(4) Hydatid cysts

(5) Eggs of Schistosoma haematobium

(6) Eggs of Schistosoma mansoni.

 

Parasites found in Lungs

(1)  Cysticerus cellulosae
(2)  Paragonimus westermanii
(3)  Eggs of Schistosoma haematobium
(4)  Eggs of Schistosoma mansoni
(5)  Strongiloides stercoralis - adults and larvae.

 

Parasites found In Blood

(1) Spifillum minus

(2) Plasmodium majaliae

(3) Plasmodium vivax

(4) Plasmodium falcipaium

(5) Plasmodium ovale

(6) Trypanosoma gambiense

(7) Trypanosoma donovani (rare)

(8) Leishmania cruzi

(9) Larvae of Wuchereyia bancrofti

(10) Microfilaria malayi

(11) Larvae of Loa loa

(12) Larvae of Dipetalonemaperstans

(13) Larvae of "Filaria" ozzagdi.

 


 

 


Paperback and Kindle Links at ukmall.net


Publish On Amazon Free by Dr K Chaudhry

ITI : Fitter Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry   

Tally ERP 9 Made Easy by Dr K Chaudhry

Free Localhost : Make Your Computer A php Machine by Dr K Chaudhry

Publish On Createspace Free by Dr K Chaudhry

Anatomy Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Physiology Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Biochemistry Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Pathology Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Pharmacology Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Forensic medicine Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Medicine Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Surgery Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Obstetrics & Gynaecology Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Ophthalmology Mnemonics by Dr K Chaudhry

Medicine Made Easy by Dr K Chaudhry

Patho Micro Made Easy by Dr K Chaudhry

Medical Laboratory Techniques by Dr K Chaudhry

MCQuestions in Paraclinical Sciences by Dr K Chaudhry

Mere Geet, Meri Awaaz, Meri Sanvednaayen by Dr K Chaudhry

Astrology Made Easy by Dr K Chaudhry

Affiliate Marketing Tips & Scripts by Dr K Chaudhry


Global Book Shop Online

B-1/104 Paschim Vihar, New Delhi 110063

Tel: 01142316457, 9810570740, 9810571993

ukmall.net  facebook.com/doctorkc  youtube.com/drksongs